summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2006-01-11 23:49:54 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2006-01-11 23:49:54 +0000
commit2bbad84a3ea318feba6156d09780f64fd986678f (patch)
tree5cbd0dca0980b2c9c6cb1f32baab5205356a0021 /Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx
parent1defb76eaaa651e4057ee693344d6b47876cae43 (diff)
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@125 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx12782
1 files changed, 12782 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9dbf142a2c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,12782 @@
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% AASTeX.dtx: document class for AAS journal.
+% Copyright(C) 2003 American Astronomical Society.
+%
+% Disclaimer:
+% This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+% without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+%
+% ReadMe:
+% For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+% installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+%
+% \fi
+% \CheckSum{5961}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}%
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%% filename = "aastex.dtx",
+%%% version = "5.2",
+%%% date = "2005/06/22",
+%%% time = "16:23:00 GMT",
+%%% checksum = "5964",
+%%% author = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:ogawa@teleport.com)",
+%%% revised by = "SR Nova Private Ltd."
+%%% copyright = "Copyright (C) 2003 American Astronomical Society
+%%%
+%%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%%% The latest version of this license is in
+%%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%%
+%%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%%
+%%% The Current Maintainer of this work is the American Astronomical Society.
+%%%
+%%% This work consists of all files listed in the document README.
+%%%
+%%% address = "American Astronomical Society
+%%% USA",
+%%% telephone = "+1 ???",
+%%% FAX = "",
+%%% email = "aastex-help@aas.org",
+%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%% keywords = "latex, AAS, journal",
+%%% supported = "yes",
+%%% abstract = "formatter for AAS journal submissions",
+%%% docstring = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%% }
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{Read.Me} file,
+% which contains basic information about this document class.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{Read.Me}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{Read.Me}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all macro files and documentation.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%aasclass.dtx
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex aasclass.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
+% generates the readme, the installer, and a configuration file for
+% this run.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%Read.Me aasclass.ins ltxdoc.cfg
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex aasclass.ins}}%
+% Typesetting the installer generates
+% the class file, style file, user guide, and sample documents,
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%aastex.cls aastex.sty aasclass.tex aasguide.tex
+%sample.tex table.tex
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
+% The following are the online documentation:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%aasclass.dvi aasguide.dvi
+%sample.dvi table.dvi
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%aasclass.aux aasclass.toc
+%aasclass.idx aasclass.ilg aasclass.ind
+%aasguide.aux aasguide.toc
+%aasguide.idx aasguide.ilg aasguide.ind
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Font files}%
+% In support of the |astro| font, certain files are provided.
+%
+% For those running Metafont, the primary source for the |astro| font is
+% at |CTAN://tex-archive/fonts/astro| and consists of:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%astrosym.doc
+%astrosym.mf
+%astrosym.uni
+%astrosym.mac
+%astrosym.com
+%astrosym.tex
+% \end{verbatim}
+% with the first-mentioned file representing the documentation.
+%
+% Metrics for the font are provided as:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%astrosym.tfm
+%astrosym.pl
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% For those with PostScript-capable previewers and printers,
+% we provide the font in an ATM-compatible PostScript Type~1 format.
+%
+% For MacOS with ATM,
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%Astrosym.sit.bin
+% metrics
+% astrosym metrics % For Textures
+% font
+% Astro
+% Astrosym.bmap
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% For MacOS with ATM,
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%ASTROSYM.72
+%ASTROSYM.FON
+%ASTROSYM.INF
+%ASTROSYM.PFB
+%ASTROSYM.PFM
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% For UNIX,
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%72.Astrosym
+%Astrosym.afm
+%Astrosym.pfa
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \section{The {\sc docstrip} modules}
+%
+% \subsection{Code common to all modules}%
+% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we
+% want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Here is some code for the document style,
+% which can be run under both \LaTeX2.09 or
+% \LaTeXe.
+% If the latter, we terminate reading of the
+% style file and
+% simply load the document class instead.
+% If the former, we provide dummy
+% definitions for the \LaTeXe\ commands
+% appearing in the style file.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<style>\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined
+%<style> \def\next{}%
+%<style>\else
+%<style> \def\next{%
+%<style> \endinput
+%<style> \@obsoletefile{aastex.cls}{aastex.sty}\LoadClass{aastex}%
+%<style> }%
+%<style>\fi\next
+%<style>\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{\message{File: #1 #2}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% To start with, we declare that
+% this file can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|class|guide|sample|table>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%</doc|class|guide|sample|table>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<class>\ProvidesClass{aastex}%
+%<style>\ProvidesFile{aastex.sty}%
+%<guide>\ProvidesFile{aasguide.tex}%
+%<symbols>\ProvidesFile{aassymbols.tex}%
+%<sample>\ProvidesFile{sample.tex}%
+%<table>\ProvidesFile{table1.tex}%
+%<*doc>
+\expandafter\ProvidesFile\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%</doc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Version and Date}%
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ [2005/06/22 5.2/AAS markup document class]%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The driver module \texttt{doc}}
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the |.dtx| file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The |\end{document}| command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ltxdoc configuration file}
+%
+% This {\sc docstrip} module generates a local file \file{ltxdoc.cfg},
+% which contains customizing commands for
+% when the programmer documentation \file{aasclass.dtx} is typeset.
+%
+% In particular, we request the production of an index of macros.
+%
+% For more information on such proccessing options,
+% see the standard \LaTeX\ file \file{ltxdoc.dtx}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents}{ltxdoc.cfg}
+% ltxdoc.cfg - local copy for aasclass directory
+\AtBeginDocument{\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs}
+\AtEndDocument{\PrintIndex}
+\end{filecontents}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Class Statement}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the |ltxdoc| class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass[draft]{ltxdoc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Indexing directives}
+% We don't want everything to appear in the index
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DoNotIndex{\',\.,\@M,\@@input,\@Alph,\@alph,\@addtoreset,\@arabic}
+\DoNotIndex{\@badmath,\@centercr,\@cite}
+\DoNotIndex{\@dotsep,\@empty,\@float,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ignoretrue}
+\DoNotIndex{\@input,\@ixpt,\@m,\@minus,\@mkboth}
+\DoNotIndex{\@ne,\@nil,\@nomath,\@plus,\roman,\@set@topoint}
+\DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta,\@tempdima,\@tempdimb}
+\DoNotIndex{\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@viipt,\@viiipt,\@vipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\@vpt,\@warning,\@xiipt,\@xipt,\@xivpt,\@xpt,\@xviipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\@xxpt,\@xxvpt,\\,\ ,\addpenalty,\addtolength,\addvspace}
+\DoNotIndex{\advance,\ast,\begin,\begingroup,\bfseries,\bgroup,\box}
+\DoNotIndex{\bullet}
+\DoNotIndex{\cdot,\cite,\CodelineIndex,\cr,\day,\DeclareOption}
+\DoNotIndex{\def,\DisableCrossrefs,\divide,\DocInput,\documentclass}
+\DoNotIndex{\DoNotIndex,\egroup,\ifdim,\else,\fi,\em,\endtrivlist}
+\DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\end@dblfloat,\end@float,\endgroup}
+\DoNotIndex{\endlist,\everycr,\everypar,\ExecuteOptions,\expandafter}
+\DoNotIndex{\fbox}
+\DoNotIndex{\filedate,\filename,\fileversion,\fontsize,\framebox,\gdef}
+\DoNotIndex{\global,\halign,\hangindent,\hbox,\hfil,\hfill,\hrule}
+\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\if@tempswa,\ifcase,\or,\fi,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\ifhmode,\ifvmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\input}
+\DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\let,\leftmark}
+\DoNotIndex{\list,\llap,\long,\m@ne,\m@th,\mark,\markboth,\markright}
+\DoNotIndex{\month,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newenvironment}
+\DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newdimen}
+\DoNotIndex{\newlength,\newpage,\nobreak,\noindent,\null,\number}
+\DoNotIndex{\numberline,\OldMakeindex,\OnlyDescription,\p@}
+\DoNotIndex{\pagestyle,\par,\paragraph,\paragraphmark,\parfillskip}
+\DoNotIndex{\penalty,\PrintChanges,\PrintIndex,\ProcessOptions}
+\DoNotIndex{\protect,\ProvidesClass,\raggedbottom,\raggedright}
+\DoNotIndex{\refstepcounter,\relax,\renewcommand}
+\DoNotIndex{\rightmargin,\rightmark,\rightskip,\rlap,\rmfamily}
+\DoNotIndex{\secdef,\selectfont,\setbox,\setcounter,\setlength}
+\DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sfcode,\skip,\sloppy,\slshape,\space}
+\DoNotIndex{\symbol,\the,\trivlist,\typeout,\tw@,\undefined,\uppercase}
+\DoNotIndex{\usecounter,\usefont,\usepackage,\vfil,\vfill,\viiipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\viipt,\vipt,\vskip,\vspace}
+\DoNotIndex{\wd,\xiipt,\year,\z@}
+\DoNotIndex{\next}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We \emph{do} want an index, using linenumbers
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+% We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following command retrieves the date and version information
+% from this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Direct \file{ltxdoc} to produce an index and cross references.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Macros}
+% Some commonly used abbreviations
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf {#1}}%
+%\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt {#1}}%
+\newcommand*{\Lcount}[1]{\textsl {\small#1}}%
+\newcommand*{\pstyle}[1]{\textsl {#1}}%
+\newcommand\aastex{AAS\TeX}%
+\setlength\arraycolsep{0pt}%
+\let\oarg\undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Modify |theindex| environment so that it produces a TOC entry
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\makeatletter
+\renewenvironment{theindex}
+ {\if@twocolumn
+ \@restonecolfalse
+ \else
+ \@restonecoltrue
+ \fi
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \twocolumn[\section{\indexname}]%
+% \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+% {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem}
+ {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+\makeatother
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Look out! We are about to reach deep.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\makeatletter
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We paste in a bit of very useful code extracted from
+% \file{ltxguide.cls}, by Alan Jeffrey.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ % This code stolen from ltxguide.cls:
+% Some hacks with verbatim... NB: this would be better done with the
+% verbatim package, but this document has to run on any LaTeX
+% installation.
+
+\let\o@verbatim\verbatim
+\def\verbatim{%
+ \ifhmode\unskip\par\fi
+% \nopagebreak % Overridden by list penalty
+ \ifx\@currsize\normalsize
+ \small
+ \fi
+ \o@verbatim
+}
+
+% Here we extend the font-setting command to include making <> active
+% (ie adjusting the input encoding).
+\renewcommand \verbatim@font {%
+ \normalfont \ttfamily
+ \catcode`\<=\active
+ \catcode`\>=\active
+}
+
+% Make |...| a synonym for \verb|...|.
+\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
+\MakeShortVerb{\|}
+
+
+% Make active <...> produce italics surrounded by angle brackets
+% (used in verbatim and \verb).
+% << produces a less-than, and >> produces a greater-than.
+
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\<=\active
+ \catcode`\>=\active
+ \gdef<{\@ifnextchar<\@lt\@meta}
+ \gdef>{\@ifnextchar>\@gt\@gtr@err}
+ \gdef\@meta#1>{\m{#1}}
+ \gdef\@lt<{\char`\<}
+ \gdef\@gt>{\char`\>}
+\endgroup
+\def\@gtr@err{%
+ \ClassError{ltxguide}{%
+ Isolated \protect>%
+ }{%
+ In this document class, \protect<...\protect>
+ is used to indicate a parameter.\MessageBreak
+ I've just found a \protect> on its own.
+ Perhaps you meant to type \protect>\protect>?
+ }%
+}
+\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`\do\,\do\'\do\-}
+
+% Various forms of argument:
+
+\newcommand{\m}[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it #1\/$\rangle$}}
+\renewcommand{\arg}[1]{{\tt\string{}\m{#1}{\tt\string}}}
+\newcommand{\oarg}[1]{{\tt[%]
+}\m{#1}{\tt%[
+]}}
+\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}}
+\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}%
+ % end of code stolen from ltxguide.cls. Thanks, Alan.
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Define sectioning command below |\subsubsection|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\subsubsubsection{%
+ \@startsection{subsubsection}{4}%
+ {\z@}{-15\p@\@plus-5\p@\@minus-2\p@}%
+ {5\p@}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Coax the version number into |filecontents|-generated files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endfilecontents{%
+ \immediate\write\reserved@c{%
+ \string\iffalse\space ltxdoc klootch^^J%
+ This file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.%
+ \string\fi
+ }%
+ \immediate\closeout\reserved@c
+ \def\T##1##2##3{%
+ \ifx##1\@undefined\else
+ \@latex@warning@no@line{##2 has been converted to Blank ##3e}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \T\L{Form Feed}{Lin}%
+ \T\I{Tab}{Spac}%
+ \immediate\write\@unused{}%
+}%
+\expandafter\let\csname endfilecontents*\endcsname\endfilecontents
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% OK, an end to the hacking!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\makeatother
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The installer file}
+%
+% The installer \file{aasclass.ins} appears here.
+% If you have retrieved the standard distribution of this class,
+% the installer file is already on your filesystem.
+% If you are bootstrapping,
+% the first typesetting of the \file{.dtx} file
+% will cause the installer to be generated.
+%
+% The following modules are used to direct
+% {\sc docstrip} in generating the external files:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{lll}
+% \textbf{Module}&\textbf{File}&\textbf{Description}\\
+% class &\file{aastex.cls} &document class\\
+% style &\file{aastex.sty} &document style\\
+% doc &\file{aasclass.tex}&driver for programmer's documantation\\
+% guide &\file{aasguide.tex}&user guide\\
+% symbols &\file{aassymbols.tex}&AAS and AMS symbols crib sheet\\
+% sample &\file{sample.tex} &sample\\
+% table &\file{table.tex}&complex table\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents}{aasclass.ins}
+%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
+%% from aasclass.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX.
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+%See the URL in the file Read.Me.
+
+Copyright notice.
+
+ These files are distributed
+ WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\keepsilent
+\generate{%
+ \file{aastex.cls}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{class}}%
+ \file{aastex.sty}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{style}}%
+ \file{aasclass.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{doc}}%
+ \file{aasguide.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{guide}}%
+ \file{aassymbols.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{symbols}}%
+ \file{sample.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{sample}}%
+ \file{table.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{table}}%
+}%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space aastex.cls}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the user documentation,
+ run aasguide.tex through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the AAS and AMS symbols crib sheet,
+ run aassymbols.tex through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To typeset the aastex sample document,
+ run sample.tex and table.tex
+ through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the programmer documentation,
+ run aasclass.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+\end{filecontents}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note that, because all of the files generated by the installer
+% are part of the standard distribution, it will
+% be necessary to run the installer only when bootstrapping
+% (or, of course, during development).
+% Note, too, that it is rare to generate the |doc|
+% module because it suffices to simply typeset the |.dtx| file itself.
+%
+% \subsubsection{The \file{Read.Me} File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% readme file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% |\StopEventually| command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+% The former simply summarize the installation
+% instructions and refers the reader to
+% the user guide \file{awljavgd}.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying these processes
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{Read.Me}
+\title{%
+ The \aastex\ Document Class For \LaTeXe\\
+ Programmer's Manual%
+ \thanks{%
+ This file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.%
+ % For version number and date, search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+ % or see the end of the Read.Me file.
+ }%
+}%
+
+\author{%
+Chris Biemesderfer (\texttt{mailto:chris@seagoat.com}), v4\\
+Arthur Ogawa (\texttt{mailto:ogawa@teleport.com}), v\fileversion\\
+Copyright (C) 1998 AAS
+}%
+\maketitle
+
+\aastex\ provides a markup system and formatter for authoring
+papers to be submitted electronically to a number of
+astonomy journals.
+This file embodies the document class,
+the implementation, and the user documentation.
+
+The distribution point for \aastex\ is
+\file{ftp://ftp.aas.org/pubs/aastex50.zip}, which contains
+fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe.
+Certain features of \aastex\ (such as landscape tables)
+require a PostScript printer.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+and move the file \file{aastex.cls}
+into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+If you will be using the |astro| font in your \aastex\ documents,
+put the file \file{Astrosym.tfm} where \TeX\ can find it
+(Textures users will put \file{Astrosym metrics} into their \file{TeX fonts} folder).
+Now either install the (ATM-compatible) PostScript Type~1 fonts
+appropriate to your operating system and \TeX\ implementation,
+or install the MetaFont source (both provided with \aastex).
+In any case, you are responsible for properly installing the
+|astro| font on your system.
+
+Then print out the user guide \file{aasguide.dvi} and
+the two sample documents, \file{sample.dvi} and \file{table.dvi}.
+If need be, print the programmer's manual \file{aasclass.dvi}.
+
+\StopEventually{}\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The document class \file{aastex.cls} (plus other macro files),
+the user documentation \file{aasguide.tex},
+and the sample documents
+are generated from this file, \file{aasclass.dtx},
+via the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX.
+The documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+the same file by simply typesetting it with \LaTeX.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions for V5.0}
+
+You may bootstrap \aastex\ solely from \file{aasclass.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{aasclass.dtx} with \LaTeX;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with the installer \file{aasclass.ins} and the file \file{Read.Me}.
+
+Note that you will have to run MakeIndex (using the \LaTeX\ standard
+\file{gind.ist}) and retypeset with \LaTeX\ as appropriate.
+
+\item
+Now typeset \file{aasclass.ins}, thereby generating
+macro files \file{aastex.cls}, and \file{aastex.sty}, user documentation \file{aasguide.tex}, \file{aassymbols.tex},
+the sample file \file{sample.tex} and the sample table
+\file{table.tex}.
+
+\item
+Install \file{aastex.cls} and \file{aastex.sty}:
+move them to a location
+in your file system where they will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+\item
+Typeset \file{aasguide.tex} to obtain the user documentation
+(you will have to run MakeIndex and retypeset as needed),
+
+\item
+Typeset the sample file \file{sample.tex}.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+For your reference,
+there are six \TeX\ log files appended to this file
+(locate them by searching on |preloaded format=|).
+They result respectively from typesetting
+\file{aasclass.dtx}, \file{aasclass.ins}, \file{aasguide.tex},
+\file{aassymbols.tex},
+\file{sample.tex}, \file{table.tex}.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions for V4.1}
+
+When you bootstrap V5.0, you automatically create the files rquired for the
+V4.1 distribution, which consists of a number of the documents for V4.0
+along with style files to patch it, plus revised sample documents.
+The user guide for V5.0 is also the guide for 4.1; relevant differences
+appear in an appendix.
+
+The files for version~4.1 are located in a separate part of the distribution tree,
+a directory called \file{./V4.1/}.
+
+To build, simply copy the file
+\file{aastex.sty} into the 4.1 directory.
+Then copy
+the sample files \file{sample.tex}, \file{sample2.tex}, and \file{samptbls.tex},
+and the sample tables
+\file{table1.tex}, \file{table2.tex}, \file{table3.tex}, and \file{complext.tex}
+into the same directory.
+Finally, copy
+\file{aasguide.dvi} and \file{aasguide.ps} into the same directory.
+
+\end{filecontents*}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The Body of the Programmers Documentation}
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% |\DocInput| directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common |ltxdoc| idiom.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}%
+\PrintIndex
+% ^^A\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of the |doc| module:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</doc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Common to Document Style and Class}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\substitute@option}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\substitute@option#1#2{%
+ \ClassWarning{aastex}{%
+ Substyle #1 is deprecated in aastex.
+ Using #2 instead (please fix your document).
+ }\@nameuse{ds@#2}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Document Style Module}%
+%
+% The document style is provided for compatibility sake.
+% If the user's document has
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\documentstyle[<options>]{aastex}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% and it is run under \LaTeXe, then this style file will be called,
+% but the document class will be loaded instead.
+% A warning message is given admonishing the user to switch to
+% using |\documentclass|.
+%
+% If the same document is run under \LaTeX 2.09, \aastex\ will run
+% version 4.1 (which is an updated version~4.0).
+%
+% Here begins the style file:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Document Style Options}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ClassWarning}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ClassWarning#1#2{\@warning{Style #1: #2}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{ds@manuscript}
+% \begin{macro}{ds@preprint}
+% \begin{macro}{ds@preprint2}
+% The substyle options are defined here.
+% As in the document class, exactly one substyle will be in effect;
+% the default being the |manuscript| substyle.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ds@manuscript{\def\aastex@substyle{aasms4}}%
+\def\aastex@substyle{aasms4}%
+\def\ds@preprint{\def\aastex@substyle{aaspp4}}%
+\@namedef{ds@preprint2}{\def\aastex@substyle{aas2pp4}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{ds@aasms4}
+% \begin{macro}{ds@aaspp4}
+% \begin{macro}{ds@aas2pp4}
+% \begin{macro}{ds@ajpt4}
+% \begin{macro}{ds@apjpt4}
+% For backward compatibility, we declare options corresponding to V4.0
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{ds@aasms4}{\substitute@option{aasms4}{manuscript}}%
+\@namedef{ds@aaspp4}{\substitute@option{aaspp4}{preprint}}%
+\@namedef{ds@aas2pp4}{\substitute@option{aas2pp4}{preprint2}}%
+\@namedef{ds@aj_pt4}{\substitute@option{aj_pt4}{preprint}}%
+\@namedef{ds@apjpt4}{\substitute@option{apjpt4}{preprint}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{ds@eqsecnum}
+% \begin{macro}{ds@tighten}
+% \begin{macro}{ds@flushrt}
+% The remaining document style options are defined here.
+% They have the same significance as those of the
+% document class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ds@eqsecnum{\AtEndOfClass{\eqsecnum}}%
+\def\ds@tighten{\AtEndOfClass{\tightenlines}}%
+\def\ds@flushrt{%
+ \AtEndOfClass{%
+ \@rightskip=\z@\rightskip\@rightskip % Flush right
+ \pretolerance=100\relax % Enable hyphenation
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{\LaTeXe\ Equipment Needed}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@testopt}
+% The following is snitched from \LaTeX2e.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@testopt#1#2{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{#1}{#1[#2]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The remaining definitions merely provide for
+% a bare emulation of \LaTeXe.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AtEndOfClass}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\appdef#1#2{%
+ \toks@\expandafter{#1}\toks\@ne{#2}\edef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks\@ne}%
+}%
+\def\AtEndOfClass{\appdef\@styleh@@k}%
+\def\@styleh@@k{}%
+\def\AtBeginDocument{\appdef\@begindocumenthook}%
+\def\@begindocumenthook{}%
+\appdef\document{\@begindocumenthook}%
+\def\@latex@warning{\@warning}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Some low-level macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\protected@edef{\edef}%
+\def\@finalstrut#1{\strut}%
+\let\color@begingroup\begingroup
+\let\color@endgroup\endgroup
+\def\G@refundefinedtrue{}%
+\long\def\@firstofone#1{#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Font-oriented macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rmfamily{\rm}%
+\def\itshape{\it}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Base Document Style and Packages}%
+%
+% Read in the base document style, the \LaTeX\ standard
+% article style.
+% It will execute the document style options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@@input article.sty\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Add in the |natbib| package for \LaTeX2.09
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@@input natbib209.sty\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Most of the remainder of the document style
+% is drawn from the code going into \file{aastex.cls}.
+%
+% We first read in the kernel modifications,
+% then read in the selected V4.0 substyle,
+% insert our V4.1 overrides,
+% then act on the document style options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Document Class Module}
+% The document class module comprises this and the next
+% five sections.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class>
+\ClassInfo{aastex}{%
+ Original \protect\LaTeX2.09 style
+ by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@seagoat.com).
+ Adapted to \protect\LaTeXe\space
+ by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com)%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Type Size}
+% \begin{macro}{\aas@ptsize}
+% The macro |\aas@ptsize| works very much like
+% the |\@ptsize| macro of \file{classes.dtx},
+% but in this class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iflong@abstract
+\global\long@abstractfalse
+\DeclareOption{10pt}{\newcommand\aas@ptsize{0}}%
+\DeclareOption{11pt}{\newcommand\aas@ptsize{1}}%
+\DeclareOption{12pt}{\newcommand\aas@ptsize{2}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Landscape Orientation}
+% The option \Lopt{landscape} is disabled in this document class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{landscape}{\OptionNotUsed}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Equations Numbered by Section}
+%
+% The option \Lopt{eqsecnum} invokes |\eqsecnum|, q.v.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{eqsecnum}{\AtEndOfClass{\eqsecnum}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Longabstract}
+% The option \Lopt{longabstract} cause the long abstract text to break into
+% next page within preprint2. Using this option has no effect with other styles.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{longabstract}{\global\long@abstracttrue}
+% use when abstract exceed title page
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Set Text Justified Rather Than Ragged Right}
+%
+% The option \Lopt{flushrt} causes the text to set
+% justified, hyphenated rather than ragged right, nohyphens
+% as is normal in the |manuscript| substyle.
+%
+% Asserting this option presently has no effect in
+% the other substyles because they make no changes
+% to the justification. If this situation changes,
+% be careful to supply the appropriate hook as needed.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{flushrt}{\let\opt@just\just@just}%
+\let\opt@just\@empty
+\def\just@just{%
+ \@rightskip\z@skip
+ \rightskip\@rightskip
+ \pretolerance=100\relax
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Use Tight Leading Rather Than Doublespace}
+%
+% The option \Lopt{tighten} causes the text to set
+% with tight leading rather than double spacing
+% as is normal in the |manuscript| substyle.
+%
+% Asserting this option presently has no effect in
+% the other substyles because they make no changes
+% to the justification. If this situation changes,
+% be careful to supply the appropriate hook as needed.
+%
+% Not! In the manuscript substyle, leading is doubled and
+% the |\tightenlines| command is effectively disabled.
+% So, what gives?
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{tighten}{\def\opt@tighten{\tightenlines}}%
+\let\opt@tighten\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+
+% \subsection{Summary}%
+% The following are local options to this document class.
+%
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% |eqsecnum|&equations numbered by section\\
+% |flushrt|&set text justified\\
+% |tighten|&use tight leading\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% \subsection{Substyle Options}%
+% An \aastex\ document must have exactly one class option selected from
+% the following list; the default is |manuscript|.
+% This option determines the substyle, signifying the
+% basic formatting choice for the document.
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% \bfseries Class Option&\bfseries Purpose\\
+% |manuscript|&Manuscript (the default)\\
+% |preprint|&Preprint\\
+% |preprint2|&Preprint in two columns
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% Note that in the case of |preprint2|, we immediately signal
+% the base document class that the two-column grid will be used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{manuscript}{\def\aas@substyle{manuscript}\long@abstractfalse}
+\DeclareOption{preprint}{\def\aas@substyle{preprint}\long@abstractfalse}
+\DeclareOption{preprint2}{\def\aas@substyle{preprint2}\@twocolumntrue}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% For backward compatibility, we declare options corresponding to V4.0
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{aasms4}{\substitute@option{aasms4}{manuscript}}%
+\DeclareOption{aaspp4}{\substitute@option{aaspp4}{preprint}}%
+\DeclareOption{aas2pp4}{\substitute@option{aas2pp4}{preprint2}}%
+\DeclareOption{aj_pt4}{\substitute@option{aj_pt4}{preprint}}%
+\DeclareOption{apjpt4}{\substitute@option{apjpt4}{preprint}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aas@substyle}
+% At the end of package processing, we invoke the selected
+% substyle.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aas@substyle{manuscript}%
+\AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \@nameuse{aas@\aas@substyle}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Font Complement}
+% \begin{macro}{astro}
+% Invoking the |astro| class option causes the
+% astro font to be loaded at the appropriate size.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{astro}{\AtBeginDocument{\load@astro}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Default Option}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Executing Options}
+%
+% Here we execute the default options to initialize certain
+% variables.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,oneside,onecolumn,final}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |\ProcessOptions| command causes the execution of the code
+% for every option \Lopt{FOO}
+% which is declared and for which the user typed
+% the \Lopt{FOO} option in his
+% |\documentclass| command. For every option \Lopt{BAR} he typed,
+% which is not declared, the option is assumed to be a global option.
+% All options will be passed as document options to any
+% |\usepackage| command in the document preamble.
+%
+% Note that |\ProcessOptions| is followed by |\relax| in order to
+% signal conclusively that the *-form has not been used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{aas@size@manuscript}
+% \begin{macro}{aas@size@preprint}
+% \begin{macro}{aas@size@preprint2}
+% Now that local options have been processed, we know what substyle to use.
+% We execute a procedure to pass the proper type size option to
+% the base class.
+% Note that the macro |\aas@ptsize| acquires a value as a side effect of this
+% processing.
+%
+% As should be evident, the manuscript substyle mandates 12point, the default
+% size for preprint is 11 point, and that for two-column preprint is 10 point.
+%
+% Implementation note: here we must use \LaTeXe's cumbersome methods because we
+% have not yet defined the Boolean control macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{aas@size@manuscript}{%
+ \def\aas@ptsize{2}%
+ \pass@aassize
+}%
+\@namedef{aas@size@preprint}{%
+ \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
+ {\def\aas@ptsize{1}}{}%
+ \pass@aassize
+}%
+\@namedef{aas@size@preprint2}{%
+ \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
+ {\def\aas@ptsize{0}}{}%
+ \pass@aassize
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pass@aassize}
+% The procedure |\pass@aassize| is the bottleproc for passing the size option
+% down to the base class, which is taken to be the |article| class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pass@aassize{%
+ \expandafter\PassOptionsToClass\expandafter{\expandafter1\aas@ptsize pt}{article}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now exercise the selected substyle option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@nameuse{aas@size@\aas@substyle}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Loading the Base Document Class and Packages}
+%\aastex\ is a variant of the standard \LaTeX\ article class:
+% |CTAN://macros/latex/unpacked|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\LoadClass{article}[1995/12/01]%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We always load the standard \LaTeX\ symbol package:
+% |CTAN://macros/latex/base|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{latexsym}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We always load the standard \LaTeX\ extended graphics package:
+% |CTAN://macros/latex/packages/graphics|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{graphicx}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The AMS |amssym| package provides access to symbols in the AMS fonts:
+% |CTAN://macros/latex/packages/amslatex|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{amssymb}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The contributed \LaTeX\ |natbib| package:
+% |CTAN://macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{natbib}%
+\newcommand{\bibstyle@aas}{\bibpunct{(}{)}{;}{a}{}{,}}
+\@citestyle{aas}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The standard \LaTeX\ verbatim package may not be really necessary, but
+% this code may serve as a model for loading other classes:
+% |CTAN://macros/latex/packages/tools|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{verbatim}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here ends the code for the document class.
+% The next section provides code that is common to
+% the document class and document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Extensions to the \LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+% We extend and modify \LaTeX.
+% Most of these tools are to help make the job of the
+% class file writer easier; some correct errors introduced
+% in \LaTeXe.
+%
+% All of the kernel extensions are incorporated into
+% the document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{New Tools}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@to}
+% \begin{macro}{\ulap}
+% \begin{macro}{\dlap}
+%
+% The macro |\@to| is simple shorthand for |to|;
+% the user commands |\ulap| and |\dlap| augment |\llap| and |\rlap|.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \ulap{<vertical mode material>} % Will protrude upward
+% \dlap{<vertical mode material>} % Will protrude downward
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@to{to}%
+\newcommand\ulap[1]{\vbox\@to\z@{{\vss#1}}}%
+\newcommand\dlap[1]{\vbox\@to\z@{{#1\vss}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\let@environment}
+% The directive |\let@environment| takes care of a common programming
+% idiom whereby one environment is made a synonym for another.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\let@environment[2]{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname#2\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname end#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname end#2\endcsname
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\say}
+% \begin{macro}{\sayythe}
+% The commands |\say| and |\saythe| cause diagnostic messages in the
+% \TeX\ log that give the value of a control sequence name or a register
+% respectively.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\say[1]{\typeout{<\noexpand#1=\meaning#1>}}%
+\newcommand\saythe[1]{\typeout{<\noexpand#1=\the#1>}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tracingplain}
+% The command |\tracingplain| causes \TeX's tracing parameters to
+% return to the values set by default. This command is sometimes
+% useful when you have said |\tracingall| somewhere and want to
+% restore.
+% The |\traceoutput| command causes |\tracingoutput| diagnostics
+% upon |\shipout|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\tracingplain{%
+ \tracingonline\z@\tracingcommands\z@\tracingstats\z@
+ \tracingpages\z@\tracingoutput\z@\tracinglostchars\@ne
+ \tracingmacros\z@\tracingparagraphs\z@\tracingrestores\z@
+ \showboxbreadth5\showboxdepth3\relax %\errorstopmode
+ }%
+\newcommand\traceoutput{%
+ \appdef\@resetactivechars{\showoutput}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nohyphenation}
+% \begin{macro}{\offhyphenation}
+% The command |\nohyphenation| immediately preceding a word will
+% prevent \TeX\ from hyphenating that word;
+% the |\offhyphenation| command causes \TeX\ to not hyphenate within its
+% scope.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\nohyphenation{\kern\z@}%
+\newcommand\offhyphenation{%
+ \lefthyphenmin\maxdimen\emergencystretch8\p@
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\substitute@command}
+% \begin{macro}{\remove@command}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\substitute@command#1#2{%
+ \ClassWarning{aastex}{%
+ Command \protect#1\space is deprecated in aastex.
+ Using \protect#2\space instead (please fix your document).
+ }%
+ #2%
+}%
+\def\remove@command#1{%
+ \ClassWarning{aastex}{%
+ Command \protect#1\space is deprecated in aastex.
+ Please remove it from your document%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Boolean Control}%
+% \begin{macro}{\prepdef}
+% \begin{macro}{\appdef}
+%
+% Provide the capability of performing head- and tail patches.
+% The procedure |\prepdef| prepends to the given macro
+% the tokens specified in its second argument.
+% Likewise for |\appdef|, except that it appends.
+% Note that the first 10 toks registers are utility registers,
+% and we simply make a control sequence name, |\toks@ii|, for one of
+% them.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@provide#1{%Implicit #2
+ \@ifxundefined#1{\def#1}{\def\@tempa}%
+}%
+\def\prepdef#1#2{%
+ \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
+ \toks@ii{#2}%
+ \edef#1{\the\toks@ii\the\toks@}%
+}%
+\def\appdef#1#2{%
+ \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
+ \toks@ii{#2}%
+ \edef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks@ii}%
+}%
+\def\appgdef#1#2{%
+ \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
+ \toks@ii{#2}%
+ \xdef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks@ii}%
+}%
+\toksdef\toks@ii=\tw@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifxundefined}
+% We introduce just enough of the Boolean calculus for \TeX.
+% Alan Jeffrey was the pioneer here, with an article in TUGboat
+% (Vol. 11, No. 2, page 237).
+% This implementation owes a debt to
+% William Baxter (web@superscript.com).
+% See articles by Baxter and Ogawa in the proceedings of the
+% 1994 TUG meeting.
+%
+% Other utility procedures used |\@ifxundefined|,
+% which is defined here in terms of |\@ifx|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@ifxundefined#1{\@ifx{\undefined#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@boolean}
+% \begin{macro}{\@boole@def}
+% In order to define |\@ifx|, we first must create the
+% ``defining word'' (term taken form our Forth vocabulary)
+% |\@boole@def|, which employs |\@boolean| to do its job.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@boolean#1#2{%
+ \long\def#1{%
+ #2% \if<something>
+ \expandafter\boolean@true
+ \else
+ \expandafter\boolean@false
+ \fi
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@boole@def#1#{\@boolean{#1}}% Implicit #2
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifx}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifx@empty}
+% We can now invoke the defining word to create
+% the procedure |\@ifx|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@boole@def\@ifx#1{\ifx#1}%
+\@boole@def\@ifx@empty#1{\ifx\@empty#1}%
+\@boole@def\@ifnum#1{\ifnum#1}%
+\@boole@def\@ifdim#1{\ifdim#1}%
+\@boole@def\@ifvoid#1{\ifvoid#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\boolean@true}
+% \begin{macro}{\boolean@false}
+%
+% Note that when a Boolean operator expands, it
+% employs two macros that act as selectors, defined here.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\boolean@true#1#2{#1}%
+\long\def\boolean@false#1#2{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Damage Control}%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Vertical Stuff}%
+% \begin{macro}{\addpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\addvspace}
+% Repair some \LaTeX\ damage.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\addpenalty[1]{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \if@minipage
+ \else
+ \if@nobreak
+ \else
+ \ifinner
+ \@tempskipa\lastskip \unskip
+ \@tempcnta\lastpenalty \unpenalty
+ \ifnum#1<\@tempcnta
+ \penalty#1\relax
+ \else
+ \penalty\@tempcnta
+ \fi
+ \vskip\@tempskipa
+ \else
+ \ifdim\lastskip=\z@
+ \penalty#1\relax
+ \else
+ \@tempskipb\lastskip
+ \vskip-\lastskip
+ \penalty#1%
+ \vskip\@tempskipb
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@noitemerr
+ \fi
+}%
+%
+\renewcommand\addvspace[1]{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \if@minipage
+ \else
+ \ifinner
+ \@tempskipa\lastskip \unskip
+ \ifdim\@tempskipa=\z@
+ \vskip#1\relax
+ \else
+ \@tempskipb#1\relax
+ \ifdim\@tempskipa<\@tempskipb
+ \vskip\@tempskipb
+ \else
+ \ifdim\@tempskipb<\z@
+ \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@
+ \vskip\@tempskipa
+ \else
+ \advance\@tempskipb\@tempskipa
+ \vskip\@tempskipb
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \vskip\@tempskipa
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifdim\lastskip=\z@
+ \vskip#1\relax
+ \else
+ \@tempskipb#1\relax
+ \@xaddvskip
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@noitemerr
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Title Page Formatting}%
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitle@page}
+% The |\maketitle| (for a title page) of \file{classes.dtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\maketitle@page{%
+ \maketitle@disarm
+ \begin{titlepage}%
+ \let\footnotesize\small
+ \let\footnoterule\relax
+ \let \footnote \thanks
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@maketitle
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@thanks
+ \vfil\null
+ \end{titlepage}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \after@maketitle
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitle@runin}
+% The |\maketitle| (for a run-in title page) of \file{classes.dtx}
+% appears to be broken.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\maketitle@runin{%
+ \par
+ \maketitle@disarm
+ \begingroup
+ %%%%\renewcommand\thefootnote{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}%
+ \def\@makefnmark{\rlap{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}%
+ \long\def\@makefntext##1{%
+ \parindent 1em\noindent
+ \hb@xt@1.8em{%
+ \hss\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}%
+ }%
+ ##1%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here, we swap the two predicates:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@ifnum{\col@number=\@ne}{%
+ \global\let\@title@footnote@text\@empty%
+ \twocolumn[\let\@footnotetext\@title@footnotetext\@maketitle]%
+ \@title@footnote@text%
+ }{%
+ \@maketitle
+ }%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newpage
+ \global\@topnum\z@ % Prevents figures from going at top of page.
+ \@maketitle
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ %\thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \@thanks
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \endgroup
+ \after@maketitle
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\after@maketitle}
+% Common processing for title whether run-in or page. And switching from one-column
+% to two-column mode if \Lopt{longabstract} option is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\after@maketitle{%
+ \iflong@abstract %
+ \let\@makecol\@makecol@pptt
+ \let\@outputdblcol\@outputdblcol@pptt
+ \global\columnwidth\textwidth%
+ \global\advance\columnwidth-\columnsep
+ \global\divide\columnwidth\tw@
+ \global\hsize\columnwidth
+ \global\linewidth\columnwidth
+ \global\@twocolumntrue
+ \global\@firstcolumntrue
+ \col@number \tw@
+ \@ifnextchar [\@topnewpage\@floatplacement
+ \begin{strip}% separate the abstract text from two-column text
+ \end{strip}
+ \fi
+ %%%\setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+ \global\let\thanks\@gobble
+ \global\let\maketitle\relax
+ \global\let\@maketitle\relax
+ \global\let\@thanks\@empty
+ \global\let\@author\@empty
+ \global\let\@date\@empty
+ \global\let\@title\@empty
+ \global\let\title\relax
+ \global\let\author\relax
+ \global\let\date\relax
+ \global\let\and\relax
+ \global\let\email\@text@email
+ \global\firsttabskip\z@
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% Defer until the end of the processing for the document class
+% the decision between the two formatting procedures.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndOfClass{%
+ \if@titlepage
+ \let\maketitle\maketitle@page
+ \else
+ \let\maketitle\maketitle@runin
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Repairing Footnotes}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootnotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext}
+% Reparametrize so that |\footnotesize| (a user-level command)
+% is not invoked---use |\footnote@size| instead.
+% In general, user-level commands should not be invoked by
+% low-level formatting procedures.
+%
+% Also, factor out the shared code into a procedure called |\set@footnotetext|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%
+\def\open@footnotetext{%
+ \insert\footins\bgroup % \egroup in \close@footnotetext
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+ \splittopskip\footnotesep
+ \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+ \floatingpenalty \@MM
+ \reset@font\footnote@size
+ \hsize\columnwidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+}%
+\def\close@footnotetext#1{%
+ \color@begingroup
+ \@makefntext{%
+ \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces
+ #1\@finalstrut\strutbox
+ }%
+ \color@endgroup
+ \egroup
+}%
+\def\@footnotetext{% Implict #1
+ \open@footnotetext
+ \set@footnotetext{p@footnote}%
+}%
+%
+\def\@mpfootnotetext{% Implict #1
+ \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox\bgroup % \egroup in \set@footnotetext
+ \unvbox\@mpfootins
+ \set@footnotetext{p@mpfootnote}%
+}%
+\long\def\set@footnotetext#1{%Implicit #2
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+ \csname #1\endcsname\@thefnmark
+ }%
+ \close@footnotetext
+}%
+\def\@title@footnotetext#1{%
+ \protected@edef\@tempa{\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+ \expandafter\appgdef
+ \expandafter\@title@footnote@text
+ \expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\insert@footnotetext
+ \expandafter{\@tempa}{#1}}%
+}%
+\def\insert@footnotetext#1{%Implicit #2
+ \open@footnotetext
+ \def\@thefnmark{#1}%
+ \def\@currentlabel{#1}%
+ \close@footnotetext
+}%
+%
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifx\footnote@size\undefined
+ \let\footnote@size\footnotesize
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Eqnarray Correction}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eqnarray@broken}
+% \begin{macro}{\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed}
+% Team \LaTeX\ still hasn't repaired Leslie's broken
+% definition of |eqnarray|.
+% Let us be bold\dots.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\eqnarray@broken{%
+ \stepcounter{equation}\def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}%
+ \global\@eqnswtrue\m@th\global\@eqcnt\z@
+ \tabskip\mathindent
+ \let\\=\@eqncr
+ \setlength\abovedisplayskip{\topsep}%
+ \ifvmode\addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\partopsep}\fi
+ \addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\parskip}%
+ \setlength\belowdisplayskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ \setlength\belowdisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ \setlength\abovedisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ $$%
+ \everycr{}%
+ \halign to\linewidth\bgroup
+ \hskip\@centering$\displaystyle\tabskip\z@skip{##}$\@eqnsel
+ &\global\@eqcnt\@ne
+ \hskip\tw@\arraycolsep
+ \hfil${##}$\hfil
+ &\global\@eqcnt\tw@
+ \hskip\tw@\arraycolsep
+ $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil\tabskip\@centering
+ &\global\@eqcnt\thr@@\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup
+ \tabskip\z@skip
+ \cr
+}%
+\long\def\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed{%
+ \stepcounter{equation}\def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}%
+ \global\@eqnswtrue\m@th\global\@eqcnt\z@
+ \tabskip\mathindent
+ \let\\=\@eqncr
+ \setlength\abovedisplayskip{\topsep}%
+ \ifvmode\addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\partopsep}\fi
+ \addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\parskip}%
+ \setlength\belowdisplayskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ \setlength\belowdisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ \setlength\abovedisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ $$%
+ \everycr{}%
+ \halign\@to\linewidth\bgroup
+ \hskip\@centering$\displaystyle\tabskip\z@skip{##}$\@eqnsel
+ &\global\@eqcnt\@ne
+ \hskip\tw@\eqncolsep
+ \hfil${{}##{}}$\hfil
+ &\global\@eqcnt\tw@
+ \hskip\tw@\eqncolsep
+ $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil\tabskip\@centering
+ &\global\@eqcnt\thr@@\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup
+ \tabskip\z@skip
+ \cr
+}%
+\ifx\eqnarray\eqnarray@broken
+ \ClassWarningNoLine{aastex}{Repairing broken {eqnarray} definition}%
+ \let\eqnarray\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed
+\fi
+\let\eqnarray@broken\relax
+\let\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Customization of Sections}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
+% Patch a head hook into the basic sectioning command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \@startsection@hook
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \par
+ \@tempskipa #4\relax
+ \@afterindenttrue
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@
+ \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse
+ \fi
+ \if@nobreak
+ \everypar{}%
+ \else
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
+ \fi
+ \@ifstar
+ {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}%
+ {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}%
+}%
+\def\@startsection@hook{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% Adjust section heading typography slightly. The manuscript editors
+% seem to like the idea that the heads will be centered, and that there
+% will be a |.| trailing the section number. This requires hacking
+% below the normal \LaTeX\ programming interface (|\@startsection|),
+% since the centering has to be turned on and off again before the
+% section starts.
+%
+% FIXME: cf \LaTeX\ standard definitions. Hooks for |\sec@upcase| and
+% centering.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
+ \let\@svsec\@empty
+ \else
+ \refstepcounter{#1}\protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}
+ \fi
+ \@tempskipa #5\relax
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+ \begingroup \section@centering#6{%
+ \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}\interlinepenalty \@M\sec@upcase{#8}\@@par}%
+ \endgroup
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}\addcontentsline
+ {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi
+ #7}\else
+ \def\@svsechd{%
+ #6{\hskip#3\relax\@svsec
+ \sec@upcase{#8}}%
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname
+ {#7}\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
+ \else
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ #7}}\fi
+ \@xsect{#5}%
+}%
+%
+\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+ \begingroup
+ \section@centering
+ #4{%
+ \@hangfrom{\hskip #1}\interlinepenalty \@M
+ \sec@upcase{#5}\@@par}\endgroup
+ \else
+ \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax \sec@upcase{#5}}}\fi
+ \@xsect{#3}}%
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}
+\def\section@centering{\centering}%
+\def\sec@upcase#1{\relax{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Customization of Citations}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@citex}
+% Modify |\@citex| so that individual citation texts are {\em not}
+% |\hbox|ed.
+%
+% This allows \TeX\ to break lines at spaces between words in citations.
+% Remove the obnoxious |{\bf ?}| that was inserted in the text when
+% undefined citations are encountered; here, the warning message is
+% printed only on the terminal.
+%
+% FIXME: doublecheck compatibility with natbib!
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@citex[#1]#2{%
+ \let\@citea\@empty
+ \@cite{%
+ \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
+ \@citea
+ \def\@citea{,\penalty\@m\ }%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%
+ \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
+ \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{%
+% \mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
+ \G@refundefinedtrue
+ \@latex@warning{%
+ Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined%
+ }%
+ }{%
+% \hbox{%
+ \csname b@\@citeb\endcsname
+% }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }{#1}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% All of the kernel extensions have been incorporated into
+% the document class and document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{More of the Document Style Module}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now that kernel modifications are complete, read in the selected substyle.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\@@input\aastex@substyle.sty\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% And begin patching the code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\revtex@ver{4.1}%
+\def\revtex@date{25 Jan 99}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Undefine commands that we are about to override.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\lefthead\undefined
+\let\righthead\undefined
+\let\references\undefined
+\let\reference\undefined
+\let\markcite\undefined
+\let\colhead\undefined
+\let\tablecolumns\undefined
+\let\tablecaption\undefined
+\let\tablehead\undefined
+\let\tabletail\undefined
+\let\tablewidth\undefined
+\let\tableheadfrac\undefined
+\let\deluxetable\undefined
+\let\startdata\undefined
+\let\tablevspace\undefined
+\let\tablebreak\undefined
+\let\cutinhead\undefined
+\let\sidehead\undefined
+\let\tablerefs\undefined
+\let\tablecomments\undefined
+\let\phn\undefined
+\let\phd\undefined
+\let\phs\undefined
+\let\phm\undefined
+\let\sq\undefined
+\let\arcdeg\undefined
+\let\arcmin\undefined
+\let\arcsec\undefined
+\let\fd\undefined
+\let\fh\undefined
+\let\fm\undefined
+\let\fs\undefined
+\let\fdg\undefined
+\let\fp\undefined
+\let\micron\undefined
+\let\case\undefined
+\let\slantfrac\undefined
+\let\onehalf\undefined
+\let\onethird\undefined
+\let\twothirds\undefined
+\let\onequarter\undefined
+\let\threequarters\undefined
+\let\ubvr\undefined
+\let\ub\undefined
+\let\bv\undefined
+\let\vr\undefined
+\let\ur\undefined
+\let\ion\undefined
+\let\nodata\undefined
+\let\sun\undefined
+\let\earth\undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The overrides and additions to the V4.0
+% document style are drawn from the same code that goes into
+% the document class.
+%
+% Once those emendments have been read in,
+% we will return to the document style to finish things off.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{\aastex\ Additions and Amendments}
+% This section presents commands that are specific to the \aastex\
+% macro package.
+%
+% All of the \aastex\ emendments are incorporated into the document class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{A Special Note on the Two-Column Preprint Style}%
+%
+% It is not the objective of the \aastex\ project to develop \LaTeX\
+% styles that produce pages that mimic the appearance of specific AAS
+% journals.
+% However, it would be nice to offer format options within the preprint
+% styles so that output format can be changed.
+% (Within the ``manuscript''
+% style, |\tighten| is available, and this effectively turns off the
+% doublespacing.) The primary motivation behind this idea is to provide
+% some definitions that permit institutions to distribute ``pretty''
+% preprints with this package.
+% (Of course, I make the glaring assumption that I
+% can determine what someone else will think is pretty.)
+%
+% This style has the principle function of setting up two-column output.
+% Although it should be painfully obvious, it is important to remember
+% that text lines are considerably shorter when two of them are typeset
+% side by side on a page. Long equations, wide tables and figures, and
+% the like, may not slide into this format without some adjustments.
+% It is our opinion that great effort to adapt copy and markup for
+% two-column pages is counterproductive; remember that the main goals
+% of this package are to enable comprehensive tagging of the article
+% and, secondarily, to produce ``correct'' draft (or referee) format
+% pages.
+%
+% I elect not to impose a format for the front matter, although I feel
+% it looks best if the title, author, abstract, and keyword material is
+% typeset on its own page at full text width. The author may supply the
+% |\twocolumn| command wherever desired, and, for that matter, is free
+% to switch between |\onecolumn| and |\twocolumn| modes.
+% (However, this is bad form.)
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \twocolumn % Enter two-column page grid
+% \onecolumn % Enter one-column page grid
+% \end{verbatim}
+% Note that the two-column page grid begins at the point |\twocolumn|
+% appears in the text, and if that point is before the frontmatter,
+% the latter will get typeset in two-column mode
+% along with the rest of it.
+% For purposes of producing ``pretty'' output,
+% it is probably desirable to
+% put this command after the abstract and keywords, just before the body
+% of the paper.
+% If the command is not specified explicitly,
+% the document class will automatically switch between the one-column
+% and two-column page grid as needed.
+%
+% \subsection{Configuration Information}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\revtex@ver}
+% \begin{macro}{\revtex@date}
+% \begin{macro}{\revtex@org}
+% \begin{macro}{\revtex@jnl}
+% \begin{macro}{\revtex@genre}
+% \begin{macro}{\revtex@pageid}
+% My convention for identifying configuration information is for styles
+% to define the following five parameters:
+% |\revtex@ver| is the version number of this file;
+% |\revtex@date| signifies the revision date;
+% |\revtex@org| is the sponsoring organization;
+% and
+% |\revtex@genre| gives the applicable journal, if specified.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\revtex@ver{5.2}%
+\def\revtex@date{12 Dec 2003}%
+\def\revtex@org{AAS}%
+\def\revtex@jnl{AAS}%
+\def\revtex@genre{manuscript}%
+%\def\revtex@genre{preprint}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Display identifying message on screen and in logfile.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\class@typeout{%
+ \typeout{%
+ \revtex@org\space
+% \revtex@jnl\space
+ \revtex@genre\space substyle, v\revtex@ver\space <\revtex@date>.%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\class@typeout@jnl{%
+ \typeout{%
+ \revtex@org\space
+ \revtex@jnl\space
+ \revtex@genre\space substyle, v\revtex@ver\space <\revtex@date>.%
+ }%
+}%
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \class@typeout
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following mini-colophon identifies the article as having been
+% prepared with this macro package. The |\revtex@pageid| command only
+% defines the formatting of this colophon; its existence and placement
+% within the printed article is controlled by the use of this command
+% in the style file.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\revtex@pageid{%
+ \xdef\@thefnmark{\null}%
+ \@footnotetext{%
+ This \revtex@genre\space was prepared with the
+ \revtex@org\space \LaTeX\ macros v\revtex@ver.%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Page Style}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@plaintop}
+% Create |plaintop| page style that has folios at top of page,
+% and use |plaintop| pagestyle by default.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@plaintop{%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \def\@oddfoot{}%
+ \def\@oddhead{\rmfamily\hfil--\space\thepage\space--\hfil}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{}%
+ \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+}%
+\def\ps@msstitle{% mss ID on title page
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \def\@oddfoot{}%
+ \def\@oddhead{\rmfamily\hfil\ms@id}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{}%
+ \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Page Layout}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The pica area}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
+% Set the text width
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\textwidth{6.5in}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
+% The |\textheight| is the height of text
+% (including footnotes and figures, excluding running head and
+% foot).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\textheight{8.4in}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Vertical spacing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\headheight}
+% \begin{macro}{\headsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\topskip}
+% The |\headheight| is the height of the box that will contain the
+% running head. The |\headsep| is the distance between the bottom
+% of the running head and the top of the text. The |\topskip| is
+% the |\baselineskip| for the first line on a page; \LaTeX's output
+% routine will not work properly if it has the value 0pt, so do not
+% do that!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\headheight{.15in}%
+%\setlength\headsep {.35in}%
+%\setlength\topskip {10\p@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Margins}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparpush}
+% The horizontal space between the main text and marginal notes is
+% determined by |\marginparsep|, the minimum vertical separation
+% between two marginal notes is controlled by |\marginparpush|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\marginparsep {10\p@}%
+ \setlength\marginparpush{5\p@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now we can give the values for the other margin parameters. For
+% native \LaTeXe, these are calculated.
+% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\evensidemargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparwidth}
+%
+% Values for two-sided printing:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\oddsidemargin {0in}%
+ \setlength\evensidemargin {0in}%
+ \setlength\marginparwidth {0in}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\topmargin}
+% The |\topmargin| is the distance between the top of `the
+% printable area'---which is 1 inch below the top of the
+% paper--and the top of the box which contains the running head.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\topmargin{0in}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Paragraphing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lineskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\normallineskip}
+% These parameters control \TeX's behavior when two lines tend to
+% come too close together.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\lineskip{1\p@}%
+\setlength\normallineskip{1\p@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@doubleleading}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tightleading}
+% The two alternatives for leading are defined here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@doubleleading{1.6}%
+\def\@tightleading{1.1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\baselinestretch}
+% This is used as a multiplier for |\baselineskip|.
+% Note that if this command
+% doesn't resolve to ``empty'' any \texttt{plus} or \texttt{minus}
+% part in the specification of |\baselineskip| is ignored.
+%
+% Double spacing is the default: the style uses
+% the \@doubleleading factor, defined above.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tighten}
+% The |\tighten| command merely resets the |\baselinestretch| to a
+% smaller factor, resulting in single-column text that is more closely
+% spaced. (This will always work.) Tightening the vertical spacing
+% in the text results in output that is more attractive for distribution
+% to colleagues who are primarily interested in reading the paper, as
+% opposed to copy editing it. Double-spaced output for referees and
+% copy editors is, however, the main objective of this style, hence
+% double-spacing occurs by default. The same effect as |\tighten|
+% can be achieved by using the |tighten| document style option.
+%
+% The |\tighten| command is intended for use in the preamble of the
+% article.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\tighten{\def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}}%
+\newcommand\tightenlines{\tighten}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\singlespace}
+% \begin{macro}{\doublespace}
+% For authors who feel compelled to change between single and double
+% spacing in the manuscript, |\singlespace| and |\doublespace| commands
+% are provided. (Following recommendations of AAS Publications Board
+% Subcommittee on Preprints.) These are no-ops in manuscript style.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\singlespace{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}%
+ \normalsize
+}%
+\newcommand\doublespace{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{\@doubleleading}%
+ \normalsize
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here are the corresponding command definitions for the ApJ style:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\singlespace@apj{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}%
+ \def\arraystretch{\@tightleading}%
+ \normalsize
+}%
+\def\doublespace@apj{%
+ \def\baselinestretch@apj{\@doubleleading}%
+ \def\arraystretch{\@doubleleading}%
+ \normalsize
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sec@upcase}
+% Upper case for sections (optional upper case items). These are
+% created so that some headings can be toggled between mixed case and
+% upper case readily.
+% Headings that might be changed can be wrapped in the style file in
+% |\sec@upcase{|\m{text}|}| constructs;
+% the expansion of |\sec@upcase| is
+% controlled here. It is |\relax| by default (mixed case heads), and
+% can easily be changed to |\uppercase| if desired.
+% If mixed case headings are wanted by the editor, authors {\em must}
+% supply mixed case text, although this is what authors should be doing
+% anyway.
+% (Mixed can be converted to upper,
+% but the reverse transformation cannot be automated.)
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\parindent}
+% |\parskip| gives extra vertical space between paragraphs and
+% |\parindent| is the width of the paragraph indentation. The value
+% of |\parindent| depends on whether we are in two column mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\parskip{1.5ex}%
+\setlength\parindent{2em}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\smallskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\medskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
+% The values for these three parameters are set in the \LaTeX\
+% kernel.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\smallskipamount{3\p@\@plus1\p@\@minus1\p@}%
+\setlength\medskipamount{6\p@\@plus2\p@\@minus2\p@}%
+\setlength\bigskipamount{12\p@\@plus4\p@\@minus4\p@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@lowpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@medpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@highpenalty}%
+% The commands |\nopagebreak| and |\nolinebreak| put in penalties
+% to discourage these breaks at the point they are put in.
+% They use |\@lowpenalty|, |\@medpenalty| or |\@highpenalty|,
+% dependent on their argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@lowpenalty 51
+\@medpenalty 151
+\@highpenalty 301
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\clubpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\widowpenalty}
+% These penalties are use to discourage club and widow lines.
+% Because we use their default values we only show them here,
+% commented out.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \clubpenalty 150
+% \widowpenalty 150
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\displaywidowpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\predisplaypenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\postdisplaypenalty}
+% Discourage (but not so much) widows in front of a math display
+% and forbid breaking directly in front of a display. Allow break
+% after a display without a penalty. Again the default values are
+% used, therefore we only show them here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \displaywidowpenalty 50
+% \predisplaypenalty 10000
+% \postdisplaypenalty 0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\interlinepenalty}
+% Allow the breaking of a page in the middle of a paragraph.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \interlinepenalty 0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\brokenpenalty}
+% We allow the breaking of a page after a hyphenated line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \brokenpenalty 100
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Layout for Landscape Tables}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ptlandscape}
+% This command switches to a page layout appropriate to
+% a table in landscape orientation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\ptlandscape{%
+ \setlength\textwidth{9in}%
+ \setlength\textheight{6.5in}%
+ \setlength\pt@width{\textwidth}%
+ \setlength\hoffset{0.0in}%
+ \setlength\voffset{-0.25in}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Formatting Options}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eqsecnum}
+% Sometimes authors want to number equations by section,
+% rather than sequentially through the whole paper.
+%
+% To invoke this processing option, the user may
+% give the following command in the document preamble:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \eqsecnum
+% \end{verbatim}
+% The preferred way is to call |eqsecnum| as a
+% document class option:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \documentclass[eqsecnum]{aastex}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqsecnum{%
+ \@addtoreset{equation}{section}%
+ \def\theequation{%
+ %\mbox{\normalsize\arabic{section}-\arabic{equation}}% Wrong!
+ \arabic{section}-\arabic{equation}%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Data Commands}%
+%
+% There are some obvious style-dependent parameters and formatting
+% instructions in this file. The object has been to keep the author
+% commands (the user interface, if you will) society-, journal-, and
+% style-independent, while the style-specific parameters and commands
+% are kept below that level.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Article Attributes}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@journalname}
+% \begin{macro}{\cpr@holder}
+% Set the journal name and copyright holder.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@journalname{The Astrophysical Journal}%
+\def\cpr@holder{American Astronomical Society}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Journal and article identification information is established by the
+% editorial staff. The following macros are used by personnel at the
+% editorial office to annotate/record slug-line data and should be
+% included in the manuscript preamble, i.e., before the \LaTeX\
+% |\begin{document}|.
+% All they do is globally define other \TeX\ control sequences that are
+% used by other macros at a later time.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \received{<receipt date>}
+% \revised{<revision date>}
+% \accepted{<acceptance date>}
+% \journalid{<vol>}{<journal date>}
+% \articleid{<start page>}{<end page>}
+% \paperid{<id>}
+% \ccc{<code>}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\received}
+% \begin{macro}{\accepted}
+% \begin{macro}{\revised}
+% \begin{macro}{\journalid}
+% \begin{macro}{\articleid}
+% \begin{macro}{\paperid}
+% \begin{macro}{\ccc}
+% For preprints and submitted manuscripts in draft/referee format, etc.,
+% the slug-line information is irrelevant and in those kinds of style,
+% the data are never used. In my estimation, it is perfectly acceptable
+% to have these commands in the file (for future use), so they are
+% defined in the usual way.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\received[1]{\gdef\@recvdate{#1}}%
+\newcommand\accepted[1]{\gdef\@accptdate{#1}}%
+\newcommand\revised[1]{\gdef\@revisedate{#1}}%
+\newcommand\journalid[2]{\gdef\@jourvol{#1}\gdef\@jourdate{#2}}%
+\newcommand\articleid[2]{\gdef\@startpage{#1}\gdef\@finishpage{#2}}%
+\newcommand\paperid[1]{\gdef\@paperid{#1}}%
+\newcommand\ccc[1]{\gdef\CCC@code{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We provide initialization code. If
+% at some future date someone manages to give these
+% macros a value before the end of the class,
+% |\providecommand| will nicely bow out.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndOfClass{%
+ \@provide\@recvdate{}%
+ \@provide\@accptdate{}%
+ \@provide\@revisedate{}%
+ \@provide\@jourvol{}%
+ \@provide\@jourdate{}%
+ \@provide\@startpage{}%
+ \@provide\@finishpage{}%
+ \@provide\@paperid{MS-0001-SAMP}%
+ \@provide\CCC@code{000-00\$75.95-CDB}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Copyright data}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cpright}
+%
+% We permit the author/editor to supply a copyright ``type'' as well as
+% the year.
+% The formatting of the copyright notices is defined by |\@slug|.
+% FIXME: |\@slug| is never used.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\cpright[2]{%
+ \global\expandafter\let\expandafter\cpr@type\csname cpr@#1\endcsname
+ \gdef\cpr@year{#2}%
+ \typeout{`#1' copyright \cpr@year.}%
+}%
+\def\cpr@AAS{Copyright \cpr@year\space by the \cpr@holder.}%
+\def\cpr@PD{This article is in the public domain.}%
+\def\cpr@Crown{Crown copyright \cpr@year\space by the \cpr@holder.}%
+\def\cpr@none{No copyright is claimed for this article.}%
+\def\cpr@ASP{Copyright \cpr@year\space by the ASP.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Default copyright year and type:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cpr@year{\number\year}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@slug}
+% |\@slug| determines formatting of slugline information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@slug{%
+ \par
+ \noindent\cpr@type\par
+ \noindent Manuscript number \@paperid.\par
+ \noindent\CCC@code\par
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Here ends the code for the document class.
+% Hereinafter appears code that is common to
+% the document class and document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Running heads}%
+%
+% The change in the user-level markup is incorporated into the V4.1
+% document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lefthead}
+% \begin{macro}{\righthead}
+%
+% The |\lefthead| and |\righthead| commands are now deprecated and will give
+% a diagnostic message in the \TeX\ log (NB: without halting \TeX).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\lefthead{\substitute@command\lefthead\shorttitle}%
+\newcommand\righthead{\substitute@command\righthead\shortauthors}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\shorttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortauthors}
+% Authors may be asked to supply running head information. We use the
+% language of the publisher here to distinguish between two pieces of
+% information: the left head frequently contains an author list (last
+% names, possibly truncated as et al.), while the right head frequently
+% contains an abbreviated form of the paper title. The |\shorttitle| and
+% |\shortauthors| commands merely collect the information and buffer the
+% text.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \shorttitle{<text>}
+% \shortauthors{<text>}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% For the ApJ, right heads are the short titles, and the publisher
+% prefers that the author specify a 44-character or less abbreviated
+% title to use as the running head on right pages.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\shorttitle[1]{\gdef\@versohead{#1}}%
+\newcommand\shortauthors[1]{\gdef\@rectohead{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Default values:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\shorttitle{\relax}%
+\shortauthors{\relax}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Here ends the portion of code for the document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Hereinafter appears code for the document class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@runheads}
+% The |\@runheads| procedure determines the formatting of running head
+% information.
+% It produces a set of running head lines, one for each page of the
+% article.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@runheads{%
+ \@tempcnta\c@page
+ \@whilenum\@tempcnta>\z@\do{%
+ \vskip 3ex
+ \hbox\@to30pc{%
+ \small
+ \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\@versohead}:
+ \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\@rectohead}\hfil
+ }%
+ \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\slugcomment}
+% The |\slugcomment| command is provided so authors or editors may
+% include a remark about the manuscript that may be desired in print for
+% some styles.
+% For instance, authors like to include information about the
+% journal and publication date of accepted papers ("To appear in AJ,
+% November 1992").
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \slugcomment{<text>}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% The formatting of the |\slugcomment| information is controlled by the
+% |\@makeslugcmmnt| command, and its placement on the page is dictated
+% by the presence of |\@makeslugcmmnt| in |\sluginfo| (or whatever).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\msid[1]{\gdef\ms@id{#1}}% mss ID
+\def\ms@id{}%
+\newcommand\slugcomment[1]{\gdef\slug@comment{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Default value:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\slugcomment{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@slugcmmntwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makeslugcmmnt}
+% Low-level formatting procedure:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\@slugcmmntwidth
+\long\def\@makeslugcmmnt@mss{%
+ \@ifx@empty\slug@comment{\relax}{%
+ \vskip 5ex
+ \sbox\@tempboxa{\slug@comment}%
+ \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\@slugcmmntwidth}{%
+ \hbox\@to\textwidth{%
+ \hss
+ \parbox\@slugcmmntwidth\slug@comment
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \hbox\@to\textwidth{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+\long\def\@makeslugcmmnt@ppt{%
+ \@ifx@empty\slug@comment{\relax}{%
+ \sbox\@tempboxa{\slug@comment}%
+ \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\@slugcmmntwidth}{%
+ \hbox\@to\textwidth{%
+ \hss
+ \parbox\@slugcmmntwidth\slug@comment
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \hbox\@to\textwidth{\hfil\box\@tempboxa}%
+ }%
+ \vskip 2ex
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Receipt and Acceptance Dates}%
+% Editorial offices like to have receipt and acceptance dates on the
+% front page for tracking purposes.
+% The current practice is to require the author
+% to type Received \dots\ and Accepted \dots\ lines
+% for the staff to type on.
+%
+% The |\@dates| command will typeset either rules
+% or the dates specified in |\received| and/or |\accepted| commands.
+% Note that authors should not include |\received| and |\accepted|.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@rcvaccrule}
+% This is the rule following the date.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@rcvaccrule{\vrule\@width1.75in\@height0.5pt\@depth\z@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dates}
+% |\@dates| determines formatting of manuscript date information.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dates{\ifx\@title\@empty\else {Received}\space%
+ \ifx\@empty\@recvdate\@rcvaccrule\else\@recvdate\fi;%
+ \hspace{1.5em}{accepted}\space%
+ \ifx\@empty\@accptdate\@rcvaccrule\else\@accptdate\fi%
+\fi}% %
+\def\@dates@pptt{%
+ \@ifx@empty\@recvdate{}{%
+ \@ifx@empty\@accptdate{}{%
+ {\center
+ \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\small}{\normalsize}%
+ {\itshape Received}\space
+ \@recvdate
+ \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\\[.5ex]}{\hspace{1.5em}}%
+ {\itshape accepted}\space
+ \@accptdate
+ \endcenter
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Formatting the Slug Information}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sluginfo}
+% The |\sluginfo| command is executed automatically when a
+% |\begin{abstract}| is
+% encountered, so it is not necessary (or appropriate) for the author to
+% include this line explicitly. The received/accepted business is a
+% concern only for the editorial staff, hence we have arranged for the
+% author not to have to fuss with it.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sluginfo@mss{%
+ {%
+ \addpenalty{\@M}%
+ \addvspace{6\p@}%
+ \centering
+ \@dates
+ \@makeslugcmmnt
+ \par
+ \addvspace{6\p@}%
+ }%
+}%
+\newcommand\sluginfo{%
+ {%
+ \addpenalty{\@M}%
+ \addvspace{6\p@}%
+ \centering
+ \@dates
+ \par
+ \addvspace{6\p@}%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For backwards compatibility:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\dates=\sluginfo
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Front Matter}%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Abstract}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\abstract}
+% The abstract environment simply formats the
+% material into a certain box for later use.
+% Note that the assignment of the measure
+% (|\hsize|) is taken from the code
+% for |\begin{document}|,
+% as is the call to |\process@table|, which
+% turns into a no-op after |\begin{document}|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{abstract}{%
+ \iflong@abstract% Abstract in one-column mode
+ \onecolumn
+ \fi
+ \global\setbox\abstract@box\vtop\bgroup
+% \let\@nodocument\@empty
+ \columnwidth\textwidth\hsize\columnwidth\linewidth\hsize
+% \process@table
+ \normalsize
+ \color@begingroup
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \@setminipage
+ \quotation
+}{%
+ \par
+ \endquotation
+ \removelastskip
+ \vskip-\prevdepth
+ \color@endgroup
+ \egroup
+}%
+\newbox\abstract@box
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make adjustments to \LaTeX\ abstract style: optional upper case
+% heading, retain current type size (should be |\normalsize|),
+% ignore twocolumn option in the |manuscript| substyle,
+% add |\sluginfo|, and start abstract on new page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\abstractname{ABSTRACT}%
+\def\@abstract@mss{%
+ \sluginfo
+ \clearpage
+ \@ifvoid\abstract@box{}{%
+ \begin{center}\bfseries\abstractname\end{center}%
+ \contribute@box\abstract@box
+ }%
+}%
+\def\contribute@box#1{%
+ \dimen@\ht#1%
+ \leavevmode\hbox{\vrule\@height\ht#1\@width\z@}\par
+ \nointerlineskip\nobreak\kern-\ht#1\unvbox#1\prevdepth\z@
+}%
+\def\@abstract@ppt{%
+%\sluginfo
+%\clearpage
+ \@ifvoid\abstract@box{}{%
+ \begin{center}\bfseries\abstractname\end{center}%
+ \contribute@box\abstract@box
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@abstract@pptt{%
+ \@ifvoid\abstract@box{}{%
+ \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{%
+ \section*{Abstract}%
+ }{%
+ \vspace{3em}%
+ \begin{center}%
+ \large
+ \bfseries\abstractname\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{\z@}%
+ \end{center}%
+ }%
+ \contribute@box\abstract@box
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Title, Author, etc.}\label{sec-preamble}%
+% Title and author identification is by way of standard \LaTeX\ commands
+% |\title| and |\author|.
+% The authors' principal affiliation is specified with a separate macro |\affil|.
+% Each |\author| command should be followed by its own |\affil| (or address).
+%
+% Authors often have affiliations above and beyond their main employer,
+% and these are specified with the |\altaffilmark| and |\altaffiltext|
+% commands.
+% These commands behave like the |\footnotemark| and |\footnotetext|
+% commands
+% of \LaTeX.
+% |\altaffilmark| is appended to author's names in the |\author| lists,
+% and generates the superscript identification numbers.
+% The text for the individual alternate affiliations is generated by the
+% |\altaffiltext| command. It is up to the author to make sure that the
+% |\altaffilmark| numbers attached to authors' names correspond to the
+% correct alternate affiliation.
+%
+% The following commands may appear in the title block,
+% with the |\title| command appearing exactly once, and
+% all others appearing as many times as needed:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \title{<lucid text>}
+% \author{<name(s)>}
+% \authoraddr{<author's postal address>}% Deprecated (V5.0) in favor of \affil
+% \email{<author's e-mail address>}
+% \affil{<affiliation>}
+% \altaffilmark{<tag number(s)>}
+% \altaffiltext{<numerical tag>}{<text>}
+% \and
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\title}
+% \begin{macro}{\author}
+% \begin{macro}{\authoraddr}
+% \begin{macro}{\email}
+% \begin{macro}{\affil}
+% \begin{macro}{\altaffilmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\altaffiltext}
+% \begin{macro}{\and}
+% The title block commands simply queue up the
+% given tokens into the appropriate control sequence.
+%
+% Implementation note:
+% The |\email| command has one meaning until the titlepage
+% is set, then acquires a different meaning, appropriate for text use.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\title#1{\appdef\@title{\make@title{#1}}}%
+\def\author#1{\appdef\@author{\make@author{#1}}}%
+%%% \def\authoraddr{\substitute@command\authoraddr\affil}%
+\def\email#1{\appdef\@author{\make@authoremail{#1}}}%
+\def\affil#1{\appdef\@author{\make@affil{#1}}}%
+\def\altaffilmark#1{\appdef\@author{\make@altaffilmark{#1}}}%
+\def\altaffiltext#1#2{\appdef\@author{\make@altaffiltext{#1}{#2}}}%
+\def\and{\appdef\@author{\make@and}}%
+\let\authoraddr\@gobble
+\let\@title\@empty
+\let\@author\@empty
+\let\@date\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@maketitle}
+% To format the title page, simply
+% expand the tokens that were saved up.
+% Remember that some users incorporate
+% title block commands (notably |\altaffilmark|)
+% into the argument of the |\author| command itself.
+% Therefore, we might encounter
+% certain of the above commands while formatting
+% the title page itself.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@maketitle{%
+ \newpage
+ \begingroup
+ \let\footnote\thanks
+ \let\email\make@authoremail
+ \let\affil\make@affil
+ \let\altaffilmark\make@altaffilmark
+ \let\altaffiltext\make@altaffiltext
+ \let\and\make@and
+ \@title
+ \@author
+ \@date
+ \par
+ \@abstract
+ \@ifxundefined\keyword@list{}{%
+ \expandafter\@keywords
+ \expandafter{\keyword@list}%
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The typesetting performed by the titlepage commands is appropriate
+% for the top of the first text page of the manuscript.
+% They could as well be used on a title cover page, but vertical
+% placement would have to be controlled by the author.
+% This is not to be encouraged, since I want to discourage
+% the introduction of any extra horizontal or vertical space.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\make@title}
+% \begin{macro}{\make@author}
+% \begin{macro}{\make@authoraddr}
+% \begin{macro}{\make@authoremail}
+% \begin{macro}{\make@affil}
+% \begin{macro}{\make@altaffilmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\make@altaffiltext}
+% \begin{macro}{\make@and}
+% Here are the formatting procedures for the title page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\make@title@mss#1{%
+ {%
+ \def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}%
+ \center\large\bfseries{#1}\endcenter %%
+ }%
+ \thispagestyle{msstitle}% mss ID
+}%
+\def\make@title@ppt#1{%
+ \@makeslugcmmnt
+ {\center\large\bfseries{#1}\endcenter}%
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+}%
+\def\make@title@pptt#1{%
+ {%
+ \center
+ \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\large}{\Large}%
+ \bfseries
+ #1%
+ \endcenter
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here are the formatting procedures for the author list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\make@author#1{%
+ {\topsep\z@\center\normalsize#1\endcenter}%
+}%
+\def\make@author@pptt#1{%
+ {\topsep\z@
+ \center
+ \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\normalsize}{\vspace{4ex}\large}%
+ #1%
+ \endcenter
+ }%
+}%
+% FIXME: produce text when in preprint substyle
+\let\make@authoraddr=\@gobble
+\def\make@authoremail#1{%
+ {\topsep\z@\center\normalsize\tt#1\endcenter}%
+}%
+\newcommand\make@affil[1]{%
+ \vspace*{-2.5ex}%
+{\topsep\z@\center#1\endcenter}%
+}%
+\def\make@affil@ppt#1{%
+ \vspace*{-0.8ex}%
+ {%
+ \topsep\z@
+ \center
+ \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\small}{\normalsize}%
+ \itshape
+ #1%
+ \endcenter
+ }%
+}%
+\def\make@affil@pptt#1{%
+ \vspace*{-0.8ex}%
+ {%
+ \topsep\z@
+ \center
+ \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\small}{\normalsize}%
+ \itshape
+ #1%
+ \endcenter
+ }%
+}%
+%
+\def\thefootnote{\@arabic\c@footnote}% initial style
+%
+\newcommand\make@altaffilmark[1]{$^{#1}$}%
+%
+\newcommand\make@altaffiltext[2]{%
+\iflong@abstract%
+ \footnotetext@ass[#1]{#2}
+\else
+ \footnotetext@ass[#1]{\hsize\columnwidth #2}
+\fi
+%\stepcounter{footnote}
+}%
+%%
+\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark
+ \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
+ \iflong@abstract%
+ \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\hsize18pc #1}
+ \else
+ \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{#1}
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+%%
+\def\footnotetext@ass{%
+ \@ifnextchar [\@xfootnotenext@ass
+ {%\protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+ \@footnotetext}}
+\def\@xfootnotenext@ass[#1]{%
+ \begingroup
+ %\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
+ \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{#1}%
+ \endgroup
+ \@footnotetext}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Redefine the \LaTeX\ |\and| command for this style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\make@and{\vspace*{-0.5ex}{\topsep\z@\center and\endcenter}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Keywords}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\keywords}
+% \begin{macro}{\keyword@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\@keywords}
+% \begin{macro}{\@keywords@pptt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@keywordtext}
+% \begin{macro}{\@keyworddelim}
+% \begin{macro}{\subjectheadings}
+% Keywords, subject headings, etc., are accommodated
+% only as a piece of text; the |\keywords| command indents if necessary
+% and supplies the proper lead-in text
+% (``Keywords:'', ``Subject headings:'', etc.)
+% but does not apply formatting to the user's keyword text. The author
+% must supply the correct punctuation according to the journal style.
+%
+% Note that the editors of A\&A, ApJ, and MNRAS have discussed the issue
+% of keywords, and there is disagreement about whether
+% ``subject headings'' or
+% ``keywords'' should appear after abstracts in astronomical papers.
+% In any case, the user-level command is |\keywords|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\keywords{\appdef\keyword@list}%
+\let\keyword@list\undefined
+\def\@keywords#1{%
+ \vspace*{-.7ex}%
+ \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{%
+ \noindent
+ {{\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space\@kwds{#1}}%
+ }{%
+ {%
+ \quote
+ {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space
+ \@kwds{#1}%
+ \endquote
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@keywords@pptt#1{%
+ \vspace*{-.7ex}%
+ \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{%
+ \noindent
+ {%
+ \small
+ {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space
+ \@kwds{#1}%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ {%
+ \quote
+ \small
+ {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space
+ \@kwds{#1}%
+ \endquote
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+%
+\def\@keywords@mss#1{%%%
+ \vspace*{-.7ex}%
+ \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{%
+ \noindent
+ {%
+ \small
+ {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space
+ \@kwds{#1}%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ {%
+ \quote
+ \small
+ {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space
+ \@kwds{#1}%
+ \endquote%
+ \clearpage
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+%
+\let\subjectheadings=\keywords
+\def\@keywordtext{Subject headings}%
+\def\@keyworddelim{---}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@kwds}
+% It might be possible to handle keywords and their punctuation more
+% automatically at some stage, but at the moment using this looping
+% construct is serious overkill. It also causes problems because the
+% loop delimiter is a comma, and there are keywords that legitimately
+% contain commas. It also seem ponderous to me for keywords in the
+% |\keyword| list to be delimited by \verb+|+, so I make the author
+% responsible for keyword list punctuation.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@kwds@jnl#1{%
+ \def\@kwddlm{}%
+ \@for\@kwd:=#1\do{%
+ \@kwddlm
+ \def\@kwddlm{\space\@keyworddelim\penalty\@m\space}%
+ {\@kwd}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@kwds#1{#1\relax}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Automatically Triggering the Title}%
+% In order to accomodate the many different formatting options
+% for the title page, it is best for the user to
+% present the title block and then to
+% invoke the |\maketitle| command explicitly.
+%
+% The custom in V4.0 documents has been to give
+% the commands of the title block
+% as if they formatted the given material immediately---which they did.
+% But this defies the \LaTeX\ markup scheme in which those commands
+% are expected to act like ``data'' commands: they are legal
+% in the preamble (before |\begin{document}|).
+%
+% Coupled with the need to automatically switch between
+% one- and two-column page grids, it would be best if the
+% title block commands were to return to their nature
+% as ``data'' commands.
+%
+% An \aastex\ document will therefore begin with its
+% |\begin{document}| declaration and its title block
+% (which could legally appear in the preamble), followed
+% by an optional |\maketitle| command, succeeded by
+% optional |\tableofcontents| and similar commands,
+% succeeded by the body of the article, which
+% may begin with a sectioning command like |\section|,
+% or may even begin with paragraph text.
+%
+% In order to trigger at the start of paragraph text, we
+% install a hook into |\everypar|. This may fail under some
+% circumstances because of the violent way \LaTeX\ handles
+% this token register. (We hope for the best.)
+%
+% Given that the abstract is formatted as part of the
+% title page, it, too, must have the status of a
+% data command. However, its syntax as a \LaTeX\ environment
+% prevents a simple approach using |\appdef|.
+% Instead, we temporarily endow the |abstract|
+% environment with the ability to set type.
+%
+% The procedure |\everypar@hook| takes advantage
+% of a trick for returning to vertical mode, effectively
+% aborting the nascent paragraph. The only trace thereof
+% in the vertical list being the |\parskip| glue.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \everypar{%
+ \everypar@hook
+ }%
+}%
+\def\everypar@hook{%
+ \setbox\z@\lastbox\par\removelastskip
+ \everypar{}%
+ \maketitle@trigger
+ \leavevmode
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We use |\@startsection@hook| in |\@startsection| (see above).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@startsection@hook{\maketitle@trigger}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We headpatch into the |listof|\dots\ procedures:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\tableofcontents{\listof@hook}%
+\prepdef\listoffigures{\listof@hook}%
+\prepdef\listoftables{\listof@hook}%
+\def\listof@hook{\maketitle@trigger}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\maketitle@disarm{%
+ \global\let\maketitle@trigger\relax
+ \global\let\@startsection@hook\@empty
+ \global\let\listof@hook\@empty
+ \global\let\everypar@hook\@empty
+}%
+\def\maketitle@trigger{%
+ \maketitle
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Document Body}%
+% Herein are definitions of formatting procedures that occur in the body
+% of the article.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnotes}%
+%
+% The following code redefines a few things so that spacing in footnotes
+% is different than \LaTeX\ defaults. The adjustment to |\skip\footins|
+% increases
+% the amount of vertical space inserted before the |\footnoterule|.
+% The commented out definitions of |\@makefntext| give proper
+% indentation.
+% \begin{macro}{\footins}
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotesep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
+%
+% Style Note: in the two-column preprint style, these values are
+% different.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\skip\footins}{4ex\@plus1ex\@minus.5ex}%
+\setlength\footnotesep{3ex}%
+%\long\def\@makefntext#1{\noindent\hb@xt@\z@{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1}
+%\long\def\@makefntext#1{\indent\hbox{$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1}
+\long\def\@makefntext@pptt#1{%
+ \noindent
+ \hbox\@to\z@{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}%
+ #1%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% FIXME: doublecheck the |\xdef|.
+% \begin{macro}{editornote}
+% \begin{macro}{\theeditornote}
+% \begin{macro}{\notetoeditor}
+% The |\notetoeditor| command puts text into the footnote area that
+% contains some
+% special instruction to the editor.
+% It places a superior ``En'' at the point in
+% the text where the note appears, then makes a footnote labelled
+% ``En NOTE TO EDITOR: <text>''
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \notetoeditor{<text>}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% FIXME: cf. definition of |\footnote|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{editornote}%
+\def\theeditornote{{\rmfamily E}\arabic{editornote}}%
+\newcommand\notetoeditor[1]{%
+ \stepcounter{editornote}%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand}%
+ \xdef\@thefnmark{\theeditornote}%
+ \endgroup
+ \@footnotemark\@footnotetext{NOTE TO EDITOR: #1}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Sections}%
+%
+% Modify the indentation behavior so that {\em all} paragraphs,
+% including those first after section heads, are indented.
+% This is consonant with the styles of many journals,
+% although it's non-standard typographic practice.
+%
+% Style Note: In the two-column preprint style, we
+% add simple logic to engage |\twocolumn| when the first |\section|
+% command is encountered if this has not been done already.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesection}
+% Level-one head.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\section{%
+ \@startsection{section}{1}%
+ {\z@}{5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+\def\thesection{\@arabic{\c@section}}%
+\def\clear@section@page{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesubsection}
+% Level-two head.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\subsection{%
+ \@startsection{subsection}{2}%
+ {\z@}{5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\@arabic{\c@subsection}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsection}
+% Level-three head.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\subsubsection{%
+ \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}%
+ {\z@}{5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\@arabic{\c@subsubsection}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsubsection}
+% Define sectioning command below |\subsubsection|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\subsubsubsection{%
+ \@startsection{subsubsection}{4}%
+ {\z@}{-15\p@\@plus-5\p@\@minus-2\p@}{5\p@}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+\def\thesubsubsubsection{\thesubsubsection.\@arabic{\c@subsubsubsection}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theparagraph}
+% The run-in head.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\@arabic{\c@paragraph}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\acknowledgments}
+% \begin{macro}{\acknowledgements}
+% For ApJ, acknowledgments are set off from main body text simply by
+% vertical space (no heading or type size change). I do the same for
+% the AAS manuscript style. For use in producing more polished output
+% for other journals, this macro might generate text saying
+% ``Acknowledg[e]ments''.
+%
+% An alternative spelling of the command is provided.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\acknowledgments{\vskip 3ex\@plus.8ex\@minus.4ex}%
+\let\acknowledgements=\acknowledgments
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Equation Numbering}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% Redefine |\appendix| so that equation numbers are prepended with
+% |\theappendix| number. Reset equation counter so that equation
+% numbers in the appendix begin again with 1.
+% The |\section| command is redefined by
+% |\appendix| to clear the equation counter for each section, so
+% that equation numbers will look like A1, A2,\dots, B1, B2,
+%
+% Note that the
+% |\appendix| command is {\em not} a sectioning command; it is merely
+% a delimiting markup between the main body of the paper and the
+% appendix. Sections in the appendix are still started with
+% |\section| commands.
+% etc.
+%
+% If we are in two-column mode at this point,
+% we switch back to one column and set a flag to remind us to
+% return to two-column mode upon entering the bibliography.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\appendix{%
+ \par
+ \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi
+ \setcounter{section}{\z@}%
+ \setcounter{subsection}{\z@}%
+ \setcounter{equation}{\z@}%
+%\setcounter{figure}{\z@}%
+%\setcounter{table}{\z@}%
+%\def\fnum@figure{Figure \Alph{section}\thefigure:}%
+%\def\fnum@table{Table \Alph{section}\thetable:}%
+ \def\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
+ \def\theequation{%
+ %\hbox{\normalsize\Alph{section}\arabic{equation}}%
+ \thesection\arabic{equation}%
+ }%
+ \@addtoreset{equation}{section}%
+ \appendix@figtab@defs
+ \def\section{%
+ \@startsection
+ {section}{1}{\z@}%
+ {5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}%
+ }%
+}%
+\let\appendix@figtab@defs\@empty
+\def\appendix@figtab@defs@pptt{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{mathletters}
+% Define |mathletters| environment. This is a wrapper that goes
+% \emph{around} (outside of) |equation| or |eqnarray| environments.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{cureqno}%
+\newenvironment{mathletters}{%
+ \refstepcounter{equation}%
+ \setcounter{cureqno}{\value{equation}}%
+ \let\@curtheeqn\theequation
+ \edef\@tempa{\theequation}%
+ \expandafter\def
+ \expandafter\theequation
+ \expandafter{\@tempa\alph{equation}}%
+ \setcounter{equation}{0}%
+}{%
+ \let\theequation\@curtheeqn
+ \setcounter{equation}{\value{cureqno}}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eqnum}
+% The |\eqnum| command allows the author to override all automatic
+% equation marking schemes.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\eqnum[1]{%
+ \def\theequation{#1}%
+ \let\@currentlabel\theequation
+ \addtocounter{equation}{\m@ne}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Here ends the code for the document class.
+% Hereinafter appears code that is common to
+% the document class and document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bibliography}%
+% For the time being, I don't think
+% it would be a good idea to force an implementation based on BibTeX,
+% although I'll prepare for that eventuality by using the constructs and
+% general ideas of the \LaTeX\ |thebibliography| environment.
+% Adjustments have been made so that the |\cite|--|\bibitem| mechanism
+% can be used to cite references symbolically while maintaining proper
+% citation syntax within the paper; the author must create the citation
+% label for each reference in proper journal format in the |\bibitem|
+% command.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \begin{thebibliography}
+% \bibitem[label]{<texttag>}
+% \reference <bibliographic data>
+% \end{thebibliography}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Observe that the bibliographic data supplied by the author must also
+% conform to the standards of the journal. I have elected not to burden
+% authors with tedious \LaTeX\ commands which would require many curly
+% braces to delimit the bibliographic fields because many of the
+% journals I have targeted in this project have agreed to reduce
+% typographic overhead (bolding, italicizing, etc.) in reference lists.
+% (See Abt's editorial in ApJ 357.)
+% It is the responsibility of the author to get these fields in the
+% proper order with the correct punctuation; the information will be
+% typeset as is, i.e., in roman with no size or style changes.
+%
+% Macros are provided for many of the oft-referenced journals so that
+% authors may use the \LaTeX\ names rather than having to look up a
+% particular journal's
+% specific abbreviation. In principle, all the journals should be using
+% the same abbreviations, too, but I anticipate some changes in the
+% specific abbreviations before a set is finally settled on. As long as
+% these macros are kept up to date, authors need not be concerned about
+% such editorial changes.
+%
+% Corresponding with the non-BibTeX references environment and
+% |\reference| command for the reference list is the |\markcite|
+% command.
+% This can be used to identify in-text citations; in this case, the
+% author provides the actual citation text as opposed to the symbolic
+% tag.
+% The use of this is encouraged, even for journals where no special
+% formatting of citation call-outs is required; it is crucial for the
+% future use of on-line browsers.
+%
+% Note: |\markcite| is deprecated (V5.0) and has been eliminated.
+%
+% The entire bibliography section of code is incorporated into the
+% V4.1 document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{thebibliography}
+% \begin{macro}{\clear@thebibliography@page}
+% \begin{macro}{\thebib@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\thebib@list@pptt}
+%
+% Note on |\clear@thebibliography@page|: this procedure is nil except in
+% the manuscript substyle, where it does a |\clearpage|, and
+% the two-column preprint substyle, where it returns to two column mode.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
+ \clear@thebibliography@page
+ \subsection*{REFERENCES}%
+ \thebib@list
+ \def\refpar{\relax}%
+ \def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}%
+ \sloppy
+ \clubpenalty4000
+ \widowpenalty4000
+ \sfcode`\.=1000\relax
+}{%
+ \endlist
+ \revtex@pageid
+}%
+\def\clear@thebibliography@page{}%
+\def\thebib@list{%
+ \list{\null}{%
+ \leftmargin 3em\labelwidth\z@\labelsep\z@\itemindent-\leftmargin
+ \usecounter{enumi}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\thebib@list@pptt{%
+ \list{\null}{%
+ \leftmargin 1.2em\labelwidth\z@\labelsep\z@\itemindent-\leftmargin
+ \usecounter{enumi}%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{references}
+% It is not necessary to use the thebibliography environment.
+% This style defines a |references| environment that simply sets off the
+% list of references and adjusts spacing parameters.
+% It is not possible to use |\bibitem|s within the |references|
+% environment.
+% (The |\reference| command cannot be shortened to |\ref|;
+% |\ref| is used in standard \LaTeX\ for cross-referencing.)
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \begin{references}
+% \reference <bibliographic data>
+% \end{references}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{references}{%
+ \clear@thebibliography@page
+ \subsection*{REFERENCES}%
+ \bgroup
+ \setlength\parindent\z@
+ \setlength\parskip\itemsep
+ \let\refpar\references@refpar
+}{%
+ \refpar
+ \egroup
+ \revtex@pageid
+}%
+\def\references@refpar@mss{%
+ \par\setlength\hangindent{3em}\hangafter\@ne
+}%
+\def\references@refpar@pptt{%
+ \par\setlength\hangindent{1.2em}\hangafter\@ne
+}%
+\let\references@refpar\references@refpar@mss
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\reference}
+% \begin{macro}{\@reference}
+% List of references.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\reference{%
+ \@ifnextchar\bgroup{\@reference}{%
+ \@latexerr{Missing key on reference command}{%
+ Each reference command should have a key corresponding
+ to a \protect\markcite\space somewhere in the text
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@reference#1{\relax\refpar}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\markcite}
+%
+% The |\markcite| command is now deprecated and will give
+% a diagnostic message in the \TeX\ log (NB: without halting \TeX).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\markcite[1]{\remove@command\markcite}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cite}
+% Formatting choices for citations.
+%
+% FIXME: doublecheck compatibility with natbib
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@biblabel#1{\relax}%
+%\def\@cite#1#2{({#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi})}%
+ \def\@cite#1#2{#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% This completes the section of code incorporated into the
+% V4.1 document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% Hereinafter appears code for the document class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Tables and Figures}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{topnumber}
+% Explicitly set the counter for the number of floats allowed at the
+% top of the page
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{topnumber}{7}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tablenotemark}
+% \begin{macro}{\tablenotetext}
+% Footnotes for tables are to be identified with lower case alphabetics,
+% rather than numeric. |\tablenotemark| and |\tablenotetext| commands
+% are provided analogous to |\footnotemark| and |\footnotetext|, but
+% with the identifier {\em required}, like |\altaffilmark| and
+% |\altaffiltext|.
+% The |\tablenotetext| must be specified before the |\end{table}|,
+% since |\end{table}| displays it.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \tablenotemark{<tag letter(s)>}
+% \tablenotetext{<alpha tag>}{<text>}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Note that \m{tag letter} is identified with \m{alpha tag}
+% for corresponding text.
+% It is the
+% responsibility of the author to get the correspondence correct.
+%
+% The table footnotes are coupled to the table in which they occur,
+% rather than being associated with a particular page, and they are
+% printed with the table (relatively close to the caption) instead of
+% appearing at the extreme bottom of the page.
+% This is done to ensure that the notes wind up on the same page as the
+% table, since tables are floats and can migrate
+% from one page to another. There is the additional benefit that the
+% notes are unambiguously attached to the proper table, which is what is
+% required in the event that the editorial requirement of one table only
+% per page is ever changed to permit several tables per page.
+%
+% Footnotes are \emph{not} supported for figures.
+%
+% Here we give the formatting procedures for the mark, the note, and
+% the sequence of notes as a whole.
+% The code for plano tables provides alternative procedures,
+% albeit a common queueing mechanism is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\tnotemarkskip
+\tnotemarkskip7pt
+\newdimen\@abovenoteskip%
+\newcommand\tablenotemark[1]{%
+\rlap{$^{\mathrm #1}$}\hskip\tnotemarkskip\ignorespaces% Fixed: the space after notemark
+}%
+\def\@tablenotetext#1#2{%
+ \vspace{.5ex}%
+ {\noindent\llap{$^{#1}$}#2\par}%
+}%
+\def\@tablenotes#1{%
+ \par
+ \vspace{4.5ex}\footnoterule\vspace{.5ex}%
+ {\footnotesize#1}%
+}%
+\def\@tablenotes@pptt#1{%
+ \par
+ \vspace{3.2ex}\footnoterule\vspace{.4ex}%
+ {\footnotesize#1}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tablenotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\spew@tblnotes}
+%
+% The command |\tablenotetext| enqueues the table note text.
+%
+% The tablenotes are
+% dequeued onto the vertical list by |\spew@tblnotes|, which is
+% executed at the end of table processing.
+% Note that |\spew@tblnotes| also clears the |\tblnote@list|.
+%
+% Praise and honor are due to Kresten Krab Thorup (krab@iesd.auc.dk) for
+% posting ftn.sty to the Usenet, from which I drew the technique.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \let\tblnote@list\@empty
+}%
+%
+\newcommand\tablenotetext[2]{\ifdim\@abovenoteskip=0pt\global\@abovenoteskip=20pt\fi%
+ \appgdef\tblnote@list{\hsize\pt@width\leftskip\z@\rightskip\z@%
+ \@tablenotetext{#1}{\parfillskip\z@ plus1fil#2\endgraf}}%
+}%
+%
+\def\spew@tblnotes{%
+ \@ifx@empty\tblnote@list{}{%
+ \@tablenotes{\tblnote@list}%
+ \global\let\tblnote@list\@empty
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{table}
+% \begin{macro}{table*}
+% Patch |\spew@tblnotes| into the end-processing for tables:
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\endtable{\spew@tblnotes}%
+\expandafter\prepdef\csname endtable*\endcsname{\spew@tblnotes}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tableline}
+% Add a |\tableline| command for use in tabular environments. This
+% command produces the horizontal rule(s) between the column headings
+% and the body of the table.
+% Authors are discouraged from using any |\hlines| themselves,
+% and are typically forbidden from using vertical rules by editors.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\tableline=\hline
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
+% |\@makecaption| determines formatting for figure and table captions.
+% For manuscripts, all captions should be set as flushleft paragraphs.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vskip 2ex\noindent#1\ #2\par}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tablenum}
+% \begin{macro}{\figurenum}
+% The |\tablenum| and |\figurenum| commands allows the author to
+% override all automatic table- and figure marking schemes.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\tablenum[1]{%
+ \def\thetable{#1}%
+ \let\@currentlabel\thetable
+ \addtocounter{table}{\m@ne}%
+}%
+\newcommand\figurenum[1]{%
+ \def\thefigure{#1}%
+ \let\@currentlabel\thefigure
+ \addtocounter{figure}{\m@ne}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\placetable}
+% \begin{macro}{\placefigure}
+% \begin{macro}{\placeplate}
+% \begin{macro}{\@place@float}
+% Usually, a float (table, figure, or plate) is placed in an article at
+% or near the location that it is first mentioned.
+% However, there are times when an author wishes to refer to a float
+% {\em before} it is placed, for instance in an introduction.
+% The editors and typesetters however, may
+% have trouble deciding just where the float should be placed. The
+% following commands allow the author to tell the editor and publisher
+% exactly where they want to put the item.
+% It requires that a |\label{|\m{key}|}| command be
+% used in the markup for the float
+% (note that |\label{}| should appear {\em after} any |\caption|
+% command, so that the numbering will be correct).
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \placetable{<key>}
+% \placefigure{<key>}
+% \placeplate{<key>}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Style Note: In the preprint style, the command emits no text;
+% in the manuscript style, it places a note to the editors in the body
+% of the text.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\placetable{\@place@float{TABLE}}%
+\newcommand\placefigure{\@place@float{FIGURE}}%
+\newcommand\placeplate{\@place@float{PLATE}}%
+\def\@place@float#1#2{%
+ \vspace{0.5ex}%
+ \begin{center}EDITOR: PLACE #1 \ref{#2} HERE.\end{center}%
+ \vspace{0.5ex}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\figcaption}
+% \begin{macro}{\@figcaption}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xfigcaption}
+% Sometimes the figures are not included in the text, only the figure
+% captions. To facilitate this, a |\figcaption| command is
+% provided, which formats the figure captions as needed, and
+% increments the figure counter automatically.
+% The optional argument allows the markup to include, e.g. the filename
+% of the external figure.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\figcaption{\@testopt{\@xfigcaption}{}}%
+\def\@xfigcaption[#1]#2{{\def\@captype{figure}\caption{#2}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dummytable}
+% Similarly, we sometimes want to put a placeholder in a document
+% corresponding to a plano table (published elsewhere) so that cross
+% references, etc. work properly with autoincremented counters.
+% Thus, for example, one can do:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \dummytable
+% \label{mytable}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% in the document, and refer to this table by number.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\dummytable{\refstepcounter{table}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Here ends the code for the document class.
+% Hereinafter appears code that is common to
+% the document class and document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Plano Tables}%
+%
+% Plano tables are camera-ready pages that are included in a typeset
+% article the same way as line drawings, graphs, and other camera-ready
+% art, i.e., as ``planographic'' figures. There are desirable
+% properties for a formatter to have that are somewhat above and beyond
+% \LaTeX\'s |tabular| environment that would facilitate the creation of
+% such tables.
+% Among these are breaking long tables across pages, using footnotes
+% in a table, specifying comments and references for tables, etc.
+%
+% Note for V5.0:
+% Plano tables are no longer supported, but the capabilities of
+% the |deluxetable| are still part of \aastex.
+% What this means for the user is that all tables should be coded
+% in \LaTeX, whether using the standard \LaTeX\ mechanisms or
+% using the enhancements of |deluxetable|, however, the
+% appearance of the table in the printed journal will be under the control
+% of the publisher and not the author.
+%
+% Style Note:
+% ApJ ``standard'' widths for tables are 21 and 42 picas, which are the
+% widths of single and double columns in the journal. For wide tables,
+% any width less than 42 is acceptable, although using widths of 30pc
+% and up will result in better appearance when centering. Landscape
+% orientation is acceptable, and I have provided the pseudo-option
+% |\ptlandscape| that resets the page dimensions; the author is still
+% responsible for running the local DVI translator with the proper
+% parameters so that landscape pages emerge from the laser printer.
+%
+% Style Note:
+% AJ has no ``standard'' widths for camera-ready tables,
+% they simply need to be narrower than the page.
+% Landscape orientation is acceptable,
+% and I have provided the pseudo-option |\ptlandscape| that resets the
+% page dimensions; the author is still responsible for running the
+% local DVI translator with the proper parameters so that landscape
+% pages actually emerge from the laser printer.
+%
+% What follows was inspired by supertab.sty by Theo Jurriens, 1988.
+%
+% We define descriptive markup for table elements.
+% Observe that the formatting is embedded in the macro definitions
+% so that the author doesn't need to be concerned about stylistic
+% nuances.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \tablecaption{<text>}
+% \tablehead{<text>}
+% \colhead{<heading>}
+% \tabletail{<text>}
+% \tablewidth{<dimen>}
+% \tablecolumns{<num>}
+% \tableheadfrac{<num>}
+% \rotate
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The entire deluxetable section of code is incorporated into the
+% V4.1 document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pt@box}
+% \begin{macro}{\pt@width}
+% \begin{macro}{\pt@column}
+% \begin{macro}{\pt@nlines}
+% \begin{macro}{\pt@ncol}
+% \begin{macro}{\pt@page}
+% Allocate registers for use in |deluxetable| (plano) tables.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\pt@box
+\newdimen\pt@width
+\newcount\pt@line
+\newcount\pt@column
+\newcount\pt@nlines
+\newcount\pt@ncol
+\newcount\pt@page
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\colhead}
+% \begin{macro}{\tablecolumns}
+% \begin{macro}{\tablecaption}
+% \begin{macro}{\tablehead}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabletail}
+% \begin{macro}{\tablewidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableheadfrac}
+% See |deluxetable| environment definition for |\pt@addcol|.
+% The definition was moved so that |\tablecolumns| only affects the current
+% table
+%
+% FIXME: document syntax of |\tablehead{\colhead{<text>}}|
+% and alternative of using |\tablecolumns|.
+% Latter was added to assist Evan's translator, therefore is
+% highly recommended.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\colhead[1]{\multicolumn{1}{c}{#1}\pt@addcol}%
+%
+\gdef\pt@footnotesize{\string\footnotesize}
+\gdef\pt@scriptsize{\string\scriptsize}
+\newcommand\tabletypesize[1]{\def\pt@typesize{#1}\gdef\@typesize{\string#1}
+ \ifx\@typesize\pt@footnotesize
+ \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize}
+ \else
+ \ifx\@typesize\pt@scriptsize
+ \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize}
+ \else
+ \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+}% Access to different type sizes in deluxetable
+\def\pt@typesize{}%
+%
+\newcommand\tablecolumns[1]{%
+ \pt@column=#1\relax%
+ \pt@ncol=#1\relax%
+ \global\let\pt@addcol\@empty%
+}%
+%
+\newcommand\tablecaption[1]{\gdef\pt@caption{\tnotemarkskip8pt#1}}%Fixed: space after mark
+\newcommand\tablehead[1]{%
+ \gdef\pt@head{%
+ \hline\hline
+ \relax\\[-1.7ex]%
+ #1\hskip\tabcolsep
+ \\[.7ex]%
+ \hline
+ \relax\\[-1.5ex]%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\tablehead@aj#1{%
+ \gdef\pt@head{%
+ #1\hskip\tabcolsep
+ \\[.7ex]%
+ \hline
+ \relax\\[-1.5ex]%
+ }%
+}%
+\newif\if@pt@rot
+\newcommand\rotate{\@pt@rottrue}%
+\newcommand\tabletail[1]{\gdef\pt@tail{#1}}%
+\newcommand\tablewidth[1]{\pt@width=#1\relax}%
+\newcommand\tableheadfrac[1]{\gdef\pt@headfrac{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Initialization:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \let\pt@caption\@empty%
+ \let\pt@head\@empty%
+ \let\pt@tail\@empty%
+ \pt@width\textwidth%
+ %\def\pt@headfrac{.1}%
+ \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize}% initialize typesize to consider
+}% % while calculating rows
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pt@calcnlines}
+% Calculate the number of tabular rows that will fit in the body of the
+% table. The height of the table body and the number of lines are
+% calculated thus:
+% \makeatletter
+% \begin{eqnarray}
+% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar bodyheight}}&
+% {}={}&
+% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar textheight}}
+% \times (1 - \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar pt@headfrac}})\nonumber\\
+% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar pt@nlines}}&
+% {}={}&
+% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar bodyheight}}
+% / (\mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar arraystretch}}
+% \times \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar baselineskip}})\nonumber
+% \end{eqnarray}
+% \makeatother
+%
+% The row height can be seen to be valid algebraically if one examines
+% the definitions for |\strutbox|, |\@setstrut|, and |\@array|.
+% I could eliminate
+% this calculation, as well as its attendant parameters, if it were
+% possible to determine the accumulated height of the |\halign| box as
+% \TeX\ goes along.
+%
+% Art says: of course this is not possible in \LaTeX\
+% without supplementing it with a specialized output routine.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%
+\newdimen\tabbaseskip%
+%
+\def\pt@calcnlines{%
+ \begingroup%
+ \if@pt@rot\textheight\textwidth\fi% rotate tables
+ \pt@typesize% Type sizes in deluxetable
+ \@tempdima\pt@headfrac\textheight
+ \@tempdimb\textheight\advance\@tempdimb by -\@tempdima
+ \@tempdima\arraystretch\baselineskip
+ \global\tabbaseskip\baselineskip
+ \divide\@tempdimb by\@tempdima
+ \global\pt@nlines\@tempdimb
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pt@tabacol}
+% Set |\@acol|
+% to |\pt@tabacol|, which is called when building the preamble for the
+% |\halign| (assuming the first column format specification is |l|,
+% which it should be for ApJ tables) so that |\tabskip| within the table
+% is set to |\fill|.
+%
+% Doing so permits us to toggle between natural and fixed-width
+% tables without requiring the user to change markup. Note that by
+% forcing |\tabskip| always to be |\fill|, I pretty well nullify any
+% |@{\hspace}| commands the user puts in the template, but this
+% environment is for people who don't want to think about that sort of
+% stuff anyway.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pt@tabacol{%
+ \edef\@preamble{\@preamble\hskip\tabcolsep\tabskip\fill}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pt@tmpcapwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano}
+%
+% Permit different identifying strings, one for the first page of the
+% table and one for continuation pages. \LaTeX's |\fnum@table| is set
+% to one or the other automatically in the environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\pt@tmpcapwidth
+\long\def\@makecaption@plano#1#2{%
+ \@ifdim{\pt@width>\z@}{%
+ \pt@tmpcapwidth\pt@width
+ }{%
+ \pt@tmpcapwidth\hsize
+ }%
+%\center
+ \parbox{\pt@tmpcapwidth}{%
+ \@make@caption@text{#1}{#2}%
+ }%
+ \endcenter
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptable}
+% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont}
+% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont}
+%
+% The default formatting procedures for
+% plano table captions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fnum@ptable{Table \thetable}%
+\def\fnum@ptablecont{Table \thetable---{\rmfamily Continued}}%
+\long\def\@make@caption@text#1#2{%
+ \center\rmfamily#1.\quad#2\endcenter
+}%
+\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont#1#2{%
+ \center\rmfamily#1\endcenter
+ \vskip 2.5ex
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont@pptt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text@pptt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt}
+% Formatting procedures for
+% plano table captions in the
+% preprint style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fnum@ptablecont@pptt{Table \thetable---{\itshape Continued}}%
+\long\def\@make@caption@text@pptt#1#2{%
+ \center\sc#1\\[.5ex]#2\endcenter
+}%
+\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt#1#2{%
+ \center\sc#1\endcenter
+ \vskip 1.5ex
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptable@apj}
+% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont@apj}
+% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text@apj}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont@apj}
+% Formatting procedures for
+% plano table captions in the
+% ApJ style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fnum@ptable@apj{TABLE \thetable}%
+\def\fnum@ptablecont@apj{TABLE \thetable---{\itshape Continued}}%
+\long\def\@make@caption@text@apj#1#2{%
+ \center\Large\sc#1\\[.5ex]#2\endcenter
+}%
+\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont@apj#1#2{%
+ \center\Large\sc#1\endcenter
+ \vskip 1.5ex
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptable@aj}
+% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont@aj}
+% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text@aj}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont@aj}
+% Formatting procedures for
+% plano table captions in the
+% AJ style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fnum@ptable@aj{Table \thetable.}%
+\def\fnum@ptablecont@aj{Table \thetable.\space{\rmfamily (continued)}}%
+\long\def\@make@caption@text@aj#1#2{%
+ \center\large{\sc#1}\space#2\endcenter
+}%
+\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont@aj#1#2{%
+ \center\large{\sc#1}\endcenter
+ \vskip 1.5ex
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{deluxetable}
+% \begin{macro}{planotable}
+% \begin{macro}{\startdata}
+% \begin{macro}{\enddata}
+%
+% Implementation Note:
+% It is desirable for the last portion of
+% a multi-page table to be |\topinsert|ed, rather than |\midinsert|ed.
+% At the moment, this doesn't happen. It's not straightforward to
+% make that preference known at the {\em end} of table processing.
+%
+% Note the context switch that provides for alternative formatting for
+% table notes in plano tables.
+%
+% In the start processing of |deluxetable|, the first order
+% of business is to put away the argument, which is
+% just like the argument of \LaTeX's |tabular|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\spew@tblnotesbox%
+\newbox\restof@tblnotesbox%
+\global\newdimen\noteheight%
+\global\newdimen\pt@tabnoteminht%
+\global\pt@tabnoteminht=0pt%
+\newenvironment{deluxetable}[1]{%
+% Fixed: table immediately after the title
+ \maketitle
+ \def\pt@format{\string#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next come the custom modifications to |tabular|'s behavior,
+% the row terminator that allows pagebreaks and
+% the alignment preamble parser that always sets
+% |\tabskip| to |\hfill|.
+% Note: |\nl| and |\nextline| are now deprecated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@acol\pt@tabacol%
+ \let\@tabularcr\@ptabularcr%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now come the context switches that control how
+% table notes are formatted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@tablenotetext\@ptablenotetext%
+ \let\@tablenotes\@ptablenotes%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The remainder of the start processing simply initializes
+% counters that are used in |deluxetable| processing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\pt@ncol\z@%
+ \global\pt@column\z@%
+ \global\pt@page\@ne%
+ \gdef\pt@addcol{\global\advance\pt@ncol\@ne}%
+ \if@pt@rot\leavevmode\fi%
+}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End processing for |deluxetable| entails
+% formatting the table notes, outputting the diagnostic
+% message for the last table page and wrapping up the float.
+%
+% Finding the available space for tablenotes below the table body
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@typesize\pt@footnotesize%%% considering the table typesize in calculation
+ \global\pt@tabnoteminht=\pt@notemin@footnote\baselineskip
+ \else
+ \ifx\@typesize\pt@scriptsize
+ \global\pt@tabnoteminht=\pt@notemin@script\baselineskip
+ \else
+ \global\pt@tabnoteminht=\pt@notemin@normal\baselineskip
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \global\advance\pt@tabnoteminht-\@abovenoteskip
+ \global\@abovenoteskip=0pt
+ \setbox\spew@tblnotesbox\vbox{\spew@tblnotes}%
+ %%
+ %% Finding the available space for tablenotes in current page
+ \if@pt@rot\global\noteheight\textwidth\else\global\noteheight\textheight\fi%
+ \global\advance\noteheight-\ht\captionbox%
+ \global\advance\noteheight-\pt@line\tabbaseskip
+ \if@twocolumn %% tables in preprint2 style
+ \ifx\@typesize\pt@scriptsize
+ \global\advance\noteheight-6\baselineskip%
+ \else
+ \global\advance\noteheight-3\baselineskip%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \global\advance\noteheight-2\baselineskip%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%%
+%% Print the maximum lines of notes below table within current page
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\noteheight<\pt@tabnoteminht% if not possible to keep the minimum two lines
+ \global\noteheight=0pt% % the whole notes move to next page.
+ \global\setbox\restof@tblnotesbox\vbox{\unvbox\spew@tblnotesbox}%
+ \else
+ %%
+ %% if possible two lines, check the length of notes
+ \ifdim\ht\spew@tblnotesbox>\noteheight%
+ % Print maximum notes in available space and store the remaining part
+ \hbox\@to\hsize{\hfil\vsplit\spew@tblnotesbox to \noteheight\hfil}%
+ \global\setbox\restof@tblnotesbox\vbox{\unvbox\spew@tblnotesbox}%
+ \else%
+ % Print the whole notes in current page.
+ \vbox{\hbox\@to\hsize{\hfil\box\spew@tblnotesbox\hfil}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \typeout@deluxetable%
+ \endcenter%
+ \end@plano@float%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%%
+%% Print the remaining tablenotes into new page(s).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% print each page until the remaining box empty.
+ \loop\ifvoid\restof@tblnotesbox\else%
+ \clearpage
+ %%
+ %% check whether the remaining box is a full/partial page
+ \ifdim\ht\restof@tblnotesbox<\if@pt@rot\hsize\else\vsize\fi%
+ \vbox to \textheight{\if@pt@rot\vfill\fi\hbox to \textwidth{\if@pt@rot\else\hfil\fi
+ \if@pt@rot\rotatebox{90}{\box\restof@tblnotesbox}
+ \else{\box\restof@tblnotesbox}\fi\hfil}\vfill}%
+ \else%
+ \vbox to \textheight{\vfill\hbox to \textwidth{\hfil%
+ \if@pt@rot\rotatebox{90}{\vsplit\restof@tblnotesbox to \textwidth}
+ \else{\vsplit\restof@tblnotesbox to \textheight}\fi\hfil}\vfill}%
+ \fi%
+ \clearpage
+ \repeat%
+ \addtocounter{table}{\m@ne}%
+ \tabletypesize{\normalsize}%
+}%
+\let@environment{planotable}{deluxetable}%
+%
+\def\@plano@float{% Invoked by \startdata
+ \begingroup%
+ \if@pt@rot\columnwidth\textheight\fi% Deluxetable table \rotate
+ \@plano@float@{table}%
+}%
+\def\end@plano@float{% S/B invoked by \enddata; instead by \enddeluxetable
+ \end@plano@float@\endgroup}%
+\def\@plano@float@{\@float}% Extra layer of abstraction for float processing
+\def\end@plano@float@{%
+\end@float}%
+\newdimen\firsttabskip
+\firsttabskip-\hsize
+\appdef\@endfloatbox{%
+\if@pt@rot
+\global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{\hskip\firsttabskip\global\firsttabskip\z@%
+\rotatebox{90}{\box\@currbox}}\else\global\firsttabskip\z@\fi%
+% Fix the roate table on first page
+}%
+%
+\def\typeout@deluxetable@mss{%
+ \typeout{%
+ Table \thetable\space has been set to width \the\pt@width
+ }%
+}%
+\def\typeout@deluxetable@ppt{%
+ \typeout{%
+ Page \the\pt@page \space of table \thetable\space has been set to
+ width \the\pt@width\space with \the\pt@nlines\space lines per page
+ }%
+}%
+% FIXME: default setting in case of unknown substyle
+\let\typeout@deluxetable\typeout@deluxetable@mss
+\newcommand\startdata{%
+ \pt@calcnlines
+ \@ifdim{\pt@width>\z@}{%
+ \def\@halignto{\@to\pt@width}%
+ }{%
+ \def\@halignto{}%
+ }%
+ \let\fnum@table=\fnum@ptable
+ \let\@makecaption\@makecaption@plano
+ \global\pt@line\z@
+ \start@pt@tabular
+ \after@startdata
+}%
+%
+\global\newbox\captionbox
+\def\start@pt@tabular{\par%
+ \@plano@float
+ \center
+ \expandafter\caption\expandafter{\pt@caption}%
+ \global\setbox\captionbox\vbox{\expandafter\caption\expandafter{\pt@caption}}
+ \pt@typesize% Type sizes in deluxetable
+ \expandafter\@tabular\expandafter{\pt@format}%
+}%
+%
+\def\set@pt@box#1{\setbox\pt@box}%
+\def\after@startdata{\pt@head}%
+\def\after@startdata@aj{\hline\hline\relax\\[-1.7ex]\pt@head}%
+\def\enddata{%
+ \crcr
+ \noalign{\vskip .7ex}%
+ \before@enddata%
+ \endtabular%
+ \setbox\pt@box\lastbox%
+ \pt@width\wd\pt@box
+ \hbox \@to \hsize{\hfil\box\pt@box\hfil}%
+ \ignorespaces}%
+\def\before@enddata{\hline}%
+\def\before@enddata@aj{\hline\hline}%
+\def\nl{\substitute@command\nl\\}%
+\def\nextline{\substitute@command\nextline\\}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ptabularcr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@argptabularcr}
+% A different row terminator is needed so that the line counter
+% can be checked prior to adding the line to the alignment box.
+% This command is syntactically equivalent to |\\|.
+%
+% User Note: This code is syntactically the same as the \LaTeX\
+% code for |\@tabularcr|, however the latter semantically ignores
+% its *-form.
+% In the case of |\@ptabularcr|, the * suppresses the possibility
+% of a page break.
+%
+% Implementation Note: This code, like |\@tabularcr| relies on the
+% idiom |{\ifnum0=`}\fi|, an obscure construction that is explained
+% by the \TeX book on pages 240 and 385--386.
+% The need for this construct is the case where a |\\| is immediately
+% followed by a |&| or a |\cr|. The construct |\ifnum0=`{\fi}| undoes
+% the effect of the first.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ptabularcr{%
+ {\ifnum0=`}\fi% A klootch just in case the next token is & or \cr
+ \@ifstar{%
+ \@testopt{\@argptabularcr\@empty}\z@skip%
+ }{%
+ \@testopt{\@argptabularcr\ptable@@split}\z@skip%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Recalculating the lines per page if any optional spacing between rows
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\pt@reduceline
+\newdimen\extra@vspace
+\extra@vspace\z@
+\def\@xargptarraycr#1{\@tempdima #1%
+ \global\advance\extra@vspace\@tempdima% % adding the optional spaces
+ \advance\@tempdima\dp \@arstrutbox%
+ \vrule \@height\z@ \@depth\@tempdima \@width\z@%
+ \global\pt@reduceline\arraystretch\tabbaseskip% total lines to be reduced
+ \@whilenum\pt@reduceline<\extra@vspace% % reducing the excess lines%
+ \do{%
+ \global\advance\extra@vspace-\pt@reduceline%
+ \global\advance\pt@line1
+ }%
+\cr}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@argptabularcr#1[#2]{%
+ \ifnum0=`{\fi}% To undo the effect of the klootch.
+ \@ifdim{#2>\z@}{%
+ \unskip\@xargptarraycr{#2}%
+ }{%
+ \@yargarraycr{#2}%
+ }\ptable@split#1%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ptable@split}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptable@@split}
+% \begin{macro}{\before@suspendpt}
+% \begin{macro}{\before@resumept}
+% \begin{macro}{\before@suspendpt@aj}
+% \begin{macro}{\before@resumept@aj}
+% \begin{macro}{\typeout@pt@nl@ppt}
+% \begin{macro}{\typeout@pt@nl@mss}
+% \begin{macro}{\typeout@pt@nl@aj}
+% The decision to break the table is made by |\ptable@split|,
+% which does its calculations inside a |\noalign|,
+% a trick I got from William Baxter.
+% Note that if the *-form of the |\\| was used,
+% the token thrown by |\aftergroup| is simply |\@empty|,
+% regardless of what the line count is;
+% this is how we prevent a pagebreak at this line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ptable@split#1{%
+ \noalign{%
+ \global\advance\pt@line\@ne%
+ \@ifnum{\pt@line<\pt@nlines}{}{%
+ \aftergroup#1%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\ptable@@split{%
+ \before@suspendpt%
+ \endtabular%
+ \setbox\pt@box\lastbox%
+ \pt@width\wd\pt@box\box\pt@box%
+ \typeout@pt@nl%
+ \global\advance\pt@page\@ne%
+ \endcenter%
+ \end@plano@float%
+ \clearpage
+ \global\extra@vspace\z@
+ \addtocounter{table}{-2}%
+ \let\fnum@table=\fnum@ptablecont%
+ \let\@makecaption\@makecaption@plano@cont%
+ \global\pt@ncol=\pt@column% Either 0 or value of \tablecolumns
+ \global\pt@line\z@%
+ \start@pt@tabular%
+ \before@resumept%
+ \pt@head%
+}%
+\def\before@suspendpt{}%
+\def\before@resumept{}%
+\def\before@suspendpt@aj{\@tabularcr\noalign{\vskip .7ex}\hline}%
+\def\before@resumept@aj{\hline\relax\@tabularcr[-1.7ex]}%
+\def\typeout@pt@nl@ppt{%
+ \typeout{%
+ Page \the\pt@page\space of table \thetable\space has been set to
+ width \the\pt@width
+ }%
+}%
+\def\typeout@pt@nl@mss{%
+ \typeout{%
+ Page \the\pt@page\space of table \thetable\space has been set to
+ width \the\pt@width\space with \the\pt@nlines\space lines per page
+ }%
+}%
+\def\typeout@pt@nl@aj{%
+ \typeout{%
+ Table \thetable\space has been set to
+ width \the\pt@width\space with \the\pt@nlines\space lines per page
+ }%
+}%
+\let\typeout@pt@nl\typeout@pt@nl@mss
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tablevspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\tablebreak}
+% Author markup commands for planotable environment line breaks.
+%
+% In version 4.0, it was necessary to use |\nl| or |\nextline| instead
+% of |\\| and to employ an alternative mechanism for introducing extra
+% vertical space:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \nl == \nextline Used in place of LaTeX's \\
+% \tablevspace{<dimen>}
+% \tablebreak
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% In this version of \aastex\, the user can simply employ \LaTeX's |\\|
+% as per usual.
+% The user can supply an optional argument to govern the vertical
+% spacing as usual, and the *-form prevents a pagebreak.
+%
+% Consequently, |\nl|, |\nextline|, and |\tablevspace| are now deprecated.
+%
+% Note that there is a significant problem with the |\tablevspace| command that
+% recommends against its use:
+% if the table splits at that point, the extra vertical space
+% will fall at the top of the next page's table.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\tablevspace[1]{\substitute@command\tablevspace\\[#1]}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In order to force a |deluxetable| to split (over pages), the user
+% gives the |\tablebreak| command.
+%
+% Art says: As a means of controlling page breaks,
+% I prefer to see the user employ the *-form of the
+% row terminator |\\| to prevent the indicated line
+% from splitting from the next line.
+% Besides, there is a drawback in using |\tablebreak|, namely
+% that it is syntactically different from |\\|, and
+% unlike any extant \LaTeX\ capability.
+% The ``\LaTeX\ way'' of forcing a page break would be
+% to use the |\pagebreak| or |\newpage| commands.
+% So I deprecate |\tablebreak|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\tablebreak{\cr\ptable@@split}%\\{\cr\ptable@@split}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cutinhead}
+% \begin{macro}{\cutinhead@ppt}
+% \begin{macro}{\sidehead}
+% We have some specialty heads that are sometimes wanted in tables.
+% Art says: Why do these use |\@ptabularcr|?
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \cutinhead{<text>}
+% \sidehead{<text>}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\cutinhead[1]{%
+ \noalign{\vskip 1.5ex}%
+ \hline
+ \@ptabularcr
+ \noalign{\vskip -4ex}%
+ \multicolumn{\pt@ncol}{c}{#1}%
+ \@ptabularcr
+ \noalign{\vskip .8ex}%
+ \hline
+ \@ptabularcr
+ \noalign{\vskip -2ex}%
+}%
+\def\cutinhead@ppt#1{%
+ \noalign{\vskip 1.5ex}%
+ \hline
+ \@ptabularcr
+ \noalign{\vskip -2ex}% Style Note: in apj, it is -1.5ex
+ \multicolumn{\pt@ncol}{c}{#1}%
+ \@ptabularcr
+ \noalign{\vskip .8ex}%
+ \hline
+ \@ptabularcr
+ \noalign{\vskip -2ex}%
+}%
+\newcommand\sidehead[1]{%
+ \noalign{\vskip 1.5ex}%
+ \multicolumn{\pt@ncol}{@{\hskip\z@}l}{#1}%
+ \@ptabularcr
+ \noalign{\vskip .5ex}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ptablenotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ptablenotes}
+%
+% Here we provide for the alternative formatting procedures for
+% table notes in plano tables.
+% Note that the |\tablenotemark| does not change.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ptablenotetext#1#2{%
+ \vspace{0ex}% Style Note: in ppt, it is gone
+ {%\parbox{\pt@width}%
+ {\hskip1em$^{\mathrm#1}$#2}\par}%
+}%
+\def\@ptablenotes#1{%
+ \par
+ \vspace{2ex}%
+ {\setlength\parskip{1.5ex}#1}%
+}%
+\def\@ptablenotes@apj#1{%
+ \par
+ \vspace{2ex}%
+ {#1}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tablerefs}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tableref}
+% \begin{macro}{\tablecomments}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tablecom}
+% Special kinds of table footnotes. Sometimes authors tabulate things
+% which have corresponding references, and it may be desirable to
+% associate these references with the table rather than
+% (or in addition to) the formal reference list.
+% Occasionally, authors wish to append a short
+% paragraph of explanatory notes that pertain to the entire table, but
+% which are different than the caption.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \tablerefs{<reference list>}
+% \tablecomments{<text>}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% In implementation, we enqueue and dequeue using the same
+% mechanism as the table notes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%
+\newcommand\tablerefs[1]{\ifdim\@abovenoteskip=0pt\global\@abovenoteskip=10pt\fi
+\appgdef\tblnote@list{\hsize\pt@width\leftskip\z@\rightskip\z@%
+\@tableref{\parfillskip\z@ plus1fil#1\endgraf}}}%
+\def\@tableref#1{%
+ \par
+ \vspace*{3ex}%
+ {%\parbox{\pt@width} %%%%
+ {\hskip1em\rmfamily References. --- #1}\par}%
+}%
+\newcommand\tablecomments[1]{\ifdim\@abovenoteskip=0pt\global\@abovenoteskip=10pt\fi
+\appgdef\tblnote@list{\hsize\pt@width\leftskip\z@\rightskip\z@%
+\@tablecom{\parfillskip\z@ plus1fil#1\endgraf}}}%
+\def\@tablecom#1{%
+ \par
+ \vspace*{3ex}%
+ {%\parbox{\pt@width} %%%
+{\hskip1em\rmfamily Note. --- #1}\par}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tableref@pptt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tablecom@pptt}
+% Table references and comments in the two-column preprint style:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tableref@pptt#1{%
+ \par
+ \vspace*{3ex}%
+ {%\parbox{\pt@width} %%%
+ {\hskip1em{\sc References.---}#1}\par}%
+}%
+\def\@tablecom@pptt#1{%
+ \vspace*{3ex}{%
+ %\parbox{\pt@width} %%%
+ {\hskip1em{\sc Note.---}#1}\par}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Here ends the section of code incorporated into the
+% V4.1 document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Hereinafter appears code for the document class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Float Parameters}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{plate}
+% Create a new type of float for ``plates''.
+% Note that the |\ftype@plate| must be a power of 2,
+% and that plates are put into the LOF (via |\ext@plate|).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{plate}%
+\def\ftype@plate{4}%
+\def\ext@plate{lof}%
+\newenvironment{plate}{\@float{plate}}{\end@float}%
+\newenvironment{plate*}{\@dblfloat{plate}}{\end@dblfloat}%
+\let\platewidth=\tablewidth
+\newcommand\platenum[1]{%
+ \def\theplate{#1}%
+ \let\@currentlabel\theplate
+ \addtocounter{plate}{\m@ne}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thefigure}
+% \begin{macro}{\thetable}
+% \begin{macro}{\theplate}
+% Float numbering is arabic.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}%
+\def\thetable{\@arabic\c@table}%
+\def\theplate{\@arabic\c@plate}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fnum@figure}
+% \begin{macro}{\fnum@table}
+% \begin{macro}{\fnum@plate}
+%
+% Formatting of the float number:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fnum@figure{{\rmfamily Fig.\space\thefigure.---}}%
+\def\fnum@table{{\rmfamily Table \thetable:}}%
+\def\fnum@plate{{\bfseries Plate \theplate.}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fps@figure}
+% \begin{macro}{\fps@table}
+% \begin{macro}{\fps@plate}
+%
+% Float positions:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%
+\def\fps@figure{bp}%
+\def\fps@table{bp}%
+\def\fps@plate{bp}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{EPS Inclusions}%
+% FIXME: requires package epsf.sty
+%
+% FIXME: prefer |\includegraphics|
+%
+% FIXME: implement autoscaling in |\plotone| and |\plottwo|.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eps@scaling}
+% \begin{macro}{\epsscale}
+% \begin{macro}{\plotone}
+% \begin{macro}{\plottwo}
+% \begin{macro}{\plotfiddle}
+% Support EPS inclusion with the native \LaTeX\ |\includegraphics|
+% command.
+% A large number of DVI translators are supported by this mechanism,
+% although certain other features of \aastex, notably turnpage tables,
+% are supported only by PostScript output devices.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \plotone{<epsfile>}
+% \plottwo{<epsfile>}{<epsfile>}
+% \plotfiddle{<epsfile>}{<vsize>}{<rot>}{<hsf>}
+% {<vsf>}{<htrans>}{<vtrans>}
+% <epsfile> name of EPS file
+% \end{verbatim}
+% |\plotone| inserts the plot in a space that is |\columnwidth| wide;
+% |\plottwo| inserts two plots side by side on the same line.
+%
+% The |\plotfiddle| command now
+% uses only its first six arguments;
+% only |voffset| is ignored.
+% The parameters |hsf| and |vsf| serves as a scale factor for both
+% horizontal and vertical.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\epsfverbosetrue
+\def\eps@scaling{1.0}%
+\newcommand\epsscale[1]{\gdef\eps@scaling{#1}}%
+% 28 Oct 2003 SZ
+% added typeout commands to \plotone, \plottwo, \plotfiddle
+% this was a change made to the .cls for WPR
+% that was not picked up in the .dtx
+\newcommand\plotone[1]{%
+ \typeout{Plotone included the file #1}
+ \centering
+ \leavevmode
+ \includegraphics[width={\eps@scaling\columnwidth}]{#1}%
+}%
+\newcommand\plottwo[2]{{%
+ \typeout{Plottwo included the files #1 #2}
+ \centering
+ \leavevmode
+ \columnwidth=.45\columnwidth
+ \includegraphics[width={\eps@scaling\columnwidth}]{#1}%
+ \hfil
+ \includegraphics[width={\eps@scaling\columnwidth}]{#2}%
+}}%
+%
+\def\plotfiddle#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{{
+\typeout{Plotfiddle included the file #1}
+\centering\leavevmode%% Re-implement from v4.0
+\vbox to #2{\rule{0pt}{#2}}
+\hspace*{#6pt}\includegraphics[width=#4pt, height=#5pt, angle=#3, origin=c]{#1}}%
+}
+%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Abbreviations for Journals}%
+%
+% The object here is to provide authors
+% with convenient shorthands for the most ``popular'' (often-cited)
+% journals; the author can use these markup tags without being concerned
+% about the exact form of the journal abbreviation, or its formatting.
+% It is up to the keeper of the macros to make sure the macros expand
+% to the proper text. If macro package writers agree to all use the
+% same TeX command name, authors only have to remember one thing, and
+% the style file will take care of editorial preferences. This also
+% applies when a single journal decides to revamp its abbreviating
+% scheme, as happened with the ApJ (Abt 1991).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\jnl@style=\rmfamily
+\def\ref@jnl#1{{\jnl@style#1}}%
+\newcommand\aj{\ref@jnl{AJ}}%
+ % Astronomical Journal
+\newcommand\actaa{\ref@jnl{Acta Astron.}}%
+ % Acta Astronomica
+\newcommand\araa{\ref@jnl{ARA\&A}}%
+ % Annual Review of Astron and Astrophys
+\newcommand\apj{\ref@jnl{ApJ}}%
+ % Astrophysical Journal
+\newcommand\apjl{\ref@jnl{ApJ}}%
+ % Astrophysical Journal, Letters
+\newcommand\apjs{\ref@jnl{ApJS}}%
+ % Astrophysical Journal, Supplement
+\newcommand\ao{\ref@jnl{Appl.~Opt.}}%
+ % Applied Optics
+\newcommand\apss{\ref@jnl{Ap\&SS}}%
+ % Astrophysics and Space Science
+\newcommand\aap{\ref@jnl{A\&A}}%
+ % Astronomy and Astrophysics
+\newcommand\aapr{\ref@jnl{A\&A~Rev.}}%
+ % Astronomy and Astrophysics Reviews
+\newcommand\aaps{\ref@jnl{A\&AS}}%
+ % Astronomy and Astrophysics, Supplement
+\newcommand\azh{\ref@jnl{AZh}}%
+ % Astronomicheskii Zhurnal
+\newcommand\baas{\ref@jnl{BAAS}}%
+ % Bulletin of the AAS
+\newcommand\caa{\ref@jnl{Chinese Astron. Astrophys.}}%
+ % Chinese Astronomy and Astrophysics
+\newcommand\cjaa{\ref@jnl{Chinese J. Astron. Astrophys.}}%
+ % Chinese Journal of Astronomy and Astrophysics
+\newcommand\icarus{\ref@jnl{Icarus}}%
+ % Icarus
+\newcommand\jcap{\ref@jnl{J. Cosmology Astropart. Phys.}}%
+ % Journal of Cosmology and Astroparticle Physics
+\newcommand\jrasc{\ref@jnl{JRASC}}%
+ % Journal of the RAS of Canada
+\newcommand\memras{\ref@jnl{MmRAS}}%
+ % Memoirs of the RAS
+\newcommand\mnras{\ref@jnl{MNRAS}}%
+ % Monthly Notices of the RAS
+\newcommand\na{\ref@jnl{New A}}%
+ % New Astronomy
+\newcommand\nar{\ref@jnl{New A Rev.}}%
+ % New Astronomy Review
+\newcommand\pra{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~A}}%
+ % Physical Review A: General Physics
+\newcommand\prb{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~B}}%
+ % Physical Review B: Solid State
+\newcommand\prc{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~C}}%
+ % Physical Review C
+\newcommand\prd{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~D}}%
+ % Physical Review D
+\newcommand\pre{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~E}}%
+ % Physical Review E
+\newcommand\prl{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~Lett.}}%
+ % Physical Review Letters
+\newcommand\pasa{\ref@jnl{PASA}}%
+ % Publications of the Astron. Soc. of Australia
+\newcommand\pasp{\ref@jnl{PASP}}%
+ % Publications of the ASP
+\newcommand\pasj{\ref@jnl{PASJ}}%
+ % Publications of the ASJ
+\newcommand\qjras{\ref@jnl{QJRAS}}%
+ % Quarterly Journal of the RAS
+\newcommand\rmxaa{\ref@jnl{Rev. Mexicana Astron. Astrofis.}}%
+ % Revista Mexicana de Astronomia y Astrofisica
+\newcommand\skytel{\ref@jnl{S\&T}}%
+ % Sky and Telescope
+\newcommand\solphys{\ref@jnl{Sol.~Phys.}}%
+ % Solar Physics
+\newcommand\sovast{\ref@jnl{Soviet~Ast.}}%
+ % Soviet Astronomy
+\newcommand\ssr{\ref@jnl{Space~Sci.~Rev.}}%
+ % Space Science Reviews
+\newcommand\zap{\ref@jnl{ZAp}}%
+ % Zeitschrift fuer Astrophysik
+\newcommand\nat{\ref@jnl{Nature}}%
+ % Nature
+\newcommand\iaucirc{\ref@jnl{IAU~Circ.}}%
+ % IAU Cirulars
+\newcommand\aplett{\ref@jnl{Astrophys.~Lett.}}%
+ % Astrophysics Letters and Communications
+\newcommand\apspr{\ref@jnl{Astrophys.~Space~Phys.~Res.}}%
+ % Astrophysics Space Physics Research
+\newcommand\bain{\ref@jnl{Bull.~Astron.~Inst.~Netherlands}}%
+ % Bulletin Astronomical Institute of the Netherlands
+\newcommand\fcp{\ref@jnl{Fund.~Cosmic~Phys.}}%
+ % Fundamental Cosmic Physics
+\newcommand\gca{\ref@jnl{Geochim.~Cosmochim.~Acta}}%
+ % Geochimica Cosmochimica Acta
+\newcommand\grl{\ref@jnl{Geophys.~Res.~Lett.}}%
+ % Geophysics Research Letters
+\newcommand\jcp{\ref@jnl{J.~Chem.~Phys.}}%
+ % Journal of Chemical Physics
+\newcommand\jgr{\ref@jnl{J.~Geophys.~Res.}}%
+ % Journal of Geophysical Research
+\newcommand\jqsrt{\ref@jnl{J.~Quant.~Spec.~Radiat.~Transf.}}%
+ % Journal of Quantitiative Spectroscopy and Radiative Trasfer
+\newcommand\memsai{\ref@jnl{Mem.~Soc.~Astron.~Italiana}}%
+ % Mem. Societa Astronomica Italiana
+\newcommand\nphysa{\ref@jnl{Nucl.~Phys.~A}}%
+ % Nuclear Physics A
+\newcommand\physrep{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rep.}}%
+ % Physics Reports
+\newcommand\physscr{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Scr}}%
+ % Physica Scripta
+\newcommand\planss{\ref@jnl{Planet.~Space~Sci.}}%
+ % Planetary Space Science
+\newcommand\procspie{\ref@jnl{Proc.~SPIE}}%
+ % Proceedings of the SPIE
+\let\astap=\aap
+\let\apjlett=\apjl
+\let\apjsupp=\apjs
+\let\applopt=\ao
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% Here ends the code for the document class.
+% Hereinafter appears code that is common to
+% the document class and document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Text Entities}%
+%
+% The entire text entities section of code is incorporated into the
+% V4.1 document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Handy little things---that everybody works out for themselves anyway!
+% Many of these come from Springer's A\&A package, and some were
+% contributed by Francois Schweizer at DTM.
+% You can go berserk making these up,
+% especially when you start getting into the composite ones. We have
+% tried to select a tractable number that were useful, and somewhat
+% difficult to get right because fussy kerning or some such is required.
+% Most can be used in or out of math mode with impunity; |\alt| and
+% |\agt| are relations and can only be used in math mode.
+%
+% The first group consists of
+% various kinds of phantoms used for aligning columns in tables;
+% |\phn| is a phantom numeral,
+% |\phd| a phantom decimal,
+% |\phs| a phantom minus sign, and
+% |\phm| is a generic phantom.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\phn{\phantom{0}}%
+\newcommand\phd{\phantom{.}}%
+\newcommand\phs{\phantom{$-$}}%
+\newcommand\phm[1]{\phantom{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Wait! These two macros are defined in \file{amssymb.sty}!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\newcommand\lesssim{%
+% \mathrel{\mbox{\rlap{\mbox{\lower4pt\hbox{$\sim$}}}\mbox{$<$}}}%
+%}%
+%\newcommand\gtrsim{%
+% \mathrel{\mbox{\rlap{\mbox{\lower4pt\hbox{$\sim$}}}\mbox{$>$}}}%
+%}%
+%
+\let\la=\lesssim % For Springer A&A compliance...
+\let\ga=\gtrsim
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Various and sundry shorthand for text entities:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\sq{\mbox{\rlap{$\sqcap$}$\sqcup$}}%
+\newcommand\arcdeg{\mbox{$^\circ$}}%
+\newcommand\arcmin{\mbox{$^\prime$}}%
+\newcommand\arcsec{\mbox{$^{\prime\prime}$}}%
+\newcommand\fd{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm d}$}}%
+\newcommand\fh{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm h}$}}%
+\newcommand\fm{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm m}$}}%
+\newcommand\fs{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm s}$}}%
+\newcommand\fdg{\mbox{$.\!\!^\circ$}}%
+\newcommand\farcm@mss{\mbox{$.\mkern-4mu^\prime$}}%
+\let\farcm\farcm@mss
+\newcommand\farcs@mss{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\prime\prime}$}}%
+\let\farcs\farcs@mss
+\newcommand\fp{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\scriptscriptstyle\mathrm p}$}}%
+\newcommand\micron{\mbox{$\mu$m}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Alternative definitions for ApJ
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\farcm@apj{%
+ \mbox{.\kern -0.7ex\raisebox{.9ex}{\scriptsize$\prime$}}%
+}%
+\def\farcs@apj{%
+ \mbox{%
+ \kern 0.13ex.%
+ \kern -0.95ex\raisebox{.9ex}{\scriptsize$\prime\prime$}%
+ \kern -0.1ex%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\case}
+% Permit author to typeset ``case'' fractions. This is sometimes
+% wanted in displayed equations, during which \LaTeX\ will set fractions
+% specified as |\frac{x}{y}| as ``built-up'' fractions (numerator and
+% denominator at body text size).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\case[2]{\mbox{$\frac{#1}{#2}$}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\slantfrac}
+% \begin{macro}{\onehalf}
+% \begin{macro}{\onethird}
+% \begin{macro}{\twothirds}
+% \begin{macro}{\onequarter}
+% \begin{macro}{\threequarters}
+% \begin{macro}{\ubvr}
+% \begin{macro}{\ub}
+% \begin{macro}{\bv}
+% \begin{macro}{\vr}
+% \begin{macro}{\ur}
+% Permit author to typeset ``text fractions''---the |\slantfrac|
+% command should be used in text mode, \emph{not} in math mode.
+% Note that this is different from a ``shilling'' fraction, which the
+% author can produce without any special formatting markup.
+% Define markup shorthands for several common fractions using |\slantfrac|.
+%
+% The |\slantfrac| command is reimplemented in this version of \aastex---
+% it used to produce a ``special fraction'', now a case fraction.
+% The old definition appears below for reference.
+%
+% I do not understand the |\ubvr| commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\newcommand\slantfrac[2]{\mbox{$\,^#1\!/_#2$}}%
+\newcommand\slantfrac{\case}%
+\newcommand\onehalf{\slantfrac{1}{2}}%
+\newcommand\onethird{\slantfrac{1}{3}}%
+\newcommand\twothirds{\slantfrac{2}{3}}%
+\newcommand\onequarter{\slantfrac{1}{4}}%
+\newcommand\threequarters{\slantfrac{3}{4}}%
+%
+\newcommand\ubvr{\mbox{$U\!BV\!R$}}%% UBVR system
+\newcommand\ub{\mbox{$U\!-\!B$}}% % U-B
+\newcommand\bv{\mbox{$B\!-\!V$}}% % B-V
+\newcommand\vr{\mbox{$V\!-\!R$}}% % V-R
+\newcommand\ur{\mbox{$U\!-\!R$}}% % U-R
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ion}
+% Notation for atomic species (ionization levels). The ionization state
+% is specified as the second argument, and should be given as a numeral.
+% The macro has to expand the numeric state into the proper notation for
+% the publication (roman, numeric, plus signs, etc.)
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \ion{<element>}{<ionization state>}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\ion[2]{#1$\;${\small\rmfamily\@Roman{#2}}\relax}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nodata}
+% Centered ellipsis for use in tables (for unknown values). |\nodata|
+% is generalized markup for this notion: format of null-valued entries
+% in tables is style-specific.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\newcommand\cellipsis{\hfill$\cdots$\hfill}%
+%\newcommand\nodata{\multicolumn{1}{c}{$\cdots$}}%
+\newcommand\nodata{ ~$\cdots$~ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\diameter}
+% The |\diameter| command produces a circle with a slash through it;
+% added for compatibility with A\&A and MNRAS packages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\diameter{\ooalign{\hfil/\hfil\crcr\mathhexbox20D}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\degr}
+% The |\degr| command is a synonym for |\arcdeg|;
+% added for compatibility with A\&A and MNRAS packages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\degr{\arcdeg}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sun}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sol}%
+% \begin{macro}{\sun}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Mercury}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Venus}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Earth}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Mars}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Jupiter}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Saturn}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Uranus}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Neptune}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Pluto}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Moon}%
+% \begin{macro}{\ascnode}%
+% \begin{macro}{\descnode}%
+% Names for the planets and ascending node and descending node.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\Sun{\sun}% Sun symbol, "S"
+\newcommand\Sol{\sun}%
+\newcommand\sun{\odot}%
+\newcommand\Mercury{\astro{\char1}}% Mercury symbol, "1"
+\newcommand\Venus{\astro{\char2}}% Venus symbol, "2"
+\newcommand\Earth{\earth}% Earth symbol, "3"
+\newcommand\Terra{\earth}%
+\newcommand\earth{\oplus}%
+\newcommand\Mars{\astro{\char4}}% Mars symbol, "4"
+\newcommand\Jupiter{\astro{\char5}}% Jupiter symbol, "5"
+\newcommand\Saturn{\astro{\char6}}% Saturn symbol, "6"
+\newcommand\Uranus{\astro{\char7}}% Uranus symbol, "7"
+\newcommand\Neptune{\astro{\char8}}% Neptune symbol, "8"
+\newcommand\Pluto{\astro{\char9}}% Pluo symbol, "9"
+\newcommand\Moon{\astro{\char10}}% Moon symbol, "M"
+\newcommand\Luna{\Moon}%
+%\def\ascnode{\astro{N}}% ascending node (dragon's head), (only in cmastro)
+%\def\descnode{\astro{D}}% descending node (dragon's tail), (only in cmastro)
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Aries}%
+% \begin{macro}{\VEq}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Taurus}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Gemini}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Cancer}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Leo}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Virgo}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Libra}%
+% \begin{macro}{\AEq}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Scorpius}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sagittarius}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Capricornus}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Aquarius}%
+% \begin{macro}{\Pisces}%
+% Zodiacal symbols, and autumnal and vernal equinox.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\Aries{\astro{\char11}}%
+\newcommand\VEq{\Aries}% vernal equinox (Aries)
+\newcommand\Taurus{\astro{\char12}}%
+\newcommand\Gemini{\astro{\char13}}%
+\newcommand\Cancer{\astro{\char14}}%
+\newcommand\Leo{\astro{\char15}}%
+\newcommand\Virgo{\astro{\char16}}%
+\newcommand\Libra{\astro{\char17}}%
+\newcommand\AEq{\Libra}% autumnal equinox (Libra)
+\newcommand\Scorpius{\astro{\char18}}%
+\newcommand\Sagittarius{\astro{\char19}}%
+\newcommand\Capricornus{\astro{\char20}}%
+\newcommand\Aquarius{\astro{\char21}}%
+\newcommand\Pisces{\astro{\char22}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\astro}
+% Font for astronomical symbols.
+% If the document lacks a |astro| class option, then the
+% |\astro@font| font switch gives a warning message suggesting how to correct things.
+%
+% The font is loaded at a size commensurate with that of basal text.
+% We may need to fine-tune things by scaling the value; the |astro| font's metrics
+% are, weirdly, about one quarter the em square.
+%
+% FIXME: scale the astro font?
+%
+% FIXME: provide a better default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\load@astro{%
+ \dimen@=1\aas@ptsize\p@
+ \font\astro@font=Astrosym at\dimen@
+}%
+\def\astro#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\astro@font#1}}%
+\def\astro@font{%
+ \ClassWarning{aastex}{%
+ Please use class option `astro', since you are using the astro font.%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sbond}
+% \begin{macro}{\dbond}
+% \begin{macro}{\tbond}
+% Chemical bonds in text
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\sbond{\chem@bnd{\@sbnd}}%
+\newcommand\dbond{\chem@bnd{\@dbnd}}%
+\newcommand\tbond{\chem@bnd{\@tbnd}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chem@bnd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sbnd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dbnd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tbnd}
+% Low-level macros for chemical bonds in text
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\chem@bnd#1{%
+ {%
+ \kern.1em\relax
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{M}%
+ \dimen@ii.8em\relax
+ \p@=.1em\relax
+ \dimen@.5\ht\z@\dimen@i-\dimen@
+ \advance\dimen@1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i-1.0\p@
+ #1%
+ \kern.1em\relax
+ }%
+ }%
+%
+\def\@sbnd{%
+ \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@
+ \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak
+ }%
+%
+\def\@dbnd{%
+ \advance\dimen@-0.5\p@\advance\dimen@i0.5\p@
+ \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak
+ \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@
+ \hskip-\dimen@ii
+ \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak
+ }%
+%
+\def\@tbnd{%
+ \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak
+ \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@
+ \hskip-\dimen@ii
+ \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak
+ \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@
+ \hskip-\dimen@ii
+ \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LaTeX}
+% This is a generalization of the definition of |\LaTeX| that comes in
+% \LaTeX.
+% The change here ensures that \LaTeX\ will be typeset in the current
+% style, rather than always in roman.
+% Note that the appearance of the \LaTeX\ logo will not necessarily
+% coincide with that promulgated by Team \LaTeX\ in the Companions,
+% but I claim that, in the absence of a standard set by Lamport himself,
+% we need have no concerns about being taken to task by the purity police.
+%
+% Implementation note: we use herein the |\count@| scratch register.
+% if |\everymath| begins using that register, this macro is hosed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\LaTeX{%
+ \leavevmode
+ L%
+ \raise.42ex\hbox{%
+ \count@=\the\fam
+ $\fam\count@\scriptstyle\kern-.3em A$%
+ }%
+ \kern-.15em\TeX
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\anchor}
+% Syntax: |\anchor|\arg{href}\arg{text}.
+%
+% A general-purpose hypertext link tag, using the parlance of
+% the HTML element |<<A>>| (anchor).
+% |<href>| is a \emph{full} URI, including the |scheme:| designator
+% and may be active in some sort of hyperref-savvy system;
+% for now it has no semantic.
+% The |<text>| argument is the copy to set in the document,
+% much like the content of the HTML |<<A>>| element.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\anchor[2]{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\url}
+% Syntax: |\url|\oarg{href}\arg{text}.
+%
+% We provide |\url| with the |<href>| as an optional argument,
+% to support the degenerate case where an author wishes to express a URL in the text.
+% In that case, |<href>|\({}={}\)|<text>|.
+% If the author supplies both arguments, this command looks like an alias for |\anchor|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\url{\@dblarg\@url}%
+\def\@url[#1]{\anchor{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\email}
+% Syntax: |\email|\arg{address}.
+%
+% Identify email addresses anywhere in text (not just in the author group).
+%
+% This markup will also permit production software at the Press
+% to make |mailto:| links, etc., in online products.
+% |<address>| should \emph{not} contain the |mailto:| scheme designator.
+%
+% In general text, |\email{foo@bar}| produces |\textt{mailto:foo@bar}|.
+% The |\email| command is also used in the author lists;
+% |\authoremail| is deprecated.
+%
+% FIXME: what happens if there is no title page?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@text@email#1{#1}%
+\def\authoremail{\substitute@command\authoremail\email}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\objectname}
+% Syntax: |\objectname|\oarg{catalog ID}\arg{text}.
+%
+% Celestial objects can and should be identified by the author to facilitate
+% post-processing of articles by the astronomical catalog databases.
+% At the moment, this is done by eye, although when articles contain these
+% marks, the Press could pass along a list of `objects in article'
+% to database personnel. Obviously, more sophisticated technical solutions
+% are possible.
+%
+% In the future, software could construct queries to those databases in the
+% online editions, hence it may be useful for the author to supply a catalog identifier.
+% We may choose to suppress the |<catalog ID>| argument in the
+% documentation in the near term, since we don't have an architecture
+% and a nomenclature for linking to them at this point.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\objectname{\@testopt\@objectname{[}}
+\def\@objectname[#1]#2{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% macro for object
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\object{\@testopt\@object{[}}%
+\def\@object[#1]#2{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%% macro for facility
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\facility{\@testopt\@facility{[}}%
+\def\@facility[#1]#2{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%% macro for supportfrom
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\supportfrom{\@testopt\@supportfrom{[}}%
+\def\@supportfrom[#1]#2{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%% macro for dataset
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\dataset{\@testopt\@dataset{[}}%
+\def\@dataset[#1]#2{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Here ends the section of code incorporated into the
+% V4.1 document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% Hereinafter appears code for the document class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Debugging}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sizrpt}
+% Reveal the em-width and ex-height of the current font:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\sizrpt{%
+ (\fontname\the\font): em=\the\fontdimen6\font, ex=\the\fontdimen5\font
+ \typeout{%
+ (\fontname\the\font): em=\the\fontdimen6\font, ex=\the\fontdimen5\font
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Substyles for Manuscript and Preprint}%
+%
+% This portion defines the class options that account for
+% the differences between the various types of document formats
+% (substyles) covered by this class.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Preprint class option}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aas@preprint}
+% The user should invoke the |preprint| document class option
+% if wishing the document formatted in preprint format.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aas@preprint{%
+ \def\revtex@genre{preprint}%
+ \let\ptlandscape\@empty
+ \setlength\@slugcmmntwidth{.67\textwidth}%
+ \let\@makeslugcmmnt\@makeslugcmmnt@ppt
+ \let\@abstract\@abstract@ppt
+ \let\make@title\make@title@ppt
+ \let\make@affil\make@affil@ppt
+ \let\notetoeditor\@gobble
+ \let\clear@section@page\@empty
+ \let\placetable\@gobble
+ \let\placefigure\@gobble
+ \let\placeplate\@gobble
+ \let\typeout@deluxetable\typeout@deluxetable@ppt
+ \let\typeout@pt@nl\typeout@pt@nl@mss
+ \ps@plaintop
+ \let\references@refpar\references@refpar@mss
+ \let\cutinhead\cutinhead@ppt
+ \def\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize{.1}
+ \def\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize{.12}
+ \def\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize{.15}
+ \def\pt@notemin@normal{4.5}
+ \def\pt@notemin@footnote{4.5}
+ \def\pt@notemin@script{5}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Two-column preprint class option}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aas@preprint2}
+% The user should invoke the |preprint2| document class option
+% if wishing the document formatted in two-column preprint format.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{aas@preprint2}{%
+ \aas@preprint
+ \def\revtex@genre{2-column preprint}%
+ \ps@plain
+ \@twocolumntrue
+ \@rightskip=\z@\@plus4em
+ \rightskip\@rightskip
+ \opt@just
+ \just@just % -SZ restored preprint2 to full justification
+ \setlength\parindent{1.2em}%
+ \setlength\parskip{0.5ex}%
+ \setlength\columnsep{0.5in}%
+ \setlength\hoffset{-0.2in}%
+ \tolerance=600
+ \setlength\emergencystretch{6\p@}%
+ \def\baselinestretch{1.0}%
+ \def\@tightleading{1.0}%
+ \let\singlespace\@empty
+ \let\doublespace\@empty
+ \let\@dates\@dates@pptt
+ \let\@abstract\@abstract@pptt
+ \let\make@title\make@title@pptt
+ \let\make@author\make@author@pptt
+ \let\make@affil\make@affil@pptt
+ \let\@keywords\@keywords@pptt
+ \setlength{\skip\footins}{3ex\@plus1ex\@minus.5ex}%
+ \setlength\footnotesep{2ex}%
+ \let\@makefntext\@makefntext@pptt
+ \let\section\section@pptt
+ \let\subsection\subsection@pptt
+ \let\subsubsection\subsubsection@pptt
+ \let\section@centering\@empty
+ \let\appendix@figtab@defs\appendix@figtab@defs@pptt
+ \def\clear@thebibliography@page{%
+ \if@restonecol\if@twocolumn\else\twocolumn\fi\fi
+ }%
+ \let\references@refpar\references@refpar@pptt
+ \let\thebib@list\thebib@list@pptt
+ \let\@tablenotes\@tablenotes@pptt
+ \let\fnum@ptablecont\fnum@ptablecont@pptt
+ \let\@make@caption@text\@make@caption@text@pptt
+ \let\@makecaption@plano@cont\@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt
+ \let\cutinhead\cutinhead@ppt
+ \def\@plano@float@{\@dblfloat}% Extra layer of abstraction for float processing
+ \def\end@plano@float@{\end@dblfloat}%
+ %\let\@tableref\@tableref@pptt
+ \let\@tablecom\@tablecom@pptt
+ \def\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize{.12}
+ \def\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize{.15}
+ \def\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize{.18}
+ \def\pt@notemin@normal{5}
+ \def\pt@notemin@footnote{5}
+ \def\pt@notemin@script{5}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\section@pptt}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection@pptt}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection@pptt}
+% Level one-, two-, and three heads for two-column preprint substyle.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section@pptt{%
+ \@startsection{section}{1}%
+ {\z@}{2.3ex\@plus1ex\@minus.2ex}%
+ {1.5ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+\def\subsection@pptt{%
+ \@startsection{subsection}{2}%
+ {\z@}{2ex\@plus1ex\@minus.2ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+\def\subsubsection@pptt{%
+ \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}%
+ {\z@}{2ex\@plus1ex\@minus.2ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Manuscript class option}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aas@manuscript}
+% The user should invoke the |manuscript| document class option
+% if wishing the document formatted in manuscript format.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aas@manuscript{%
+ \def\revtex@genre{manuscript}%
+ \let\ptlandscape\@empty
+ \def\baselinestretch{\@doubleleading}%
+ \let\footnote@size\@empty
+ \def\tighten{\def\baselinestretch{\@doubleleading}}%
+ \def\singlespace{}%
+ \def\doublespace{}%
+ \opt@tighten
+ \setlength\@slugcmmntwidth{\textwidth}%
+ \let\@makeslugcmmnt\@makeslugcmmnt@mss
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Page layout dimensions:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@rightskip=\z@\@plus4em
+ \rightskip\@rightskip
+ \opt@just
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Other switches:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\sluginfo\sluginfo@mss
+ \let\@abstract\@abstract@mss
+ \let\@keywords\@keywords@mss % pagebreak after keywords
+ \let\make@title\make@title@mss
+ \def\clear@section@page{\clearpage}%
+ \def\clear@thebibliography@page{\clearpage}%
+ \let\typeout@deluxetable\typeout@deluxetable@mss
+ \let\typeout@pt@nl\typeout@pt@nl@mss
+ \ps@plaintop
+ \let\references@refpar\references@refpar@mss
+ \def\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize{.08}
+ \def\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize{.1}
+ \def\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize{.12}
+ \def\pt@notemin@normal{3}
+ \def\pt@notemin@footnote{3}
+ \def\pt@notemin@script{4}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Here ends the code for the document class.
+% Hereinafter appears code that is common to
+% the document class and document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{For Editorial Use Only}%
+% The following commands permit administrative details or production
+% instructions to be passed through to production software at the publisher.
+% These commands are not to be used by the author.
+%
+% The entire editorial entities section of code is incorporated into the
+% V4.1 document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\journal}
+% \begin{macro}{\volume}
+% \begin{macro}{\issue}
+% |\journal|\arg{identifier}, |\volume|\arg{text}, |\issue|\arg{text}:
+% The identification token for the target journal, and the volume
+% and issue numbers, are specified in these commands.
+% In the \LaTeX\ style, they produce no output; they are simply a |\@gobble|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\journal{\@gobble}%
+\def\volume{\@gobble}%
+\def\issue{\@gobble}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SGMLbi}
+% \begin{macro}{\SGMLbsc}
+% \begin{macro}{\SGMLclc}
+% |\SGMLbi|\arg{text}, |\SGMLbsc|\arg{text}, |\SGMLclc|\arg{text}:
+% These commands mark text that should be in bold italic, bold script (calligraphic),
+% or \emph{always} in mixed case. The first two occur principally in math mode,
+% and they permit editors and keyboardists a more direct approach for specifying
+% these changes. The latter item is used around text, notably chemical symbols,
+% that must remain in mixed case, even when presented in an all-caps environment.
+% In the \LaTeX\ style, these commands just pass the \arg{text} through.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SGMLbi#1{#1}%
+\def\SGMLbsc#1{#1}%
+\def\SGMLclc#1{#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SGMLentity}
+% |\SGMLentity|\arg{text}:
+% This command permits editors and keyboardists to introduce special symbols
+% with their SGML entity names. \arg{text} does \emph{not} contain the leading
+% ampersand (|&|) or the trailing semicolon (|;|).
+% In the \LaTeX\ style, this command should add the ampersand and the
+% semicolon to \arg{text}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SGMLentity#1{\&#1;}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SGML}
+% |\SGML|\arg{text}:
+% This command permits SGML instructions and markup to passed through the
+% translation process.
+% In the \LaTeX\ style, it produces no output; it is simply a |\@gobble|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SGML{\@gobble}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecol}
+%% Modify the |\@makecol| macro for one-column abstract.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@printfoot%
+\global\@printfoottrue%
+\global\newbox\my@footins
+\gdef \@makecol@pptt {%
+ \ifvoid\footins
+ \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
+ \else
+ \if@printfoot
+ \else
+ \global\setbox\my@footins\vbox{\box\footins}
+ %\global\advance\c@colht by -\ht\my@footins
+ \fi
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+ \global\setbox\footins\vbox{\unvbox\my@footins\unvbox\footins}
+ \boxmaxdepth \@maxdepth
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \if@printfoot
+ \vskip\skip\footins
+ \color@begingroup
+ \normalcolor
+ \footnoterule
+ \unvbox \footins
+ \color@endgroup
+ \else
+ \global\@printfoottrue
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%
+ \global \let \@midlist \@empty
+ \@combinefloats
+ \ifvbox\@kludgeins
+ \@makespecialcolbox
+ \else
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to \@colht{%
+ \@texttop
+ \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox
+ \unvbox \@outputbox
+ \ifbotragg%
+ \vskip -\dimen@
+ \@textbottom
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%%
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \begin{macro}{\strip}
+%% macro to switch from one-column long abstract to two-column normal text
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\iflong@abstract
+\newtoks\juo@sar \juo@sar={}
+\def\@ca#1#2#3#4{}
+\@ifundefined{stripsep}{\newskip\stripsep\stripsep 15pt}{}
+\newskip\m@addvipersep
+\m@addvipersep\z@
+\newskip\c@addvipersep
+\c@addvipersep\z@
+\newdimen\ht@strip
+\newdimen\right@cor
+\newdimen\cor@height \cor@height=0pt
+\newdimen\juo@pr
+\newdimen\juo@ht
+\newbox\@viper
+\newcount\juo@sk
+\newdimen\c@colht
+\newbox\my@outputbox
+%% macro for adding strip
+\def\add@strip#1#2#3#4{\begingroup%
+ \xdef\ex@{\global\noexpand\juo@sar{\the\juo@sar\noexpand\@ca{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}\ex@%
+\endgroup}
+%% macro for remove strip
+\def\remove@strip#1{\ifx#1\@empty\global\juo@sk=0\else
+ \global\advance\juo@sk by-1\expandafter\next@item\the #1\@@#1\fi}
+\def\next@item \@ca#1#2#3#4#5\@@#6{\global #6={#5}\global\juo@pr=#1\global\juo@ht=#2%
+\global\cor@height=#3\global\m@addvipersep=#4}
+%% macro for strip command
+\def\strip{\@ifnextchar[{\@strip}{\@strip[0pt/0pt]}}
+\def\@strip[#1/#2]{\global\@tempdima=#1\global\@tempdimb=#2%
+ \global \setbox\@viper\vbox\bgroup%
+ \hsize\textwidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \col@number \@ne
+ \vrule height\topskip width\z@ depth\z@}
+\def\endstrip{%
+ \egroup
+ \if@firstcolumn
+ \ifdim\pagetotal>\z@
+ \global\ht@strip\pagegoal
+ \global\advance\ht@strip by-\pagetotal
+ \global\advance\ht@strip by-\stripsep
+ \global\advance\ht@strip by-\ht\@viper
+ \global\advance\ht@strip by-\stripsep
+ \global\juo@ht=\ht\@viper
+ \else
+ \global\ht@strip\z@
+ \fi
+ \ifdim\ht@strip>\z@
+ \add@strip{\the\pagetotal}{\the\juo@ht}{\the\@tempdima}{\the\@tempdimb}%
+ \global\advance\juo@sk by1
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputdblcol}
+% Modification in |\@outputdblcol| command for long abstract
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifbotragg\botraggfalse
+\def\@outputdblcol@pptt{%
+\if@firstcolumn
+ \global\@firstcolumnfalse
+ \global\setbox\@leftcolumn\box\@outputbox
+ \global\c@colht\@colht\global\c@addvipersep\z@
+ \ifnum\juo@sk>0
+ \remove@strip\juo@sar
+ \global\@colht\the\juo@pr
+ \global\@printfootfalse
+ \ifdim\right@cor>\z@
+ \global\advance\@colht by\right@cor
+ \fi
+ \global\advance\@colht by\cor@height
+ \global\cor@height=0pt
+ \fi
+\else
+ \ifdim\c@colht>\@colht%
+ \@tempdima\@colht%
+ \ifdim\@colht>\z@%%
+ \ifvoid\footins%
+ \else%
+ \vskip-\skip\footins%
+ \fi%
+ \splittopskip0pt%
+ \setbox\my@outputbox\vbox{%
+ \vspace*{\@colht}%%
+ \global\botraggfalse%
+ \vskip.7\baselineskip%
+ \vsplit\@outputbox to \baselineskip%
+ \unvbox\@outputbox}%
+ \unvbox\my@outputbox%
+ \ifvoid\my@outputbox%
+ \global\botraggtrue
+ \fi%
+ \global \@printfoottrue
+ \global\c@addvipersep\m@addvipersep%
+ \else%
+ \fi%
+ \ifnum\juo@sk>0%
+ \else%
+ \global\@colht\c@colht%
+ \fi%
+ \else%
+ \global \@firstcolumntrue%
+ \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox to \ht\@leftcolumn{\unvbox\@outputbox}%
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{\hb@xt@\textwidth {%
+ \hb@xt@\columnwidth {\box\@leftcolumn \hss}%
+ \hfil
+ \vrule \@width\columnseprule
+ \hfil
+ \hb@xt@\columnwidth{\box\@outputbox \hss}}%
+ \vss}%
+ \@combinedblfloats
+ \@outputpage
+ \begingroup
+ \@dblfloatplacement
+ \@startdblcolumn
+ \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi
+ {\@outputpage\@startdblcolumn}%
+ \endgroup
+ \global\juo@sk=0\global\juo@sar={}%
+ \global\cor@height\z@\global\c@addvipersep\z@
+ \fi
+\fi
+}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Here ends the code for both document class and document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Tail of Document Style Module}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This is not good: we now define a command for the
+% document style that is defined elsewhere for the class.
+% FIXME: only one definition of |\email|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%%\def\email#1{\appdef\@author{\make@authoremail{#1}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here is another klootch:
+% we have to provide a meaning to |\footnote@size|;
+% the following code duplicates code in the class file.
+% FIXME: only one code for |\footnote@size|!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifx\footnote@size\undefined
+ \let\footnote@size\footnotesize
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Finally, execute the commands queued by |\AtEndOfClass|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@styleh@@k
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here ends the document style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Programming Conventions}%
+% In writing the above code, I cleave to certain conventions, noted
+% here.
+% My goal in explaining them is to encourage others maintaining this
+% body of code to consider following them as well.
+% The benefits are twofold:
+% Some of the coding conventions aim to avoid programming pitfalls;
+% following them reduces maintenance costs.
+% Others make the code easier to read; following these eases the
+% process of understanding how the code works.
+%
+% And, for my part, I prefer to read code of this type.
+%
+% \subsection{Whitespace Conventions}%
+% Exactly where code lines break and indent, and where additional
+% whitespace is inserted is explained here.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% Each new macro definition or register assignment begins a new line.
+% Therefore, |\def|, |\newcommand|, and their ilk will start in column
+% 1.
+% \item
+% Code is indented one space for each level of nesting within braces
+% |{}|.
+% \item
+% Likewise, if possible, for |\if...| and matching |\fi|.
+% \item
+% However, the closing brace or |\fi| is outdented by one so that it
+% falls
+% at the same level of indentation as its matching brace or |\if|,
+% and it appears alone on its line.
+% \item
+% Use of the |tab| character is deprecated
+% (tabs are not standardized across all applications and operating
+% systems).
+% \item
+% Lines of code are limited to 72 characters.
+% I follow this convention mostly to ease the transmission of files
+% via email (a deprecated practice) and to accomodate people with
+% small monitors.
+% But |ltxdoc| output looks better with the shorter lines, too.
+% \item
+% Extraneous whitespace is avoided by using the comment character |%|.
+% In most cases, if falling at the end of a line of code,
+% a brace will be immediately followed by a comment character,
+% as will the macro parameter |#1| and any one-letter control sequence,
+% like |\\|.
+% \end{itemize}
+% These conventions taken together are illustrated by the following:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\prepdef#1#2{%
+% \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
+% \toks@ii{#2}%
+% \edef#1{\the\toks@ii\the\toks@}%
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% In the above, the definition of |\prepdef| would not fit on a single
+% line,
+% and required breaking. The first and last lines have matching braces,
+% and are a the same level of indentation, with the last line containing
+% a single brace.
+%
+% Each of the three intervening lines has balanced braces and is
+% indented by one space. Each line that would otherwise end in a single
+% brace character is terminated by a comment character.
+%
+% Some coders rely on the fact that a space character seen by \TeX's
+% scanner while in vertical mode is a no-op.
+% Be that as it may, I eliminate them unless actually intentional.
+%
+% \subsection{Conventions For Procedures}%
+% Here are some of my preferences when writing procedures:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%
+% \item
+% I dislike defining a macro within another macro, especially when the
+% pattern part is non-nil.
+% You know, you are not saving much space in |mem| when you do this,
+% right?
+% You do save space in the hash table and the string pool, though.
+% On the other hand, we are not dealing with small \TeX\ engines
+% anymore; Team \LaTeX\ has made sure of this.
+%
+% \item
+% If two or more macros have very similar replacement parts, consider
+% layering.
+%
+% \item
+% Macros may perform parsing, may maintain tokens or registers, or may
+% set type (produce marks). I try to avoid combining the three functions
+% in a single macro.
+%
+% \item
+% When a procedure both does assignments and sets type, I try to have a
+% clean separations between the two activities. Try to avoid:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \vskip10pt
+% \parindent=0pt
+% \leavevmode
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \item
+% The Boolean calculus (cf. |\@ifx|)
+% is very useful and produces code that executes nicely.
+% Using it also helps avoid your having to debug problems where
+% |\if...| and |\fi| are not properly balanced
+% (a nightmare in case you didn't already experience it).
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \subsection{Conventions For \LaTeX}%
+% Team \LaTeX\ make certain recommendations in \file{clsguide.tex}.
+% Ones that I particularly pay attention to are:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%
+% \item
+% For the sake of ``color safety'',
+% use |\sbox| rather than |\setbox|, |\mbox| rather than |\hbox|, and
+% |\parbox| or |minipage| rather than |\vbox|.
+%
+% \item
+% Use |\newcommand| and |\newenvironment| to declare user-level commands
+% and environments. Avoid the idiom |\def\foo|, |\def\endfoo| to define
+% an environment.
+% Ideally, all user-level markup could be extracted from the
+% document class by grepping on |\newcommand| and |\newenvironment|.
+%
+% \item
+% Prefer to use |\setlength| to assign registers.
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+% I cannot help but notice that much of the code of \LaTeX\ itself fails
+% to comply with many of the coding recommendations of Team \LaTeX.
+%
+%
+% \section{Yet to do}%
+% The following work is considered for the release of the \aastex\ 5.0
+% package:
+% \begin{description}
+%
+% \item[dot accents]
+% Augment |\dot| and |\ddot| with |\dddot| and |\ddddot|.
+%
+% \item[Posters]
+% Andrea wants to do posters. Ref best practices list. Sample document?
+%
+% \item[BibTeX]
+% Support for BibTeX-generated bibliographies.
+% Not a problem if using |thebibliography| and |\bibitem|.
+% Hoguvain and Berend have written a \file{astrobib.bst}.
+%
+% \item[Landscape tables]
+% Automatically rotate landscape tables if supported by output device.
+% User may specify \cmd\rotate in the preamble of |deluxetable|.
+% Works for any DVI translator targetting a PostScript printer.
+%
+% This command will be used in the pseudopreamble of deluxetable to create
+% a turnpage (broadside) table in the midst of an upright (portrait) article.
+% Implementation will be dependent on authors having a PostScript print engine.
+%
+% The |\rotate| command is implemented syntactically, but not semantically.
+%
+% \item[Two-column preprint formatting]
+% Automatically put text in 2-col, appendices in 1-col, references in
+% 2-col, obviating the user's need to insert markup. Done.
+%
+% If using native \LaTeX, all float types are supported, columns are not
+% balanced, and the page ends.
+%
+% If using |multicol|, only full-page floats are supported, columns
+% balance, and pages do not break.
+%
+% \item[Table autoplacement]
+% Possibly support automatically placing tables as follows:
+% less than 20pc width---single column,
+% up to 44pc width---full width,
+% over 44pc width---landscape.
+%
+% \item[tighten]
+% Class option |tighten| and commands |\doublespace|, |\singlespace| are noops in
+% |manuscript| substyle. In others, what should be done?
+%
+% \item[documentstyle]
+% What should happen to a compatibility mode document?
+% Wouldn't we have to support the exact same document style options?
+%
+% \item[substyle names]
+% Should we keep the old names or use the new ones?
+%
+% \item[FIXME]
+% Resolve all the remaining notes.
+%
+% \item[Line lengths]
+% Source lines should be no loonger than 72 characters. Done.
+% But re-check.
+%
+% \item[Testing]
+% In particular, the |\@ptabularcr| code is new,
+% but I have done some testing.
+%
+% \item[Distribution]
+% Why not make this class a supported \LaTeX\ oackage?
+% It would go in: |CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/supported|.
+%
+% \item[Macro names verbatim]
+% Use |\cmd{\foo}| when the control sequence name
+% appears in a moving argument.
+% Use |\cs{foo}| when the name involves non-alpha characters.
+%
+% \item[Changes from 4.0]
+% It would be good to have a section in the users guide
+% called ``Changes from 4.0''.
+% Summarizing
+% the new markup commands,
+% the removed markup commands,
+% any alteration in formatting,
+% etc.
+%
+% \item[Deprecated features list]
+% To add to user documentation.
+%
+% \item[ltxdoc stuff]
+% |\begin{environment}|, |\generate|
+%
+% \item[Best practices list]
+% To add to user documentation.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item How to code celestial coordinates.
+% \item How to specify object names (+,-).
+% \item How to include figures.
+% \item How to rotate tables.
+% \item |\ge|, |\le| exist---use them!
+% \item Don't include gigantic macro lists---please include only the ones you actually use.
+% \item |\newcommand| is recommended; please avoid |\def|.
+% \item Ionization potentials?
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \item
+% Natbib commands in user guide.
+%
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \section{Recently Done}%
+%
+% \begin{description}
+%
+% \item
+% We have to say proactively that plano tables aren't accepted anymore,
+% and not just remove those words from the AASTeX user guide.
+% That's why the |apjpt| and |aj_pt| substyles are removed from v4.1.
+% Done 9113.
+%
+% \item
+% \cmd\SGMLcite. (CB): Deprecated in favor of <TT>\cite*. Unimplemented.
+% \item
+% \cmd\slantfrac reimplemented with \cmd\case. Done 9113.
+%
+% \item[Deprecate commands]
+% Deprecate |\nl|, |\nextline|, |\tablevspace|, and |\tablebreak|. Done 9113.
+%
+% \item[URL commands]
+% Functionality covered by |hyperref| package.
+% Syntax: |\anchor|\arg{HREF}\arg{text}.
+% Syntax: |\url|\oarg{URL-specification}\arg{text}.
+% Syntax: |\email|\arg{address}.
+% Ref: \file{url.sty} in |/contrib/other/misc|. \file{hyperref.sty} in |/contrib/supported/hyperref|.
+% Done 9113.
+%
+% \item[Celestial objects]
+% Syntax: |\objectname|\oarg{catalogID}\arg{text}. Done 9113.
+%
+% \item[\texttt{slantfrac}]
+% \texttt{slantfrac} to be deprecated. |\onehalf| and friends to be
+% implemented with |\frac|. Done 9113.
+%
+% \item[Extensions to \texttt{cite}]
+% Support multiple citations in natural language. Ref email from Anton. Done with |natbib|.
+%
+% \item[\texttt{natbib}]
+% I incorporated |natbib| into \aastex\ as a vehicle for the expanded
+% citation functionality. |natbib| seems the right choice because
+% it is a part of |latex/contrib/supported|, is well thought out and implemented
+% and because it provided more than enough functionality, albeit
+% via different syntax.
+%
+% \item[\texttt{amsmath}]
+% The |amsmath| package is the successor to the \LaTeX2.09 |amssymb| package.
+% I have incorporated it into \aastex\ (that is, it is automatically loaded),
+% making it a constant part of \aastex\ rather than an option.
+%
+% The |amsmath| package is a part of |latex/packages/|, so it is an
+% ``annointed'' package---much more blessed than even the
+% |latex/contrib/supported| stuff. I have no hesitation about
+% mandating its use.
+%
+% \item[Unknown Symbols]
+% The following control sequence names cause \LaTeX\ to complain:
+% |\lhd|, |\rhd|, |\unlhd|, |\unrhd|, |\sqsubset|, |\sqsupset|,
+% |\Join|, |\leadsto|, |\Box|, |\Diamond|, |\mho|.
+% The message seen is:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ! LaTeX Error: Command \lhd not provided in base LaTeX2e.
+% \end{verbatim}
+% This problem is now fixed (9113).
+%
+% \item[UCPress administrative markup]
+% Syntax: \cmd\journal\arg{ID}, \cmd\SGML\arg{text}, \cmd\SGMLentity\arg{text}.
+% No production. Not documented in user guide. Done 9113.
+%
+% \item[Evan's Markup]
+% Done 9113.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% \cmd\journal\arg{ApJ},
+% \cmd\articleID\arg{number},
+% \cmd\volno\arg{number}\arg{issue}.
+% \item
+% \cmd\journalID\arg{number}
+% \item
+% \cmd\url\oarg[URL]\arg{text or URL}
+% \item
+% \cmd\corpauth\arg{name} appears in arg of |\author|.
+% \item
+% \cmd\SGML\arg{text}
+% \item
+% \cmd\clc\arg{text} goes to \cmd\SGMLclc\arg{text}
+% \item
+% \cmd\SGMLentity\arg{text}
+% \item
+% \cmd\SGMLbi\arg{text}
+% \item
+% \cmd\SGMLbsc\arg{text}
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \item[Email]
+% Syntax: \cmd\email\arg{address}.
+%
+% \item[\cs{objectname}]
+% \cmd\objectname\oarg{catalog id}\arg{text}
+%
+% \item[Evan's Points]
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% \cmd\shorttitle\arg{text} and \cmd\shortauthors\arg{text}
+% instead of |\lefthead| and |\righthead|. Done.
+% \item
+% \cmd\anchor is \cmd\url
+% \item
+% No plates anymore.
+% \item
+% Turnpage figures are a requirement.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \section{User Documentation and Sample Documents}%
+% User documentation for \aastex\ is the file \file{aasguide.tex},
+% generated by the {\sc docstrip} module following this section.
+%
+% Note:
+% This file requires the \file{aastex.cls} document class itself,
+% thereby lengthening the bootstrap process.
+% The requirement enters in the section documenting
+% the text entities defined by the class (see key |spec.symbols|).
+%
+% Sample files for this distribution of \aastex\ include
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% |sample.tex| is an \aastex\ tutorial paper with a fairly complete
+% set of markup.
+% \item
+% \item
+% |table.tex| is a sample \aastex\ table with complex column headings.
+% \end{itemize}%
+%
+% Since the user documentation and sample files are not heavily commented,
+% there is little utility in displaying them in the programmer documentation,
+% therefore, I bring the class doc to an end here.
+%
+% \Finale
+% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
+% \endinput
+%
+% User documentation module
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*guide>
+\documentclass[preprint2]{aastex}%
+\makeindex
+%
+\hyphenation{com-pu-scripts}
+\newcommand\aastex{AAS\TeX}%
+\newcommand\aastexhome{http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/AAS/AASTeX}%
+%
+\makeatletter
+\renewenvironment{theindex}
+ {\if@twocolumn
+ \@restonecolfalse
+ \else
+ \@restonecoltrue
+ \fi
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \twocolumn[\section{\indexname}]%
+% \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+% {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem}
+ {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+\makeatother
+%
+\makeatletter % This code stolen from ltxguide.cls:
+% Some hacks with verbatim... NB: this would be better done with the
+% verbatim package, but this document has to run on any LaTeX
+% installation.
+
+\let\o@verbatim\verbatim
+\def\verbatim{%
+ \ifhmode\unskip\par\fi
+% \nopagebreak % Overridden by list penalty
+ \ifx\@currsize\normalsize
+ \small
+ \fi
+ \o@verbatim
+}
+
+% Here we extend the font-setting command to include making <> active
+% (ie adjusting the input encoding).
+\renewcommand \verbatim@font {%
+ \normalfont \ttfamily
+ \catcode`\<=\active
+ \catcode`\>=\active
+}
+
+% Make |...| a synonym for \verb|...|.
+\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
+\MakeShortVerb{\|}
+
+
+% Make active <...> produce italics surrounded by angle brackets
+% (used in verbatim and \verb).
+% << produces a less-than, and >> produces a greater-than.
+
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\<=\active
+ \catcode`\>=\active
+ \gdef<{\@ifnextchar<\@lt\@meta}
+ \gdef>{\@ifnextchar>\@gt\@gtr@err}
+ \gdef\@meta#1>{\m{#1}}
+ \gdef\@lt<{\char`\<}
+ \gdef\@gt>{\char`\>}
+\endgroup
+\def\@gtr@err{%
+ \ClassError{ltxguide}{%
+ Isolated \protect>%
+ }{%
+ In this document class, \protect<...\protect>
+ is used to indicate a parameter.\MessageBreak
+ I've just found a \protect> on its own.
+ Perhaps you meant to type \protect>\protect>?
+ }%
+}
+\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`\do\,\do\'\do\-}
+
+% Various forms of argument:
+
+\newcommand{\m}[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it #1\/$\rangle$}}
+\renewcommand{\arg}[1]{{\tt\string{}\m{#1}{\tt\string}}}
+\newcommand{\oarg}[1]{{\tt[%]
+}\m{#1}{\tt%[
+]}}
+\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}}
+\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}%
+
+ % end of code stolen from ltxguide.cls. Thanks, Alan.
+
+ % code stolen from doc.dtx:
+\def\GetFileInfo#1{%
+ \def\filename{#1}%
+ \def\@tempb##1 ##2 ##3\relax##4\relax{%
+ \def\filedate{##1}%
+ \def\fileversion{##2}%
+ \def\fileinfo{##3}}%
+ \edef\@tempa{\csname ver@#1\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\@tempb\@tempa\relax? ? \relax\relax}
+
+ % end of code stolen from doc.dtx. Thanks FMi.
+\makeatother
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Title block of user guide.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\title{%
+ The \aastex\ \LaTeXe\ Macros\\for Manuscript Preparation
+}%
+
+%\author{Chris Biemesderfer}
+%\affil{Seagoat Consulting}
+
+%\author{Revised by Jeannette Barnes, May 1995}
+%\affil{American Astronomical Society}
+%\affil{NOAO, P.O. Box 26732, Tucson, AZ 85726}
+
+%\author{Revised for \fileversion\ by Arthur Ogawa, \filedate}
+%\affil{\TeX\ Consultants}
+%\email{ogawa@teleport.com}
+
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.tex}%
+
+%\date{\filedate, \fileversion}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Introduction
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\section{Introduction}
+
+The American Astronomical Society (AAS) has developed a markup package to assist authors in preparing manuscripts intended for submission to AAS-affiliated journals, as well as to other journals that will accept \aastex\ manuscripts.
+
+The most important aspect of the \aastex\
+package is that it defines the set of commands, or markup,
+that can be used to identify the structural elements of papers.
+When articles are marked up using this set of standard commands,
+they may then be submitted electronically to the editorial
+offices and fed into the electronic production of the journals.
+
+This guide contains basic instructions for creating
+manuscripts using the \aastex\ markup package.
+Authors are expected to be familiar with the editorial
+requirements of the journals so that they can make
+appropriate submissions; they should also have a basic
+knowledge of \LaTeX---for instance, knowing
+how to set up equations using \LaTeX\ commands.
+A number of useful publications about \LaTeX\ (and \TeX) are listed in
+the reference section of this guide.
+
+{\em Authors who wish to submit papers electronically to the ApJ, AJ, or PASP are strongly encouraged use the \aastex\ markup package as described in this guide.}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Package context
+% \begin{macrocode}
+
+\section{\aastex\ Article Markup}
+
+This section describes the commands in the \aastex\
+package that an author might enter in a manuscript that is being
+prepared for electronic submission to one of the journals.
+The commands will be described in roughly the same order as they
+would appear in a manuscript.
+The reader will also find it helpful to examine the
+sample files that are distributed with the package and to consult the
+information available on the AASTeX Web site located at \aastexhome.
+Authors are also reminded to review the instructions to authors and electronic
+submissions guidelines for the specific journals to which they submit
+their papers.
+
+\subsection{Preamble}\label{sec-preamble}
+
+In \LaTeX\ manuscripts, the preamble is that portion of the file before
+the \verb"\begin{document}" command.
+
+\subsubsection{Getting Started}
+
+The first piece of markup in the manuscript declares the
+overall style of the document. Any commands that appear before this
+markup will be ignored.
+\begin{quote}\index{documentclass@\verb`\documentclass`}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{aastex}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+This specifies the document class as \texttt{aastex} with the
+default style (|manuscript|).
+The paper copy produced by this style file will be double spaced.
+Any tables included in the main body of the manuscript will also be
+double spaced.
+
+Other substyles are available. They are discussed in \S~\ref{styles}.
+
+\subsubsection{Defining New Commands}
+
+\aastex\ allows authors to define their own commands with
+\LaTeX's \verb"\newcommand".
+(Authors should not use the plain \TeX\ \verb"\def" command in
+AAS journal submissions.)
+Authors' \verb"\newcommand" definitions must be placed in the
+document preamble.
+
+In general, author-defined commands that are
+abbreviations or shorthands, for instance,
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\lte}{local thermodynamic
+ equilibrium}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+, are acceptable and can be easily handled
+by journal offices and publishers during data conversion.
+However, abbreviations that attempt to define new symbols by using
+\LaTeX\ commands for repositioning text tend to
+cause problems in the publication process and should be avoided.
+
+In particular, author-defined commands that use any of the commands
+listed below are apt to cause problems during data conversion.
+\begin{quote}
+\verb"\hskip", \verb"\vskip",
+\verb"\raise", \verb"\raisebox",
+\verb"\lower", \verb"\rlap",
+\verb"\kern", \verb"\lineskip",
+\verb"\char", \verb"\mathchar",
+\verb"\mathcode", \verb"\buildref",
+\verb"\mathrel", \verb"\baselineskip"
+\end{quote}
+Consequently, authors are strongly discouraged from
+using them.
+
+Extra symbols are defined for \aastex,
+some specifically for an astronomical context, others more
+broadly used in math and physics.
+In particular, the AMS has additional symbol fonts that are
+available in a standard \LaTeX\ package (\verb"amssymb").
+All of these symbols are depicted in the additional symbosl tables
+supplied with the package and on the \aastex\ Web site.
+
+Before defining a new symbol command,
+authors are advised to consult these tables to see whether the
+symbol they need already exists. If it does, they should use the
+corresponding markup command.
+Authors should \emph{not} redefine existing command names.
+When one of these commands is encountered in an electronic
+manuscript submitted to a journal, an author's redefinition will
+be ignored and the originally-defined command used.
+
+\subsubsection{Editorial Information}
+
+A number of markup commands are available for
+editorial office use in recording the publication history
+for each manuscript.
+These commands should be used by
+the editorial and production offices only.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\received{<receipt date>}
+\revised{<revision date>}
+\accepted{<acceptance date>}
+
+\ccc{<code>}
+\cpright{<type>}{<year>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+Copyright information should be specified with the commands \verb"\cpright"\
+and \verb"\ccc". The type of copyright and the corresponding year
+are given in \verb"\cpright". Valid copyright types are as follows.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{1.8in}}
+\tt AAS & Copyright has been assigned to the AAS\\
+\tt ASP & Copyright has been assigned to the ASP\\
+\tt PD & The article is in the public domain\\
+\tt none & No copyright is claimed for the article
+\end{tabular}
+\end{quote}
+The copyright type is case sensitive, so the type string must be
+entered exactly as given above.
+
+The Copyright Clearing Center code may be given in the \verb"\ccc"\
+command. The code is taken as regular text, so any special characters,
+notably ``\$,'' must be escaped as appropriate.
+
+\subsubsection{Short Comment on Title Page}
+
+Authors who wish to include a short remark on the title page,
+such as the name and date of the journal to which an article
+has been submitted, may do so with the following command.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\slugcomment{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+In the
+\texttt{manuscript} style,
+these comments appear on the title page after the title and authors;
+in the
+\texttt{preprint} style,
+they are placed at the upper right corner
+of the title page.
+
+\subsubsection{Running Heads}\label{shorthead}
+
+Authors are invited to supply running head information using the
+following commands.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\shorttitle{<text>}
+\shortauthors{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+Two different kinds of data are generally supplied in running heads.
+The left head contains an author list, (last
+names, possibly truncated as ``et al.''), while the right head
+is an abbreviated form of the paper title. This running head
+information will not appear on the \LaTeX-printed page but will be
+passed through to copy editing staff
+for inclusion in the published version.
+
+Editors and publishers impose varying requirements
+on the brevity of these data. A good rule of thumb is to limit the list
+of authors to three or else use ``et al.,'' and to limit the
+short form of the title to 40--45 characters.
+The editors may choose to modify the author-supplied
+running heads.
+
+\subsection{Starting the Main Body}
+
+The preamble is a control section.
+None of the markup that appears in the preamble
+actually typesets anything. The author must include a
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+command to identify the beginning of the main, typeset
+portion of the manuscript.
+
+\subsection{Title and Author Information}
+
+Authors should use the
+\verb"\title"\
+ and \verb"\author"\ commands to specify title
+and author information and the \verb"\affil" command
+to indicate the author's primary affiliation.
+Each \verb"\author"\
+ command
+should be followed by a corresponding \verb"\affil"\
+and optional \verb"\email"\ command.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\title{<text>}
+\author{<name(s)>}
+\affil{<affiliation>}
+\affil{<address>}
+\email{<e-mail address>}
+\and
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+ Line breaks may be inserted in the title
+with the \verb"\\" command. (Long titles will
+be broken automatically, so the \verb"\\" markup is not required.)
+If the title is explicitly broken over several lines, the
+preferred style for titles in AAS and ASP journals is the so-called
+``inverted pyramid'' style. In this style, the longest line
+is the first (or top) line, and each succeeding line is shorter.
+The text of the title should be entered in mixed case;
+it will be printed in upper case or mixed case according to
+the style of the publication.
+Footnotes are permissible in titles. Be careful to ensure that
+alternate affiliations (see below) are properly numbered if a
+footnote to the title is specified.
+
+Authors' names should be entered in mixed case.
+Names that appear together in the author list for authors who
+have the same primary affiliation should be specified in a single
+\verb"\author"\ command.
+Each author group should be followed by
+an \verb"\affil"\ command giving the principle
+affiliation of those authors. Physical and postal address information
+for the specified institution may be included with \verb"\affil".
+The address can be broken over several lines using the
+\verb"\\" command to indicate
+the line breaks.
+Usually, however, postal information will fit on one line.
+When there is more than one \verb"\author"\ command, the final
+one should be preceded by the \verb"\and"\ command.
+
+Authors often have affiliations in addition to their principle employer.
+These alternate affiliations may be specified with the \verb"\altaffilmark"\
+ and \verb"\altaffiltext"\
+ commands.
+These behave like the \verb"\footnotemark"\
+and |\footnotetext| commands of \LaTeX\ except that they do not take
+optional arguments. \verb"\altaffilmark"\
+ is appended to authors' names in the \verb"\author"\
+ list and generates superscript identification numbers.
+The text for the individual alternate affiliations is generated by the
+\verb"\altaffiltext"\
+ command.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\altaffilmark{<key number(s)>}
+\altaffiltext{<numerical key>}{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+It is up to the author to make sure that
+ each \m{key number} in his or her \verb"\altaffilmark"\
+ matches the \m{numerical key} for
+the corresponding \verb"\altaffiltext".
+
+When there is a lengthy author list, all author names may be
+specified in a single \verb"\author"\
+ command with affiliations
+specified using the \verb"\altaffilmark"\ me\-chan\-ism.
+In these cases, no \verb"\affil"\
+ commands are used, and in print, the
+affiliations would all be listed in a footnote block at the bottom
+of the title page.
+
+
+\subsection{Abstract}
+
+A paper's abstract should be marked with the
+\texttt{abstract} environment.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{abstract}
+<abstract text>
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+If an author is using the \texttt{preprint2} style, and the abstract is too long to fit on the title page, the \texttt{longabstract} option may be used in the \texttt{documentclass} to break the abstract to a new page.
+
+\noindent
+%\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[preprint2,longabstract]{aastex}
+\end{verbatim}
+%\end{quote}
+
+\noindent Note that authors should use the \texttt{longabstract} option only in \texttt{preprint2} mode and only when the abstract is too long to fit on the title page.
+
+\subsection{Keywords}
+
+Keywords, or subject headings, are accommodated
+as a single piece of text.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\keywords{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+If authors supply keywords, they must be delimited by whatever
+punctuation is required by the journal.
+They should be specified in alphabetical order.
+The \verb"\keywords"\
+ command will print the proper leading text---``Keywords:,'' ``Subject headings:,'' etc.---according to journal style.
+
+\subsection{Comments to Editors}
+
+Authors may make notes or comments to the copy editor with the
+\verb`\notetoeditor` command.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\notetoeditor{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+This command behaves like a
+footnote. Output to the printed page is produced only in the
+\texttt{manuscript} style.
+
+\subsection{Sections}
+
+\aastex\ supports four levels of section headings.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{<heading>}
+\subsection{<heading>}
+\subsubsection{<heading>}
+\paragraph{<heading>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+Section headings should be given in upper case or mixed case, depending
+on the style of the journal.
+Note that these commands delimit sections by marking the
+\emph{beginning} of each section;
+there are no separate commands to mark the ends.
+
+\subsection{Figure and Table Placement} \label{place}
+
+When preparing a manuscript for submission to an AAS journal, figures and tables do not generally need to be ``placed'' in the text of the
+document where an author would like them to appear but
+rather may simply follow the main body of the text.
+However, authors may indicate to the editors the preferred placement of
+these items by use of the \verb"\place*" commands.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\placetable{<key>}
+\placefigure{<key>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The \verb"\place*{"\m{key}\verb"}" commands are similar to the
+\verb"\ref"
+ command in La\TeX\
+and require corresponding \verb"\label"\
+ commands to link them to the
+proper elements.
+
+When used in the
+\texttt{manuscript} style, the \verb"\place*"\ commands will print a short
+message to the editor about figure or table placement.
+In the other styles, nothing is printed.
+
+\subsection{Acknowledgments}
+
+\aastex\ supports an
+\verb"\acknowledgments"%
+\index{acknowledgments@\verb`\acknowledgments`} section.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\acknowledgments
+ <acknowledgments text>
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+In the \aastex\ styles, acknowledgments are set off from the
+conclusion of the body with vertical space. Note the acknowledgments
+command takes no arguments.
+
+\subsection{Facilities}
+
+To help organizations obtain information on the effectiveness of their
+telescopes, the AAS has created a group of keywords for telescope
+facilities. Using a common set of keywords will make searches for
+this information significantly easier and more accurate.
+In addition, the use of facility
+keywords will be useful for linking papers that utilize the
+same telescopes together within the framework of the Virtual Observatory.
+A facilities keyword list is available through a
+link at the AASTeX Web page, \aastexhome.
+
+The facilities list should appear after the
+acknowledgments section.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+Facilities: \facility{<facility ID>},
+ \facility{<facility ID>},
+ \facility{<facility ID>}, ...
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+As part of the {\it facility ID} argument,
+the author may also include
+the name of the instrument in parentheses, e.g.
+|\facility{HST(WFPC2)}| or |\facility{MMT(Blue channel spectrograph)}|.
+There is no limit to the number of facility keywords
+that may be included in a paper.
+
+\subsection{Appendices}
+
+When one or more appendices are needed in a paper, the point where the
+main body text ends and the appendix begins should be marked
+with the \verb"\appendix"\
+ command.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{<body section>}
+\appendix
+\section{<appendix section>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The \verb"\appendix"\
+ command takes care of a number of internal
+housekeeping concerns, such as identifying sections with letters
+instead of numerals, and resetting the equation counter.
+Note that the \verb"\appendix"\
+ command takes no arguments.
+Sections in the appendix should be headed with \verb"\section"\
+ commands.
+
+\subsection{Equations}
+
+Display equations can be typeset in \LaTeX\ in a number of ways.
+The following three are probably of greatest use in AASTeX.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{displaymath}
+\end{displaymath}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The
+\texttt{displaymath} environment
+will break out a single,
+unnumbered formula. The \texttt{equation} environment does the same
+thing except that the equation is
+autonumbered by \LaTeX.
+To set several formul\ae\ in which vertical alignment
+is required, or to display a long equation across multiple lines, use the
+\texttt{eqnarray} environment. Each line of the \texttt{eqnarray}
+will be numbered
+unless a \verb"\nonumber"\
+ command is inserted
+before the equation line delimiter
+(\verb"\\").
+\LaTeX's equation counter is \emph{not} incremented when
+\verb"\nonumber"\
+ is used.
+
+Authors may occasionally wish to group related equations together and
+identify them with letters appended to the equation number.
+When this is desired, such related equations should still be set
+in \texttt{equation} or \texttt{eqnarray} environments, whichever is
+appropriate, and then grouped within
+the \texttt{mathletters} environment.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{mathletters}
+<equation> or <eqnarray>
+\end{mathletters}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+It is possible to override \LaTeX's automatic numbering within the
+\texttt{equation} or \texttt{eqnarray} environments using
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\eqnum{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+When \verb"\eqnum"\
+ is specified inside an \texttt{equation} environment
+or on a particular equation within an \texttt{eqnarray}, the text
+supplied as an argument to \verb"\eqnum"\
+ is used as the equation
+identifier.
+\LaTeX's equation counter is \emph{not} incremented when \verb"\eqnum"\
+ is used.
+\verb"\eqnum"\
+ must be used \emph{inside} the math environment.
+
+If, as a consequence of the use of \verb"\eqnum"\
+ or \verb"\nonumber",
+\LaTeX's equation counter gets out of synch with the author's
+intended sequence,
+the counter may be reset to a particular value.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\setcounter{equation}{<number>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The equation counter should be set to the number corresponding to the
+last equation that was formatted; therefore, it is most appropriate for this
+command to appear immediately after an \texttt{equation} or
+\texttt{eqnarray} environment.
+The command must be used
+\emph{outside} the math environments.
+
+The \texttt{eqsecnum} style file can also be used to modify the way equations
+are numbered. See \S~\ref{styles} for details.
+
+\subsection{Citations and Bibliography} \label{bibliography}
+
+Two options are available for marking citations
+and formatting reference lists: the standard \LaTeX\ \verb"thebibliography"\
+environment, and the \aastex\ \verb"references"\ environment.
+Authors are strongly encouraged to use \verb"thebibliography"\
+in their electronic submissions.
+
+Please note that the bibliographic data supplied by the author in
+the reference list must conform to the standards of the journal.
+Many of the journals that
+accept \aastex\ agreed to reduce typographic overhead, bold, italic, etc.,
+in reference lists \citep{Abt90}, and the AAS
+has elected not to burden authors with tedious markup commands
+to delimit the bibliographic fields. Instead, citations will be
+typeset in roman with no size or style changes.
+It is the responsibility of the author to
+arrange the required bibliographic fields in the
+proper order with the correct punctuation, according to journal
+style.
+
+\subsubsection{The {\tt thebibliography} Environment} \label{bib}
+
+The preferred method for reference management is to use \LaTeX's
+\texttt{thebibliography} environment, marking citations in the body
+of the paper with
+\verb"\citep"\ or \verb"\citet"\
+and associating references with them using \verb"\bibitem".
+The \verb"\cite"-\verb"\bibitem"\
+mechanism associates citations and references symbolically
+while maintaining proper citation syntax within the paper.
+In the \verb"\bibitem"\
+command, the author should specify citation data inside
+square brackets and a citation key in curly braces
+for each reference. (The |\bibitem| command is described
+in detail in the next section.)
+
+\noindent
+%\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \begin{thebibliography}{<dummy>}
+ \bibitem[<cite data>]{<key>} <bibliographic data>
+ .
+ .
+ \end{thebibliography}
+\end{verbatim}
+%\end{quote}
+
+\noindent Note that the argument \m{dummy} to the start command of the
+environment is not
+used in the \aastex\ package, but it is included to be consistent with the
+syntax of standard \LaTeX. It is acceptable to simply insert an
+empty pair of curly braces at the end of the \verb"\begin{thebibliography}"\
+command.
+
+\subsubsection{Specifying Bibliographic and Citation Information}\label{spec-bib-data}
+
+\aastex\ uses the |natbib| package \citep{Daly98} for
+citation management.
+The |natbib| package re-implements \LaTeX's |\cite| command,
+offering greater flexibility for managing citations in the
+author-year form.
+
+When using |natbib|, bibliographic data are defined
+in |\bibitem| commands.
+
+\noindent
+%\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \bibitem[<author>(<year>)]{<key>}
+ <bibliographic data>
+\end{verbatim}
+%\end{quote}
+
+\noindent
+The square-bracketed argument of the |\bibitem|
+contains the \m{author} portion of the citation
+followed by the \m{year} set off in parentheses.
+The parentheses are important---|natbib| uses them to
+determine the year portion of the citation---so be sure to
+include them.
+The argument \m{key} in curly braces is the code name
+by which the citation is referenced in the text.
+
+When placing citations in the text, the author should use
+either a |\citep| or a |\citet| command.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\citep{<key(s)>}
+\citet{<key(s)>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The |\citep| command produces a citation that is entirely
+set off by parentheses, e.g.\ ``(Cox 1995),'' while |\citet| permits
+the author's name to form part of the text, e.g.\ ``Cox (1995).''
+The plain \LaTeX\ |\cite| command behaves like |\citet|.
+
+The citation \m{key} must correspond to the \m{key} in a |\bibitem| command.
+During processing, information from the square-bracketed argument of the
+key's |\bibitem| is inserted in
+the text at the location of the \verb"\cite"\ command.
+Multiple citation keys are separated by commas, e.g.,
+|\citep|\allowbreak
+|{knuth84,|\allowbreak
+|cox95,|\allowbreak
+|lamport94}|.
+
+|\citep| and |\citet| each take optional arguments that specify
+extra text to be appended to the citation label. Text in the first
+set of square brackets will appear before the cite while
+text in the second set will appear after it.
+For instance, |\citep[chap. 2]{jon90}|
+would produce the citation ``(Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2),''
+|\citep[see][]{jon90}| would produce ``(see Jones et al, 1990),'' and
+|\citep[see][chap. 2]|\allowbreak|{jon90}| would print
+``(see Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2).''
+In addition, the * form of the
+cite commands will print the full author list instead of the
+abbreviated form.
+
+The syntax discussed above should be sufficient for the
+vast majority of cases; however, \aastex\
+does use the full |natbib| implementation, so many more
+syntax options are available. For details on
+the full range of |natbib| citation options, see the section
+on using |natbib| on the \aastex\ Web
+site and the |natbib| package documentation.
+
+It is not possible to use \verb"\bibitem"
+within \aastex's \texttt{references} environment
+(\S~\ref{refenv}),
+nor will \verb"\cite"\ commands work properly in the main body
+if \verb"\bibitem" commands are absent.
+
+\subsubsection{The {\tt references} Environment}\label{refenv}
+
+Some authors might prefer to enter citations directly
+into the body of an article. If so, the |references| environment may be
+used to format the reference list. The
+\texttt{references} environment
+simply sets off
+the list of references and adjusts spacing parameters.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{references}
+\reference{<key>} <bibliographic data>
+ .
+ .
+\end{references}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+While the
+\texttt{references} environment
+remains supported in \aastex,
+we anticipate that authors will prefer the stronger capabilities of
+the standard \LaTeX\ |thebibliography| commands as extended by |natbib|.
+
+\subsubsection{Abbreviations for Journal Names}
+
+\aastex\ commands are available for many of the most--frequently-referenced
+journals so that authors may use the markup rather than having
+to look up a particular journal's abbreviation.
+In principle, all the journals should be using the
+same abbreviations, but it is fair to anticipate some changes in
+the specific abbreviations before a system is finally settled on.
+If authors use the journal macros, they need not worry about
+changes to journal style governing abbreviations in citations.
+A listing of the current abbreviation macros appears
+in Table~\ref{journame}.
+\begin{table}
+\footnotesize
+\begin{center}
+\caption{Abbreviations for Journal Names}\label{journame}
+\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{2.5in}}
+\verb"\araa" & Annual Review of Astronomy and Astrophysics\\
+\verb"\actaa" & Acta Astronomica\\
+\verb"\ao" & Applied Optics\\
+\verb"\aj" & Astronomical Journal\\
+\verb"\azh" & Astronomicheskii Zhurnal\\
+\verb"\aap" & Astronomy and Astrophysics\\
+\verb"\aapr" & Astronomy and Astrophysics Reviews\\
+\verb"\apj" & Astrophysical Journal\\
+\verb"\apjl" & \rule[.5ex]{2em}{.4pt}, Letters to the Editor\\
+\verb"\apjs" & \rule[.5ex]{2em}{.4pt}, Supplement Series\\
+\verb"\aplett" & Astrophysics Letters and Communications\\
+\verb"\apspr" & Astrophysics Space Physics Research\\
+\verb"\apss" & Astrophysics and Space Science\\
+\verb"\aaps" & \rule[.5ex]{2em}{.4pt}, Supplement Series\\
+\verb"\baas" & Bulletin of the AAS\\
+\verb"\bain" & Bulletin Astronomical Inst. Netherlands\\
+\verb"\caa" & Chinese Astronomy and Astrophysics\\
+\verb"\cjaa" & Chinese Journal of Astronomy and Astrophysics\\
+\verb"\fcp" & Fundamental Cosmic Physics\\
+\verb"\gca" & Geochimica Cosmochimica Acta\\
+\verb"\grl" & Geophysics Research Letters\\
+\verb"\iaucirc" & IAU Circular\\
+\verb"\icarus" & Icarus\\
+\verb"\jcp" & Journal of Chemical Physics\\
+\verb"\jgr" & Journal of Geophysical Research\\
+\verb"\jcap" & Journal of Cosmology and Astroparticle Physics\\
+\verb"\jqsrt" & Journal of Quantitative Specstroscopy and Radiative Transfer\\
+\verb"\jrasc" & Journal of the RAS of Canada\\
+\verb"\memras" & Memoirs of the RAS\\
+\verb"\memsai" & Mem. Societa Astronomica Italiana\\
+\verb"\mnras" & Monthly Notices of the RAS\\
+\verb"\na" & New Astronomy\\
+\verb"\nar" & New Astronomy Review\\
+\verb"\nat" & Nature\\
+\verb"\nphysa" & Nuclear Physics A\\
+\verb"\physscr" & Physica Scripta\\
+\verb"\pra" & Physical Review A\\
+\verb"\prb" & Physical Review B\\
+\verb"\prc" & Physical Review C\\
+\verb"\prd" & Physical Review D\\
+\verb"\pre" & Physical Review E\\
+\verb"\prl" & Physical Review Letters\\
+\verb"\physrep" & Physics Reports\\
+\verb"\planss" & Planetary Space Science\\
+\verb"\procspie" & Proceedings of the SPIE\\
+\verb"\pasa" & Publications of the ASA\\
+\verb"\pasj" & Publications of the ASJ\\
+\verb"\pasp" & Publications of the ASP\\
+\verb"\qjras" & Quarterly Journal of the RAS\\
+\verb"\rmxaa" & Revista Mexicana de Astronomia y Astrofisica \\
+\verb"\skytel" & Sky and Telescope\\
+\verb"\solphys" & Solar Physics\\
+\verb"\ssr" & Space Science Reviews\\
+\verb"\sovast" & Soviet Astronomy\\
+\verb"\zap" & Zeitschrift fuer Astrophysik\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection{Figures}
+
+\subsubsection{Electronic Art}
+
+If an author wishes
+to embed graphics in a manuscript, it is necessary that
+the graphics files conform
+to the Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) standard \citep{PLRM}. The
+author must also have an appropriate DVI translator,
+one that targets PostScript output devices. (Detailed information
+on preparing and submitting electronic art is
+available in the submissions instructions for the journals.)
+
+Several commands are available for including EPS files
+in \aastex\ manuscripts. They should be placed within the
+ \texttt{figure} environment.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}
+\figurenum{<text>}
+\epsscale{<num>}
+\plotone{<epsfile>}
+\plottwo{<epsfile>}{<epsfile>}
+\caption{<text>}
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+When \verb"\figurenum" is specified inside the {\tt figure} environment,
+the text supplied as an argument to \verb"\figurenum" will be used as the
+figure identifier.
+\LaTeX's figure counter is \emph{not} incremented when \verb"\figurenum"
+is used.
+\verb"\figurenum" must be used \emph{inside} the {\tt figure} environment.
+
+\verb"\plotone" inserts the graphic in the named EPS file,
+scaled so that the horizontal
+dimension fits the width of the body text;
+the vertical dimension is scaled to maintain the aspect ratio.
+\verb"\plottwo" inserts two plots next to each other.
+Scale factors are determined automatically from information in the
+EPS file.
+
+The automatic scaling may be overridden with the command
+\verb"\epsscale{<num>}", where \m{num} is a scaling factor
+ in decimal units, e.g., 0.80.
+
+The |\plotone| and |\plottwo|
+macros are invocations of the |graphicx|
+|\includegraphics| command. In most instances, using
+|\plotone| or |\plottwo| should work for placing
+figures in \aastex\ documents. However, if more
+flexibility is needed, the |\includegraphics| command
+may be invoked directly. For instance, to rotate
+an image by 90 degrees, use
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\includegraphics[angle=90]{<epsfile>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+See the |graphicx| package documentation or the \aastex\ Web site for a
+complete list of the available arguments to |\includegraphics|.
+
+Authors are strongly encouraged to use |\plotone|, |\plottwo|, or |\includegraphics| to place their EPS figures. However, as of the current release, the old |\plotfiddle| macro from v4.0 has been reintroduced and may be used if the desired figure placement cannot be achieved with one of the methods above. The syntax of the command is
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\plotfiddle{<epsfile>}{<vsize>}{<rot>}{<hsf>}
+ {<vsf>}{<htrans>}{<vtrans>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+where the arguments are
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{2in}}
+\tt epsfile & name of the EPS file \\
+\tt vsize & vertical white space to allow for plot (\LaTeX\ dimension)\\
+\tt rot & rotation angle (degrees)\\
+\tt hsf & horizontal width of scaled figure (PS points)\\
+\tt vsf & vertical height of scaled figure (PS points)\\
+\tt htrans & horizontal translation (PS points)\\
+\tt vtrans & vertical translation (PS points)\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+PostScript points are 1/72 inches, so an \m{htrans} of 72 moves
+the graphic 1 inch to the right. Note that the \m{vtrans} argument is
+discarded in the reimplented macro and is included only for
+backward compatibility with \aastex\ v4.0.
+
+\subsubsection{Figure Captions} \label{legends}
+
+Regardless of whether an author includes electronic art in a manuscript, figure captions, or legends, should be provided. If art is included in the document, use the \verb"\caption"\ command within the \texttt{figure} environment. If electronic art is not included, figure captions may be grouped together at the end of the document using \verb"\figcaption".
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\figcaption[<filename>]{<text>\label{<key>}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The optional argument, \m{filename}, can be used to iden\-ti\-fy
+the file for the corresponding figure;
+\m{text} refers to the caption for that figure. The author
+may provide a \verb"\label"\ with a unique \m{key} for cross-referencing
+purposes.
+
+When the \verb"\figcaption"\ command is used, the figure
+identification label,
+e.g., ``Figure 1,'' is generated automatically by the command itself, so
+there is no need to key this information.
+ There is an upper limit of seven figure captions per page.
+Footnotes are \emph{not} supported for figures.
+
+\subsection{Tables} \label{tables}
+
+There is support in the \aastex\ package for tables via two mechanisms:
+\LaTeX's standard \texttt{table} environment,
+and the
+\texttt{deluxetable} environment, which allows for the formatting
+of lengthy tabular material. Tables may be
+marked up using either mechanism, although use of
+\texttt{deluxetable} is preferred.
+Authors should \emph{not} use the \LaTeX\
+\texttt{tabbing} environment when preparing electronic
+submissions.
+
+\subsubsection{The \texttt{deluxetable} Environment} \label{dte}
+
+Authors are encouraged to use the
+\texttt{deluxetable} environment to format their tables since it automatically
+handles many formatting tasks, including table numbering and insertion
+of horizontal rules. It also provides mechanisms for breaking tables and
+controlling width and vertical spacing that are unavailable in the \LaTeX\
+\texttt{tabular} environment.
+
+The \texttt{deluxetable} environment
+is delimited by \LaTeX's familiar
+\verb"\begin"\ and \verb"\end"\ constructs.
+The content consists of preamble commands and table data,
+the latter delimited by \verb"\startdata"\
+ and \verb"\enddata".
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{deluxetable}{<cols>}
+<preamble commands>
+\startdata
+<table data>
+\enddata
+\end{deluxetable}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The argument \m{cols} specifies the justification for each col\-umn.
+An alignment token, ``l,'' ``c,'' or ``r,'' is given for each column,
+indicating flush left, centered, or flush right.
+
+\subsubsection{Preamble to the \texttt{deluxetable}}%
+
+There are several commands in the
+\texttt{deluxetable} environment
+that
+must be given in the preamble.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\tabletypesize{<font size command>}
+\rotate
+\tablewidth{<dimen>}
+\tablenum{<text>}
+\tablecolumns{<num>}
+\tablecaption{<text>\label{<key>}}
+\tablehead{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+If a table is too wide for the printed page, the font size of the table
+can be cahnged with the \verb"\tabletypesize" command, which takes as
+an argument one of the the font size change commands:
+\verb"\small"\
+ (11pt), \verb"\footnotesize"\
+ (10pt), or
+\verb"\scriptsize"\
+ (8pt).
+
+To force a table to be set in landscape orientation,
+use the \verb"\rotate"\ \label{cmd-rotate} command. Note that
+most DVI previewers will not properly render rotated |deluxetable|
+output, so in order to see what the table looks like,
+it must be output to PostScript and viewed there.
+
+The width of a deluxetable is defined by \verb"\tablewidth".
+If this command is omitted, the default width is the width of the page.
+The table can be set to its natural width by specifying
+a dimension of \verb"0pt".
+Long tables may have a natural width that is
+different for each page. The natural width for each page will be
+printed to the log file during processing.
+Authors may then use this log information to
+define a fixed table width in order to give the
+table a more uniform appearance across pages.
+
+It is possible to override \LaTeX's automatic numbering within the
+\texttt{deluxetable} environment.
+When \verb"\tablenum"\
+ is specified inside a \texttt{deluxetable}
+preamble,
+the text supplied as an argument to \verb"\tablenum"\
+ will be used as the
+table identifier.
+\LaTeX's equation counter is \emph{not} incremented when
+\verb"\tablenum"\
+ is used.
+
+The caption (actually, the title) of the table is specified
+in \verb"\tablecaption".
+The text of \verb"\tablecaption"\
+ should be brief;
+explanatory notes should be specified in the end notes to the table
+(see \S \ref{tabendnotes}
+ below). If the caption
+does not appear
+centered above the table after processing, then specify the width of
+the table explicitly with the \verb"\tablewidth"\
+ command and rerun
+\LaTeX\ on the file. If an author supplies a \verb"\label"\ for cross-referencing purposes, this, too, should be included in the \verb"\tablecaption".
+
+Column headings are specified with \verb"\tablehead".
+Within the \verb"\tablehead", each column heading should be given
+in a \verb"\colhead", which will ensure that the heading
+is centered
+on the natural width of the column.
+There should be a heading for each column so that there are as
+many \verb"\colhead"\
+ commands in the \verb"\tablehead"\
+ as there
+are data columns.
+
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\tablehead{
+\colhead{<heading>} & \colhead{<heading>}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+If more complicated column headings are required,
+any valid \texttt{tabular} command that constitutes a proper
+head line in a \LaTeX\ table may be used. For example, the
+|\multicolumn| command below would create a table head with
+text centered over five columns.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\multicolumn{5}{c}{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+Consult \citet{Lamport} or \citet{Kopka99} for further details
+on the available table commands.
+
+The \verb"\tablecolumns{"\m{num}\verb"}" command
+is necessary if an author has
+multi-line column headings produced by \verb"\tablehead"\
+ or other \LaTeX\
+commands and is using either the \verb"\cutinhead"\
+ or \verb"\sidehead"\
+markup (see below). The \m{num} argument should be
+set to the true number of columns in the
+table. The command must come before the \verb"\startdata"\
+ command.
+
+%It is possible that a complicated table heading will overflow
+%the vertical space allotted for the table heading.
+%The fraction of the page allocated
+%for the table heading may be changed with \verb"\tableheadfrac".
+%The \m{num} argument to \verb"\tableheadfrac"\
+% should be the
+%decimal fraction of the page used for heading information.
+%The default value is 0.1, meaning that 10\% of the page height
+%is reserved for the table heading. It should rarely be necessary
+%to change this value.
+
+\subsubsection{Content of the \texttt{deluxetable}}%
+
+After the table title and column headings have been specified,
+data rows can be entered.
+Data rows are delimited with the \verb"\startdata"\
+ and \verb"\enddata"\ commands.
+The end of each row is indicated with the standard \LaTeX\ \verb"\\" command.
+Data cells within a row are separated with \& (ampersand) characters.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\startdata
+<data line>\\
+<cell>&<cell>&<cell>\\
+<more data lines>\\
+\enddata
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+Column alignment within the data columns can be adjusted with the \TeX\
+\verb"\phantom{"\m{string}\verb"}" command,
+where \m{string} can be any character, e.g., \verb"\phantom{$\arcmin$}".
+A blank character of width \m{string} is then inserted in the table.
+Four commands have been predefined for this purpose.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{2in}}
+{\verb"\phn"%
+} & {phantom numeral 0-9}\\
+{\verb"\phd"%
+} & {phantom decimal point}\\
+{\verb"\phs"%
+} & {phantom $\pm$ sign}\\
+{\verb"\phm{"\m{string}\verb"}"} & {generic phantom}\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{quote}
+
+Extra vertical space can be inserted between rows with an optional argument to the
+\verb"\\" command.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\\[<dimen>]
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The argument is a dimension
+and may be specified in any units that are legitimate in \LaTeX.
+
+In a table, it may happen that several rows of data are
+associated with a single object or item.
+Such logical groupings should not be broken across pages.
+In these cases, the |\tablebreak| command may be used to force
+a page break at the desired point.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+<table row>\\
+\tablebreak
+<next table row>\\
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+This command can be used any time that the default |deluxetable| page
+breaks need to be overridden.
+
+Journals often require that table cells that contain no data
+be explicitly marked. This is to differentiate such cells from
+blank cells, which are frequently interpreted as implicitly
+repeating the entry in the corresponding cell in the row preceding.
+Table cells for which there are no data should contain
+a \verb"\nodata"\
+ command.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\nodata
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+Within the |deluxetable| body, two kinds of special heads are
+allowed, |\cutinhead| and |\sidehead|.
+A cut-in head is a piece of text centered across the width
+of the table. It is spaced above and below
+from the data rows that precede and
+follow it and will appear set off by rules in the \LaTeX\ output.
+Similarly, the command for a side head produces a row spanning
+the width of the table but with the text left justified.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cutinhead{<text>}
+\sidehead{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+Table footnotes (more properly, table \emph{end notes})
+may also be used in the \texttt{deluxetable} environment.
+Their use is described in detail in \S \ref{tabendnotes}.
+
+\subsubsection{The \texttt{table} Environment}
+
+Authors may also compose tables using the \texttt{table} environment.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{table}
+\end{table}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The \texttt{table}\ environment
+encloses not only the tabular
+material but also any title or footnote information
+associated with the table.
+
+Titles, or captions, for tables are indicated with a |\caption|
+command
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\caption{<text>\label{<key>}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+A table label, e.g. ``Table 2,'' is generated automatically
+by \verb"\caption".
+ The author
+may provide a \verb"\label"\ in the caption with a unique \m{key}
+for cross-referencing
+purposes.
+
+The table body should appear within the \texttt{tabular} environment.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{tabular}{<cols>}
+\end{tabular}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The alignment tokens in \m{cols} specify the justification for each column. The letters ``l,'' ``c,'' or ``r'' is given for each column,
+indicating left, center, or right justification.
+Consult \citet{Lamport} for details about using
+the
+\texttt{tabular} environment
+to prepare tables.
+
+Each \texttt{tabular} table must appear within a \texttt{table}
+environment. There should be only one \texttt{tabular} table per
+\texttt{table}
+environment.
+If the journal requests manuscripts with only one table per page,
+the author may need to insert a \verb"\clearpage"\
+ command after especially short tables.
+
+Use the |\tableline| command to insert horizontal rules in the
+|tabular| environment.
+\begin{quote}
+\verb"\tableline"
+ \end{quote}
+The use of vertical rules should be avoided.
+
+As with the \texttt{deluxetable} environment, it
+ is possible to override \LaTeX's automatic numbering within the
+\texttt{table} environment using \verb"\tablenum".
+\verb"\tablenum"\
+ must be used \emph{inside} the \texttt{table}
+environment.
+
+\subsubsection{Table End Notes} \label{tabendnotes}
+
+\aastex\ supports footnotes and end notes within tables;
+this support applies to both the
+\texttt{deluxetable} environment
+and the standard \LaTeX\ \texttt{table} environment.
+
+Footnotes for tables are usually identified by lowercase letters
+rather than numbers. Use the |\tablenotemark| and |\tablenotetext|
+commands to supply table footnotes.
+As with \verb"\altaffilmark" and \verb"\altaffiltext", a note label,
+usually a letter, is required.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\tablenotemark{<key letter(s)>}
+\tablenotetext{<alpha key>}{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The \m{key letter} of the |\tablenotemark| should be the same as the
+\m{alpha key} for the corresponding \m{text}.
+It is the responsibility of the author to make the correspondence
+correct.
+
+Sometimes authors tabulate materials that have corresponding
+references and may want to associate these references with the table.
+Authors may also wish to append a short paragraph of explanatory
+notes that pertain to the entire table. These elements should be
+specified with the commands below.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\tablerefs{<reference list>}
+\tablecomments{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The \verb"\tablenotetext", \verb"\tablecomments", and
+\verb"\tablerefs" commands \emph{must}
+ be specified after the
+\verb"\end{tabular}" or \verb"\enddata" and before
+the closing \verb"\end{table}" or \verb"\end{deluxetable}".
+
+\subsection{Supplemental Materials}
+
+For many years now, authors have been taking advantage of the AAS journals'
+ability to post supplemental materials with their papers in the electronic
+editions. Even though each paper must stand on its own
+scientifically without the supplements, these materials are reviewed in the
+peer review process and should be included in initial manuscript
+submissions. As with regular figures and tables, papers with online only
+data must reference each electronic object in the main text
+and include an explanation of what the reader will
+find in the electronic edition.
+
+The four most popular types of supplemental materials are
+machine-readable tables, online color figures, online-only figures, and
+animations. Please see each journal's Web site for details on
+what types of supplemental materials are acceptable, how to
+submit these materials, author tools for preparing them,
+and their associated costs.
+
+\subsubsection{Machine-readable Tables}
+
+Online-only tables submitted to AAS journals are converted
+to a machine-readable
+format for presentation in the electronic edition.
+Machine-readable tables have two
+parts: the formatted ASCII data and a metadata header that provides
+format, units, and short explanations of each column of data. This
+structure is designed to provide maximum flexibility and ease of use
+for readers who wish to further manipulate the data with their own
+computer programs or with software like Excel.
+
+For each machine-readable table, the author should include a short sample
+version of the table in his or her \LaTeX\ submission. This sample version
+will appear in the print edition as well as
+in HTML in the electronic edition. The sample table should be
+5 to 15 lines long. It should include a table note at the end
+ with text indicating that a machine-readable
+version will be available in the electronic edition. For instance,
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\tablecomments{Table 1 is
+published in its entirety in
+the electronic edition of
+the Astrophysical Journal.
+A portion is shown here
+for guidance regarding its
+form and content.}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+Each example table must
+be cited and numbered as if it were a fully printed table.
+
+\subsubsection{Online Color Figures}
+
+For some journals, authors may submit figures
+that will appear in black and white in the
+print edition of a journal but in color in the electronic edition.
+In these cases, authors must submit separate black and white and RGB color
+versions of each figure labelled according to the
+file-naming conventions required for the publication.
+For the benefit of print journal readers, figure captions should be written
+with the color information placed inside parentheses,
+for instance, ``The dotted
+line (colored blue in electronic edition)
+is the H$_o$ = 75 km s-1 Mpc-1 model,'' and should
+include a note directing the reader to
+``See the electronic edition of the Journal
+for a color version of this figure.''
+
+\subsubsection{Online-only Figures}
+
+This feature is mainly useful for articles that contain large compendia
+of identification charts and other supplemental graphic material that need not
+be printed in full in the paper journal. Online-only figures are intended to
+provide supplemental information that is not critical to the scientific
+content of the article but that might nonetheless be of interest to the reader.
+
+Online-only figures must be mentioned explicitly by number and appear
+in correct numerical order in the body of the text. At least one figure
+in a series must be displayed as an example figure for the print edition.
+The caption should carry a message indicating that
+more figures are available in the electronic edition---for instance,
+``Plots for all sources are available in the electronic edition of the journal.''
+Enough information must be included in the figure caption for readers of the
+print edition to determine what is contained in the online-only figures.
+
+\subsubsection{Animations}
+
+Currently, only animations in the MPEG format are accepted by the AAS journals.
+Authors must supply a still frame from the animation in EPS format marked
+up like a regular figure that will serve as an example for the reader.
+They should include text in the caption for the
+still frame indicating that an animation is
+available electronically. For instance,
+``This figure is also available as an mpeg
+animation in the electronic edition of the {\it Astrophysical Journal}.''
+As with online-only figures, authors must include enough information in the
+figure caption for readers of the print edition to determine what the
+animation illustrates.
+
+\subsection{Miscellaneous}
+
+\subsubsection{Celestial Objects and Data Sets}
+
+Authors who wish to have the most important objects in their paper
+linked to a data center in the electronic edition may do so using the
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\objectname[<catalog ID>]{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+macro, or its alias |\object|.
+The text contained in the required argument
+will be printed in the paper and will serve as a link anchor
+in the electronic edition. The catalog ID
+given as an optional argument will be carried through as the identification
+key in the link to a data center. Note that links will only
+be activated if the name provided in the argument is recognized by a
+participating data center. It is the author's responsibility to use the
+correct identifier.
+
+Similar markup is available for linking to data sets hosted
+at participating data centers.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\dataset[<catalog ID>]{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+In the paper, the text in the required argument will be
+printed while the the catalog ID value will be passed through to form
+links to data centers.
+
+When an article contains |\object| or |\dataset| commands, the
+publisher will be able to use the markup to
+pass along a list of objects and data sets used in the
+paper to database personnel. Software can then be used to construct links to
+those databases.
+Please check with each journal's Web site for instructions on how to
+determine the object and data set identifiers, the location of
+verifications tools, and information on where in the paper these
+macros can best be used.
+
+\subsubsection{Ionic Species and Chemical Bonds}
+
+When discussing atomic species, ionization levels can be indicated
+with the following command.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\ion{<element>}{<level>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The ionization state is specified as the second argument
+and should be given as a numeral.
+For example, ``\ion{Ca}{3}'' would be marked up as \verb"\ion{Ca}{3}".
+
+For single, double, and triple chemical bonds, use the following macros.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\sbond
+\dbond
+\tbond
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsubsection{Fractions}
+
+\aastex\ contains commands that permit authors to specify alternate
+forms for fractions.
+\LaTeX\ will set fractions in displayed math as built-up fractions;
+however, it is sometimes desirable to use case fractions in
+displayed equations.
+In such instances, one should use \verb"\case"\
+rather than \verb"\frac". Note, however, that authors submitting
+manuscripts electronically to AAS journals
+should generally find it unnecessary to use any markup other than the
+standard \LaTeX\ \verb"\frac".
+
+\begin{center}
+\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.4}
+\begin{tabular}{@{}llc@{}}
+Built-up & \verb"\frac{1}{2}" & $\displaystyle\frac{1}{2}$ \\
+Case & \verb"\case{1}{2}" & $\case{1}{2}$ \\
+Shilled & \verb"1/2" & $1/2$ \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\subsubsection{Astronomical Symbols}
+
+As mentioned earlier, the \aastex\ package
+contains a collection of assorted macros
+for symbols and abbreviations specific to an astronomical context.
+These are commonly useful and also somewhat difficult for authors
+to produce themselves because fussy kerning is required.
+See the symbols pages provided with the package distribution.
+Most of these commands can be used in both running text and math. However,
+\verb"\lesssim"\ and \verb"\gtrsim"\ can only be used in math mode.
+
+\subsubsection{Hypertext Constructs}
+
+The \verb"\anchor"\ \label{cmd-anchor} command is a general-purpose
+hypertext link tag, associating \verb"<text>" in the manuscript with
+the specified resource (\verb"<href>").
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\anchor{<href>}{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+\verb"<href>"\ should be specified as a \emph{full} URI, including the
+\verb"scheme:"\ designator (|http:|, |ftp:|, etc.).
+
+The \verb"\url" command supports the special case where an author
+wishes to express a URL in the text.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\url{<text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+The \verb"\email"\ command is used to identify e-mail addresses
+anywhere in the manuscript.
+The text of the argument is the e-mail address.
+Please do \emph{not} prepend the \verb|mailto:| part.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\email{<address>}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+This command should be used to indicate authors' e-mail addresses
+in author lists at the beginning of manuscripts.
+
+\subsection{Concluding the File}
+
+The last command in the electronic manuscript file should be the
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+command, which must appear after all the material in the paper.
+This command directs the formatter to finish processing the manuscript.
+
+\section{Style Options} \label{styles}
+
+\subsection{Manuscript Style}
+
+The default style option is the |manuscript| style. This style will
+produce double-spaced pages printed in a single column at the width
+of the page.
+
+\subsection{Preprints}
+
+Two preprint styles are available.
+The \texttt{preprint} style is similar to the |manuscript| style,
+but it is single-spaced and fully justified.
+The \texttt{preprint2} style produces a two-column preprint.
+
+\subsubsection{Single-column Preprint}
+
+A single-column preprint format may be specified with the
+\texttt{preprint} style option.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[preprint]{aastex}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The size of the typeface used is under author control by way of
+\LaTeX's \m{nn}\texttt{pt} class options
+(where \m{nn} is 10, 11, or 12).
+Use of 10 point type is not recommended with the
+\texttt{preprint} style.
+
+\subsubsection{Two-column Preprint}
+
+The
+\texttt{preprint2} style
+has the principle function of providing two-column formatting.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[preprint2]{aastex}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+It is important to remember
+that text lines are considerably shorter when two columns are typeset
+side by side on a page. Long equations, wide tables and figures, and
+the like, may not typeset in this format without some adjustments.
+The expenditure of great effort to adapt copy and markup for
+two-column pages is counterproductive.
+Remember that the main
+goal of this package is to produce draft-, or referee-, format pages.
+It is the responsibility of the editors and publishers to
+produce publication-format papers for the journals.
+
+The \texttt{preprint2} style
+sets the article's front matter---the title, author, abstract,
+and keyword material---on a separate page at full text width.
+The body of the article is set in a two-column page grid,
+the appendices in a one-column page grid,
+and the bibliography in a two-column page grid.
+(This manual was prepared using the \texttt{preprint2} style.)
+
+The author may supply \LaTeX's \verb"\twocolumn"\ or |\onecolumn|
+commands whenever desired.
+Be aware, however, that using explicit column-switching commands can
+cause formatting problems.
+
+
+
+\subsection{The {\tt eqsecnum} Style}
+
+The \texttt{eqsecnum} style file can be used to modify the way equations
+are numbered.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[eqsecnum]{aastex}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+Normally, equations are numbered sequentially through the
+entire paper, starting over at ``(A1)'' if there is an appendix.
+If \texttt{eqsecnum} appears in the \texttt{documentclass} command,
+equation num\-bers will be sequential through each section and will be
+formatted ``({\it sec-eqn}),'' where ``{\it sec}'' is the current section number and
+``{\it eqn}'' is the number of the equation within that section.
+
+\subsection{The {\tt flushrt} Style }
+
+A \verb"flushrt"\ style option is available for authors that prefer to
+have their margins left and right justified.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[eqsecnum,flushrt]{aastex}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+Note the \texttt{preprint} and \texttt{preprint2} styles
+are already flush right by default.
+
+
+\section{Additional Documentation} \label{docs}
+
+The preceding explanation of the markup commands in the
+\aastex\ package has merit for defining syntax, but many
+authors will prefer to examine the sample papers that are
+included with the style files.
+The files of interest are described below.
+
+A comprehensive example employing nearly all of the capabilities
+of the package (in terms of markup as well as formatting)
+is in \verb"sample.tex".
+This file is annotated with comments that describe
+the purpose of most of the markup.
+\verb"sample.tex"\ includes three tables: two marked up using the
+\texttt{deluxetable} environment
+and another table using the \LaTeX\ \texttt{table}
+environment.
+
+In \verb"table.tex", a complex but short example of the
+\texttt{deluxetable} environment
+demonstrates some of the techniques
+that can be used to generate complex column headings and to align
+variable-width columns.
+Here the \LaTeX\ \verb"\multicolumn" command is used to span a heading
+over several columns. When \verb"\multicolumn" is used along with the
+\verb"\cutinhead" command, the \verb"\tablecolumns" command must be used to specify
+the number of columns in the table---otherwise the \verb"\cutinhead" command
+will not work properly.
+This table also makes use of the \verb"\phn" command to better align some of the
+columns.
+
+This user guide (\verb"aasguide.tex")
+is also marked up with the \aastex\ package,
+although it is not exemplary as a scientific paper.
+
+Many of the markup commands described in the preceding
+sections are standard \LaTeX\ commands. The reader who is
+unfamiliar with their syntax is referred to the \LaTeX\
+references works cited in the bibliography, in particular
+\citet{Kopka99} and \citet{Lamport}.
+
+Authors who wish to know the ins and outs of \TeX\ itself
+should read the \emph{\TeX book} \citep{Knuth}.
+This resource contains a good deal of information about
+typography in general. Many details of mathematical typography are
+discussed in \emph{Mathematics into Type} by \citet{Swanson}.
+
+\section{Acknowledgments}
+
+\aastex\ was designed and written by Chris Biemesderfer in 1988.
+Substantial revisions were made by Lee Brotzman and Pierre
+Landau when the package was updated to v4.0.
+\aastex\ was rewritten as a \LaTeXe\ class by Arthur Ogawa
+for the v5.0 release. It was updated to v5.2 by
+SR Nova Private Ltd.
+The documentation has benefited from revisions by
+Jeannette Barnes, Sara Zimmerman, and Greg Schwartz.
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{}
+
+\bibitem[Abt(1990)]{Abt90}
+ Abt, H. 1990, \apj, 357, 1 (editorial)
+
+\bibitem[Adobe(1999)]{PLRM}
+ Adobe Systems, Inc. 1999,
+ \anchor{http://www.adobe.com/prodindex/postscript/}
+ {PostScript Language Reference Manual} (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley)
+
+\bibitem[Daly(1998)]{Daly98}
+ Daly, P. 1998, \emph{Natural Sciences Citations and References}
+ (\texttt{natbib} package documentation)
+
+\bibitem[Goossens, Mittelbach, and Samarin(1994)]{Goossens94}
+ Goossens, M., Mittelbach, F., and Samarin, A. 1994,
+ \emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion} (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley)
+
+\bibitem[Hahn(1993)]{Hahn93}
+ Hahn, J. 1993, \emph{\LaTeX\ for Everyone}
+ (Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall)
+
+\bibitem[Knuth(1984)]{Knuth}
+ Knuth, D. 1984, \emph{The \TeX book} (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley).
+ \newblock Revised to cover \TeX3, 1991.
+
+\bibitem[Kopka and Daly(1999)]{Kopka99}
+ Kopka, H. and Daly, P. 1999, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX},
+ 3rd edition, (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley)
+
+\bibitem[Lamport(1994)]{Lamport}
+ Lamport, L. 1994, \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System\/},
+ 2nd edition, (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley)
+
+\bibitem[Swanson(1979)]{Swanson}
+ Swanson, E. 1979, \emph{Mathematics into Type}
+ (Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society)
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+\end{document}
+%
+%</guide>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Symbols module
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*symbols>
+\documentclass[preprint2]{aastex}
+
+\newcommand\aastex{AAS\TeX}%
+
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+\markright{\aastex, AMS math, and \LaTeX\ symbols}%
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{Additional \aastex\ symbols}
+\begin{center}
+\tabcolsep5pt
+\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{\hspace*{1em}}ll@{}}
+$\lesssim$ & \verb"\lesssim", \verb"\la" &
+$\gtrsim$ & \verb"\gtrsim", \verb"\ga" \\
+\micron & \verb"\micron" &
+\sbond & \verb"\sbond" \\
+\dbond & \verb"\dbond" &
+\tbond & \verb"\tbond" \\
+$\sun$ & \verb"\sun" &
+$\earth$ & \verb"\earth" \\
+\diameter & \verb"\diameter" &
+\\
+\arcdeg & \verb"\arcdeg", \verb"\degr" &
+\sq & \verb"\sq" \\
+\arcmin & \verb"\arcmin" &
+\arcsec & \verb"\arcsec" \\
+\fd & \verb"\fd" &
+\fh & \verb"\fh" \\
+\fm & \verb"\fm" &
+\fs & \verb"\fs" \\
+\fdg & \verb"\fdg" &
+\farcm & \verb"\farcm" \\
+\farcs & \verb"\farcs" &
+\fp & \verb"\fp" \\
+\onehalf & \verb"\onehalf" &
+\ubvr & \verb"\ubvr" \\
+\onethird & \verb"\onethird" &
+\ub & \verb"\ub" \\
+\twothirds & \verb"\twothirds" &
+\bv & \verb"\bv" \\
+\onequarter & \verb"\onequarter" &
+\vr & \verb"\vr" \\
+\threequarters & \verb"\threequarters" &
+\ur & \verb"\ur" \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{Text-mode accents}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{*{2}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}}ll}
+\`{o} & \verb"\`{o}" & \={o} & \verb"\={o}" & \t{oo} & \verb"\t{oo}" \\
+\'{o} & \verb"\'{o}" & \.{o} & \verb"\.{o}" & \c{o} & \verb"\c{o}" \\
+\^{o} & \verb"\^{o}" & \u{o} & \verb"\u{o}" & \d{o} & \verb"\d{o}" \\
+\"{o} & \verb#\"{o}# & \v{o} & \verb"\v{o}" & \b{o} & \verb"\b{o}" \\
+\~{o} & \verb"\~{o}" & \H{o} & \verb"\H{o}" & & \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{National symbols}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{*{2}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}}ll}
+\oe & \verb"\oe" & \aa & \verb"\aa" & \l & \verb"\l" \\
+\OE & \verb"\OE" & \AA & \verb"\AA" & \L & \verb"\L" \\
+\ae & \verb"\ae" & \o & \verb"\o" & \ss & \verb"\ss" \\
+\AE & \verb"\AE" & \O & \verb"\O" & & \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{Math-mode accents}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}ll}
+$\hat{a}$ & \verb"\hat{a}" & $\dot{a}$ & \verb"\dot{a}" \\
+$\check{a}$ & \verb"\check{a}" & $\ddot{a}$ & \verb"\ddot{a}" \\
+$\tilde{a}$ & \verb"\tilde{a}" & $\breve{a}$ & \verb"\breve{a}" \\
+$\acute{a}$ & \verb"\acute{a}" & $\bar{a}$ & \verb"\bar{a}" \\
+$\grave{a}$ & \verb"\grave{a}" & $\vec{a}$ & \verb"\vec{a}" \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{Greek and Hebrew letters (math mode)}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{3em}}cl}
+$\alpha$ & \verb"\alpha" & $\nu$ & \verb"\nu" \\
+$\beta$ & \verb"\beta" & $\xi$ & \verb"\xi" \\
+$\gamma$ & \verb"\gamma" & $o$ & \verb"o" \\
+$\delta$ & \verb"\delta" & $\pi$ & \verb"\pi" \\
+$\epsilon$ & \verb"\epsilon" & $\rho$ & \verb"\rho" \\
+$\zeta$ & \verb"\zeta" & $\sigma$ & \verb"\sigma" \\
+$\eta$ & \verb"\eta" & $\tau$ & \verb"\tau" \\
+$\theta$ & \verb"\theta" & $\upsilon$ & \verb"\upsilon" \\
+$\iota$ & \verb"\iota" & $\phi$ & \verb"\phi" \\
+$\kappa$ & \verb"\kappa" & $\chi$ & \verb"\chi" \\
+$\lambda$ & \verb"\lambda" & $\psi$ & \verb"\psi" \\
+$\mu$ & \verb"\mu" & $\omega$ & \verb"\omega" \\
+
+$\digamma$ & \verb"\digamma" &
+$\varkappa$ & \verb"\varkappa" \\
+$\varepsilon$ & \verb"\varepsilon" & $\varsigma$ & \verb"\varsigma" \\
+$\vartheta$ & \verb"\vartheta" & $\varphi$ & \verb"\varphi" \\
+$\varrho$ & \verb"\varrho" & & \\
+
+$\Gamma$ & \verb"\Gamma" & $\Sigma$ & \verb"\Sigma" \\
+$\Delta$ & \verb"\Delta" & $\Upsilon$ & \verb"\Upsilon" \\
+$\Theta$ & \verb"\Theta" & $\Phi$ & \verb"\Phi" \\
+$\Lambda$ & \verb"\Lambda" & $\Psi$ & \verb"\Psi" \\
+$\Xi$ & \verb"\Xi" & $\Omega$ & \verb"\Omega" \\
+$\Pi$ & \verb"\Pi" & & \\
+
+$\aleph$ & \verb"\aleph" &
+$\beth$ & \verb"\beth" \\
+$\gimel$ & \verb"\gimel" &
+$\daleth$ & \verb"\daleth" \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{Binary operators (math mode)}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{3em}}cl}
+$\pm$ & \verb"\pm" & $\cap$ & \verb"\cap" \\
+$\mp$ & \verb"\mp" & $\cup$ & \verb"\cup" \\
+$\setminus$ & \verb"\setminus" & $\uplus$ & \verb"\uplus" \\
+$\cdot$ & \verb"\cdot" & $\sqcap$ & \verb"\sqcap" \\
+$\times$ & \verb"\times" & $\sqcup$ & \verb"\sqcup" \\
+$\ast$ & \verb"\ast" & $\triangleleft$ & \verb"\triangleleft" \\
+$\star$ & \verb"\star" & $\triangleright$ & \verb"\triangleright" \\
+$\diamond$ & \verb"\diamond" & $\wr$ & \verb"\wr" \\
+$\circ$ & \verb"\circ" & $\bigcirc$ & \verb"\bigcirc" \\
+$\bullet$ & \verb"\bullet" & $\bigtriangleup$ & \verb"\bigtriangleup" \\
+$\div$ & \verb"\div" & $\bigtriangledown$ & \verb"\bigtriangledown" \\
+$\lhd$ & \verb"\lhd" & $\rhd$ & \verb"\rhd" \\%FIXME
+$\vee$ & \verb"\vee" & $\odot$ & \verb"\odot" \\
+$\wedge$ & \verb"\wedge" & $\dagger$ & \verb"\dagger" \\
+$\oplus$ & \verb"\oplus" & $\ddagger$ & \verb"\ddagger" \\
+$\ominus$ & \verb"\ominus" & $\amalg$ & \verb"\amalg" \\
+$\otimes$ & \verb"\otimes" & $\unlhd$ & \verb"\unlhd" \\
+$\oslash$ & \verb"\oslash" & $\unrhd$ & \verb"\unrhd"
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{AMS binary operators (math mode)}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{2em}}ll}
+$\dotplus$ & \verb"\dotplus" &
+$\ltimes$ & \verb"\ltimes" \\
+$\smallsetminus$ & \verb"\smallsetminus" &
+$\rtimes$ & \verb"\rtimes" \\
+$\Cap$ & \verb"\Cap", \verb"\doublecap" &
+$\leftthreetimes$ & \verb"\leftthreetimes" \\
+$\Cup$ & \verb"\Cup", \verb"\doublecup" &
+$\rightthreetimes$ & \verb"\rightthreetimes" \\
+$\barwedge$ & \verb"\barwedge" &
+$\curlywedge$ & \verb"\curlywedge" \\
+$\veebar$ & \verb"\veebar" &
+$\curlyvee$ & \verb"\curlyvee" \\
+$\doublebarwedge$ & \verb"\doublebarwedge" &
+\\
+$\boxminus$ & \verb"\boxminus" &
+$\circleddash$ & \verb"\circleddash" \\
+$\boxtimes$ & \verb"\boxtimes" &
+$\circledast$ & \verb"\circledast" \\
+$\boxdot$ & \verb"\boxdot" &
+$\circledcirc$ & \verb"\circledcirc" \\
+$\boxplus$ & \verb"\boxplus" &
+$\centerdot$ & \verb"\centerdot" \\
+$\divideontimes$ & \verb"\divideontimes" &
+$\intercal$ & \verb"\intercal" \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{Miscellaneous symbols}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}ll}
+\dag & \verb"\dag" & \S & \verb"\S" \\
+\copyright & \verb"\copyright"& \ddag & \verb"\ddag"\\
+ \P & \verb"\P" & \pounds & \verb"\pounds" \\
+\# & \verb"\#" & \$ & \verb"\$"\\
+ \% & \verb"\%" & \& & \verb"\&" \\
+ \_ & \verb"\_" & \{ & \verb"\{" \\
+ \} & \verb"\}" & & \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{Miscellaneous symbols (math mode)}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{3em}}cl}
+$\aleph$ & \verb"\aleph" & $\prime$ & \verb"\prime" \\
+$\hbar$ & \verb"\hbar" & $\emptyset$ & \verb"\emptyset" \\
+$\imath$ & \verb"\imath" & $\nabla$ & \verb"\nabla" \\
+$\jmath$ & \verb"\jmath" & $\surd$ & \verb"\surd" \\
+$\ell$ & \verb"\ell" & $\top$ & \verb"\top" \\
+$\wp$ & \verb"\wp" & $\bot$ & \verb"\bot" \\
+$\Re$ & \verb"\Re" & $\|$ & \verb"\|" \\
+$\Im$ & \verb"\Im" & $\angle$ & \verb"\angle" \\
+$\partial$ & \verb"\partial" & $\triangle$ & \verb"\triangle" \\
+$\infty$ & \verb"\infty" & $\backslash$ & \verb"\backslash" \\
+$\Box$ & \verb"\Box" & $\Diamond$ & \verb"\Diamond" \\
+$\forall$ & \verb"\forall" & $\sharp$ & \verb"\sharp" \\
+$\exists$ & \verb"\exists" & $\clubsuit$ & \verb"\clubsuit" \\
+$\neg$ & \verb"\neg" & $\diamondsuit$ & \verb"\diamondsuit" \\
+$\flat$ & \verb"\flat" & $\heartsuit$ & \verb"\heartsuit" \\
+$\natural$ & \verb"\natural" & $\spadesuit$ & \verb"\spadesuit" \\
+$\mho$ & \verb"\mho" & &
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{AMS miscellaneous symbols (math mode)}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{2em}}ll}
+$\hbar$ & \verb"\hbar" &
+$\backprime$ & \verb"\backprime" \\
+$\hslash$ & \verb"\hslash" &
+$\varnothing$ & \verb"\varnothing" \\
+$\vartriangle$ & \verb"\vartriangle" &
+$\blacktriangle$ & \verb"\blacktriangle" \\
+$\triangledown$ & \verb"\triangledown" &
+$\blacktriangledown$ & \verb"\blacktriangledown" \\
+$\square$ & \verb"\square" &
+$\blacksquare$ & \verb"\blacksquare" \\
+$\lozenge$ & \verb"\lozenge" &
+$\blacklozenge$ & \verb"\blacklozenge" \\
+$\circledS$ & \verb"\circledS" &
+$\bigstar$ & \verb"\bigstar" \\
+$\angle$ & \verb"\angle" &
+$\sphericalangle$ & \verb"\sphericalangle" \\
+$\measuredangle$ & \verb"\measuredangle" &
+\\
+$\nexists$ & \verb"\nexists" &
+$\complement$ & \verb"\complement" \\
+$\mho$ & \verb"\mho" &
+$\eth$ & \verb"\eth" \\
+$\Finv$ & \verb"\Finv" &
+$\diagup$ & \verb"\diagup" \\
+$\Game$ & \verb"\Game" &
+$\diagdown$ & \verb"\diagdown" \\
+$\Bbbk$ & \verb"\Bbbk" &
+$\restriction$ & \verb"\restriction" \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\tabcolsep1pt
+\caption{Arrows (math mode)}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{clcl}
+$\leftarrow$ & \verb"\leftarrow" &
+$\longleftarrow$ & \verb"\longleftarrow" \\
+$\Leftarrow$ & \verb"\Leftarrow" &
+$\Longleftarrow$ & \verb"\Longleftarrow" \\
+$\rightarrow$ & \verb"\rightarrow" &
+$\longrightarrow$ & \verb"\longrightarrow" \\
+$\Rightarrow$ & \verb"\Rightarrow" &
+$\Longrightarrow$ & \verb"\Longrightarrow" \\
+$\leftrightarrow$ & \verb"\leftrightarrow" &
+$\longleftrightarrow$ & \verb"\longleftrightarrow" \\
+$\Leftrightarrow$ & \verb"\Leftrightarrow" &
+$\Longleftrightarrow$ & \verb"\Longleftrightarrow" \\
+$\mapsto$ & \verb"\mapsto" &
+$\longmapsto$ & \verb"\longmapsto" \\
+$\hookleftarrow$ & \verb"\hookleftarrow" &
+$\hookrightarrow$ & \verb"\hookrightarrow" \\
+$\leftharpoonup$ & \verb"\leftharpoonup" &
+$\rightharpoonup$ & \verb"\rightharpoonup" \\
+$\leftharpoondown$ & \verb"\leftharpoondown" &
+$\rightharpoondown$ & \verb"\rightharpoondown" \\
+$\rightleftharpoons$ & \verb"\rightleftharpoons" &
+$\leadsto$ & \verb"\leadsto" \\
+$\uparrow$ & \verb"\uparrow" &
+$\Updownarrow$ & \verb"\Updownarrow" \\
+$\Uparrow$ & \verb"\Uparrow" &
+$\nearrow$ & \verb"\nearrow" \\
+$\downarrow$ & \verb"\downarrow" &
+$\searrow$ & \verb"\searrow" \\
+$\Downarrow$ & \verb"\Downarrow" &
+$\swarrow$ & \verb"\swarrow" \\
+$\updownarrow$ & \verb"\updownarrow" &
+$\nwarrow$ & \verb"\nwarrow"
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\tabcolsep1pt
+\caption{AMS arrows (math mode)}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{llll}
+$\dashleftarrow$ & \verb"\dashleftarrow" &
+$\dashrightarrow$ & \verb"\dashrightarrow" \\
+$\leftleftarrows$ & \verb"\leftleftarrows" &
+$\rightrightarrows$ & \verb"\rightrightarrows" \\
+$\leftrightarrows$ & \verb"\leftrightarrows" &
+$\rightleftarrows$ & \verb"\rightleftarrows" \\
+$\Lleftarrow$ & \verb"\Lleftarrow" &
+$\Rrightarrow$ & \verb"\Rrightarrow" \\
+$\twoheadleftarrow$ & \verb"\twoheadleftarrow" &
+$\twoheadrightarrow$ & \verb"\twoheadrightarrow" \\
+$\leftarrowtail$ & \verb"\leftarrowtail" &
+$\rightarrowtail$ & \verb"\rightarrowtail" \\
+$\looparrowleft$ & \verb"\looparrowleft" &
+$\looparrowright$ & \verb"\looparrowright" \\
+$\leftrightharpoons$ & \verb"\leftrightharpoons" &
+$\rightleftharpoons$ & \verb"\rightleftharpoons" \\
+$\curvearrowleft$ & \verb"\curvearrowleft" &
+$\curvearrowright$ & \verb"\curvearrowright" \\
+$\circlearrowleft$ & \verb"\circlearrowleft" &
+$\circlearrowright$ & \verb"\circlearrowright" \\
+$\Lsh$ & \verb"\Lsh" &
+$\Rsh$ & \verb"\Rsh" \\
+$\upuparrows$ & \verb"\upuparrows" &
+$\downdownarrows$ & \verb"\downdownarrows" \\
+$\upharpoonleft$ & \verb"\upharpoonleft" &
+$\upharpoonright$ & \verb"\upharpoonright" \\
+$\downharpoonleft$ & \verb"\downharpoonleft" &
+$\downharpoonright$ & \verb"\downharpoonright" \\
+$\multimap$ & \verb"\multimap" &
+$\rightsquigarrow$ & \verb"\rightsquigarrow" \\
+$\leftrightsquigarrow$ & \verb"\leftrightsquigarrow" &
+\\
+$\nleftarrow$ & \verb"\nleftarrow" &
+$\nrightarrow$ & \verb"\nrightarrow" \\
+$\nLeftarrow$ & \verb"\nLeftarrow" &
+$\nRightarrow$ & \verb"\nRightarrow" \\
+$\nleftrightarrow$ & \verb"\nleftrightarrow" &
+$\nLeftrightarrow$ & \verb"\nLeftrightarrow" \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{Relations (math mode)}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{4em}}cl}
+
+$\leq$ & \verb"\leq" & $\geq$ & \verb"\geq" \\
+$\prec$ & \verb"\prec" & $\succ$ & \verb"\succ" \\
+$\preceq$ & \verb"\preceq" & $\succeq$ & \verb"\succeq" \\
+$\ll$ & \verb"\ll" & $\gg$ & \verb"\gg" \\
+$\subset$ & \verb"\subset" & $\supset$ & \verb"\supset" \\
+$\subseteq$ & \verb"\subseteq" & $\supseteq$ & \verb"\supseteq" \\
+$\sqsubset$ & \verb"\sqsubset" & $\sqsupset$ & \verb"\sqsupset" \\
+$\sqsubseteq$ & \verb"\sqsubseteq" & $\sqsupseteq$ & \verb"\sqsupseteq" \\
+$\in$ & \verb"\in" & $\ni$ & \verb"\ni" \\
+$\vdash$ & \verb"\vdash" & $\dashv$ & \verb"\dashv" \\
+$\smile$ & \verb"\smile" & $\mid$ & \verb"\mid" \\
+$\frown$ & \verb"\frown" & $\parallel$ & \verb"\parallel" \\
+$\neq$ & \verb"\neq" & $\perp$ & \verb"\perp" \\
+$\equiv$ & \verb"\equiv" & $\cong$ & \verb"\cong" \\
+$\sim$ & \verb"\sim" & $\bowtie$ & \verb"\bowtie" \\
+$\simeq$ & \verb"\simeq" & $\propto$ & \verb"\propto" \\
+$\asymp$ & \verb"\asymp" & $\models$ & \verb"\models" \\
+$\approx$ & \verb"\approx" & $\doteq$ & \verb"\doteq" \\
+ & & $\Join$ & \verb"\Join"
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\tabcolsep1pt
+\caption{AMS binary relations (math mode)}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{1em}}ll}
+$\leqq$ & \verb"\leqq" &
+$\geqq$ & \verb"\geqq" \\
+$\leqslant$ & \verb"\leqslant" &
+$\geqslant$ & \verb"\geqslant" \\
+$\eqslantless$ & \verb"\eqslantless" &
+$\eqslantgtr$ & \verb"\eqslantgtr" \\
+$\lesssim$ & \verb"\lesssim" &
+$\gtrsim$ & \verb"\gtrsim" \\
+$\lessapprox$ & \verb"\lessapprox" &
+$\gtrapprox$ & \verb"\gtrapprox" \\
+$\approxeq$ & \verb"\approxeq" &
+$\eqsim$ & \verb"\eqsim" \\
+$\lessdot$ & \verb"\lessdot" &
+$\gtrdot$ & \verb"\gtrdot" \\
+$\lll$ & \verb"\lll", \verb"\llless" &
+$\ggg$ & \verb"\ggg", \verb"\gggtr" \\
+$\lessgtr$ & \verb"\lessgtr" &
+$\gtrless$ & \verb"\gtrless" \\
+$\lesseqgtr$ & \verb"\lesseqgtr" &
+$\gtreqless$ & \verb"\gtreqless" \\
+$\lesseqqgtr$ & \verb"\lesseqqgtr" &
+$\gtreqqless$ & \verb"\gtreqqless" \\
+$\doteqdot$ & \verb"\doteqdot", \verb"\Doteq" &
+$\eqcirc$ & \verb"\eqcirc" \\
+$\risingdotseq$ & \verb"\risingdotseq" &
+$\circeq$ & \verb"\circeq" \\
+$\fallingdotseq$ & \verb"\fallingdotseq" &
+$\triangleq$ & \verb"\triangleq" \\
+$\backsim$ & \verb"\backsim" &
+$\thicksim$ & \verb"\thicksim" \\
+$\backsimeq$ & \verb"\backsimeq" &
+$\thickapprox$ & \verb"\thickapprox" \\
+$\subseteqq$ & \verb"\subseteqq" &
+$\supseteqq$ & \verb"\supseteqq" \\
+$\Subset$ & \verb"\Subset" &
+$\Supset$ & \verb"\Supset" \\
+$\sqsubset$ & \verb"\sqsubset" &
+$\sqsupset$ & \verb"\sqsupset" \\
+$\preccurlyeq$ & \verb"\preccurlyeq" &
+$\succcurlyeq$ & \verb"\succcurlyeq" \\
+$\curlyeqprec$ & \verb"\curlyeqprec" &
+$\curlyeqsucc$ & \verb"\curlyeqsucc" \\
+$\precsim$ & \verb"\precsim" &
+$\succsim$ & \verb"\succsim" \\
+$\precapprox$ & \verb"\precapprox" &
+$\succapprox$ & \verb"\succapprox" \\
+$\vartriangleleft$ & \verb"\vartriangleleft" &
+$\vartriangleright$ & \verb"\vartriangleright" \\
+$\trianglelefteq$ & \verb"\trianglelefteq" &
+$\trianglerighteq$ & \verb"\trianglerighteq" \\
+$\vDash$ & \verb"\vDash" &
+$\Vdash$ & \verb"\Vdash" \\
+$\Vvdash$ & \verb"\Vvdash" &
+\\
+$\smallsmile$ & \verb"\smallsmile" &
+$\shortmid$ & \verb"\shortmid" \\
+$\smallfrown$ & \verb"\smallfrown" &
+$\shortparallel$ & \verb"\shortparallel" \\
+$\bumpeq$ & \verb"\bumpeq" &
+$\between$ & \verb"\between" \\
+$\Bumpeq$ & \verb"\Bumpeq" &
+$\pitchfork$ & \verb"\pitchfork" \\
+$\varpropto$ & \verb"\varpropto" &
+$\backepsilon$ & \verb"\backepsilon" \\
+$\blacktriangleleft$ & \verb"\blacktriangleleft" &
+$\blacktriangleright$ & \verb"\blacktriangleright" \\
+$\therefore$ & \verb"\therefore" &
+$\because$ & \verb"\because" \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{AMS negated relations (math mode)}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{2em}}ll}
+$\nless$ & \verb"\nless" &
+$\ngtr$ & \verb"\ngtr" \\
+$\nleq$ & \verb"\nleq" &
+$\ngeq$ & \verb"\ngeq" \\
+$\nleqslant$ & \verb"\nleqslant" &
+$\ngeqslant$ & \verb"\ngeqslant" \\
+$\nleqq$ & \verb"\nleqq" &
+$\ngeqq$ & \verb"\ngeqq" \\
+$\lneq$ & \verb"\lneq" &
+$\gneq$ & \verb"\gneq" \\
+$\lneqq$ & \verb"\lneqq" &
+$\gneqq$ & \verb"\gneqq" \\
+$\lvertneqq$ & \verb"\lvertneqq" &
+$\gvertneqq$ & \verb"\gvertneqq" \\
+$\lnsim$ & \verb"\lnsim" &
+$\gnsim$ & \verb"\gnsim" \\
+$\lnapprox$ & \verb"\lnapprox" &
+$\gnapprox$ & \verb"\gnapprox" \\
+$\nprec$ & \verb"\nprec" &
+$\nsucc$ & \verb"\nsucc" \\
+$\npreceq$ & \verb"\npreceq" &
+$\nsucceq$ & \verb"\nsucceq" \\
+$\precneqq$ & \verb"\precneqq" &
+$\succneqq$ & \verb"\succneqq" \\
+$\precnsim$ & \verb"\precnsim" &
+$\succnsim$ & \verb"\succnsim" \\
+$\precnapprox$ & \verb"\precnapprox" &
+$\succnapprox$ & \verb"\succnapprox" \\
+$\nsim$ & \verb"\nsim" &
+$\ncong$ & \verb"\ncong" \\
+$\nshortmid$ & \verb"\nshortmid" &
+$\nshortparallel$ & \verb"\nshortparallel" \\
+$\nmid$ & \verb"\nmid" &
+$\nparallel$ & \verb"\nparallel" \\
+$\nvdash$ & \verb"\nvdash" &
+$\nvDash$ & \verb"\nvDash" \\
+$\nVdash$ & \verb"\nVdash" &
+$\nVDash$ & \verb"\nVDash" \\
+$\ntriangleleft$ & \verb"\ntriangleleft" &
+$\ntriangleright$ & \verb"\ntriangleright" \\
+$\ntrianglelefteq$ & \verb"\ntrianglelefteq" &
+$\ntrianglerighteq$ & \verb"\ntrianglerighteq" \\
+$\nsubseteq$ & \verb"\nsubseteq" &
+$\nsupseteq$ & \verb"\nsupseteq" \\
+$\nsubseteqq$ & \verb"\nsubseteqq" &
+$\nsupseteqq$ & \verb"\nsupseteqq" \\
+$\subsetneq$ & \verb"\subsetneq" &
+$\supsetneq$ & \verb"\supsetneq" \\
+$\varsubsetneq$ & \verb"\varsubsetneq" &
+$\varsupsetneq$ & \verb"\varsupsetneq" \\
+$\subsetneqq$ & \verb"\subsetneqq" &
+$\supsetneqq$ & \verb"\supsetneqq" \\
+$\varsubsetneqq$ & \verb"\varsubsetneqq" &
+$\varsupsetneqq$ & \verb"\varsupsetneqq" \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{Variable-sized symbols (math mode)}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{displaymath}
+\begin{array}{ccl@{\hspace{2em}}ccl}
+\sum & \displaystyle \sum & \hbox{\verb"\sum"} &
+\bigcap & \displaystyle \bigcap & \hbox{\verb"\bigcap"} \\
+\prod & \displaystyle \prod & \hbox{\verb"\prod"} &
+\bigcup & \displaystyle \bigcup & \hbox{\verb"\bigcup"} \\
+\coprod & \displaystyle \coprod & \hbox{\verb"\coprod"} &
+\bigsqcup & \displaystyle \bigsqcup & \hbox{\verb"\bigsqcup"} \\
+\int & \displaystyle \int & \hbox{\verb"\int"} &
+\bigvee & \displaystyle \bigvee & \hbox{\verb"\bigvee"} \\
+\oint & \displaystyle \oint & \hbox{\verb"\oint"} &
+\bigwedge & \displaystyle \bigwedge & \hbox{\verb"\bigwedge"} \\
+\bigodot & \displaystyle \bigodot & \hbox{\verb"\bigodot"} &
+\bigotimes & \displaystyle \bigotimes & \hbox{\verb"\bigotimes"} \\
+\bigoplus & \displaystyle \bigoplus & \hbox{\verb"\bigoplus"} &
+\biguplus & \displaystyle \biguplus & \hbox{\verb"\biguplus"} \\
+\end{array}
+\end{displaymath}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{Delimiters (math mode)}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{lc@{\hspace{2em}}lc}
+$($ & \verb"(" & $)$ & \verb")" \\
+$[$ & \verb"[" & $]$ & \verb"]" \\
+$\{$ & \verb"\{" & $\}$ & \verb"\}" \\
+$\lfloor$ & \verb"\lfloor" & $\rfloor$ & \verb"\rfloor" \\
+$\lceil$ & \verb"\lceil" & $\rceil$ & \verb"\rceil" \\
+$\langle$ & \verb"\langle" & $\rangle$ & \verb"\rangle" \\
+$/$ & \verb"/" & $\backslash$ & \verb"\backslash" \\
+$\vert$ & \verb"\vert" & $\Vert$ & \verb"\Vert" \\
+$\uparrow$ & \verb"\uparrow" & $\Uparrow$ & \verb"\Uparrow" \\
+$\downarrow$ & \verb"\downarrow" & $\Downarrow$ & \verb"\Downarrow" \\
+$\updownarrow$ & \verb"\updownarrow" &
+$\Updownarrow$ & \verb"\Updownarrow" \\
+$\ulcorner$ & \verb"\ulcorner" &
+$\urcorner$ & \verb"\urcorner" \\
+$\llcorner$ & \verb"\llcorner" &
+$\lrcorner$ & \verb"\lrcorner" \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{Function names (math mode)}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \arccos \csc \ker \min
+ \arcsin \deg \lg \Pr
+ \arctan \det \lim \sec
+ \arg \dim \liminf \sin
+ \cos \exp \limsup \sinh
+ \cosh \gcd \ln \sup
+ \cot \hom \log \tan
+ \coth \inf \max \tanh
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{table}
+\end{document}
+%</symbols>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Sample document modules
+%
+% Here begins the module `sample`.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*sample>
+%%
+%% Beginning of file 'sample.tex'
+%%
+%% Modified 2005 June 21
+%%
+%% This is a sample manuscript marked up using the
+%% AASTeX v5.x LaTeX 2e macros.
+
+%% The first piece of markup in an AASTeX v5.x document
+%% is the \documentclass command. LaTeX will ignore
+%% any data that comes before this command.
+
+%% The command below calls the preprint style
+%% which will produce a one-column, single-spaced document.
+%% Examples of commands for other substyles follow. Use
+%% whichever is most appropriate for your purposes.
+%%
+%%\documentclass[12pt,preprint]{aastex}
+
+%% manuscript produces a one-column, double-spaced document:
+
+\documentclass[manuscript]{aastex}
+
+%% preprint2 produces a double-column, single-spaced document:
+
+%% \documentclass[preprint2]{aastex}
+
+%% Sometimes a paper's abstract is too long to fit on the
+%% title page in preprint2 mode. When that is the case,
+%% use the longabstract style option.
+
+%% \documentclass[preprint2,longabstract]{aastex}
+
+%% If you want to create your own macros, you can do so
+%% using \newcommand. Your macros should appear before
+%% the \begin{document} command.
+%%
+%% If you are submitting to a journal that translates manuscripts
+%% into SGML, you need to follow certain guidelines when preparing
+%% your macros. See the AASTeX v5.x Author Guide
+%% for information.
+
+\newcommand{\vdag}{(v)^\dagger}
+\newcommand{\myemail}{skywalker@galaxy.far.far.away}
+
+%% You can insert a short comment on the title page using the command below.
+
+\slugcomment{Not to appear in Nonlearned J., 45.}
+
+%% If you wish, you may supply running head information, although
+%% this information may be modified by the editorial offices.
+%% The left head contains a list of authors,
+%% usually a maximum of three (otherwise use et al.). The right
+%% head is a modified title of up to roughly 44 characters.
+%% Running heads will not print in the manuscript style.
+
+\shorttitle{Collapsed Cores in Globular Clusters}
+\shortauthors{Djorgovski et al.}
+
+%% This is the end of the preamble. Indicate the beginning of the
+%% paper itself with \begin{document}.
+
+\begin{document}
+
+%% LaTeX will automatically break titles if they run longer than
+%% one line. However, you may use \\ to force a line break if
+%% you desire.
+
+\title{Collapsed Cores in Globular Clusters, \\
+ Gauge-Boson Couplings, and AAS\TeX\ Examples}
+
+%% Use \author, \affil, and the \and command to format
+%% author and affiliation information.
+%% Note that \email has replaced the old \authoremail command
+%% from AASTeX v4.0. You can use \email to mark an email address
+%% anywhere in the paper, not just in the front matter.
+%% As in the title, use \\ to force line breaks.
+
+\author{S. Djorgovski\altaffilmark{1,2,3} and Ivan R. King\altaffilmark{1}}
+\affil{Astronomy Department, University of California,
+ Berkeley, CA 94720}
+
+\author{C. D. Biemesderfer\altaffilmark{4,5}}
+\affil{National Optical Astronomy Observatories, Tucson, AZ 85719}
+\email{aastex-help@aas.org}
+
+\and
+
+\author{R. J. Hanisch\altaffilmark{5}}
+\affil{Space Telescope Science Institute, Baltimore, MD 21218}
+
+%% Notice that each of these authors has alternate affiliations, which
+%% are identified by the \altaffilmark after each name. Specify alternate
+%% affiliation information with \altaffiltext, with one command per each
+%% affiliation.
+
+\altaffiltext{1}{Visiting Astronomer, Cerro Tololo Inter-American Observatory.
+CTIO is operated by AURA, Inc.\ under contract to the National Science
+Foundation.}
+\altaffiltext{2}{Society of Fellows, Harvard University.}
+\altaffiltext{3}{present address: Center for Astrophysics,
+ 60 Garden Street, Cambridge, MA 02138}
+\altaffiltext{4}{Visiting Programmer, Space Telescope Science Institute}
+\altaffiltext{5}{Patron, Alonso's Bar and Grill}
+
+%% Mark off your abstract in the ``abstract'' environment. In the manuscript
+%% style, abstract will output a Received/Accepted line after the
+%% title and affiliation information. No date will appear since the author
+%% does not have this information. The dates will be filled in by the
+%% editorial office after submission.
+
+\begin{abstract}
+This is a preliminary report on surface photometry of the major
+fraction of known globular clusters, to see which of them show the signs
+of a collapsed core.
+We also explore some diversionary mathematics and recreational tables.
+\end{abstract}
+
+%% Keywords should appear after the \end{abstract} command. The uncommented
+%% example has been keyed in ApJ style. See the instructions to authors
+%% for the journal to which you are submitting your paper to determine
+%% what keyword punctuation is appropriate.
+
+\keywords{globular clusters: general --- globular clusters: individual(NGC 6397,
+NGC 6624, NGC 7078, Terzan 8}
+
+%% From the front matter, we move on to the body of the paper.
+%% In the first two sections, notice the use of the natbib \citep
+%% and \citet commands to identify citations. The citations are
+%% tied to the reference list via symbolic KEYs. The KEY corresponds
+%% to the KEY in the \bibitem in the reference list below. We have
+%% chosen the first three characters of the first author's name plus
+%% the last two numeral of the year of publication as our KEY for
+%% each reference.
+
+
+%% Authors who wish to have the most important objects in their paper
+%% linked in the electronic edition to a data center may do so by tagging
+%% their objects with \objectname{} or \object{}. Each macro takes the
+%% object name as its required argument. The optional, square-bracket
+%% argument should be used in cases where the data center identification
+%% differs from what is to be printed in the paper. The text appearing
+%% in curly braces is what will appear in print in the published paper.
+%% If the object name is recognized by the data centers, it will be linked
+%% in the electronic edition to the object data available at the data centers
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+A focal problem today in the dynamics of globular clusters is core collapse.
+It has been predicted by theory for decades \citep{hen61,lyn68,spi85}, but
+observation has been less alert to the phenomenon. For many years the
+central brightness peak in M15 \citep{kin75,new78} seemed a unique anomaly.
+Then \citet{aur82} suggested a central peak in \object{NGC 6397}, and a
+limited photographic survey of ours \citep[Paper I]{djo84} found three more
+cases, \objectname{NGC 6624}, \objectname[M 15]{NGC 7078}, and
+\object[Cl 1938-341]{Terzan 8}), whose sharp center had often been
+remarked on \citep{can78}.
+
+\section{Observations}
+
+%% In a manner similar to \objectname authors can provide links to dataset
+%% hosted at participating data centers via the \dataset{} command. The
+%% second curly bracket argument is printed in the text while the first
+%% parentheses argument serves as the valid data set identifier. Large
+%% lists of data set are best provided in a table (see Table 3 for an example).
+%% Valid data set identifiers should be obtained from the data center that
+%% is currently hosting the data.
+
+All our observations were short direct exposures with CCD's. We also have
+ a random {\it Chandra} data set \dataset{ADS/Sa.ASCA\#X/86008020} and a
+neat \dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#Y0Q70101T]{HST FOS spectrum} that readers can access
+via the links in the electronic edition. Unfortunately this has nothing
+whatsoever to do with this research. At Lick Observatory we used a TI 500$\times$500
+chip and a GEC 575$\times$385, on the 1-m Nickel reflector. The only
+filter available at Lick was red. At CTIO we used a GEC 575$\times$385, with
+$B, V,$ and $R$ filters, and an RCA 512$\times$320, with $U, B, V, R,$ and $I$
+filters, on the 1.5-m reflector. In the CTIO observations we tried to
+concentrate on the shortest practicable wavelengths; but faintness, reddening,
+and poor short-wavelength sensitivity often kept us from observing in $U$ or
+even in $B$. All four cameras had scales of the order of 0.4 arcsec/pixel, and
+our field sizes were around 3 arcmin.
+
+The CCD images are unfortunately not always suitable, for very poor
+clusters or for clusters with large cores. Since the latter are easily
+studied by other means, we augmented our own CCD profiles by collecting
+from the literature a number of star-count profiles
+\citep{kin68,pet76,har84,ort85}, as well as photoelectric profiles
+\citep{kin66,kin75} and electronographic profiles \citep{kro84}.
+In a few cases we judged normality by eye estimates on one of the Sky
+Surveys.
+
+%% In this section, we use the \subsection command to set off
+%% a subsection. \footnote is used to insert a footnote to the text.
+
+%% Observe the use of the LaTeX \label
+%% command after the \subsection to give a symbolic KEY to the
+%% subsection for cross-referencing in a \ref command.
+%% You can use LaTeX's \ref and \label commands to keep track of
+%% cross-references to sections, equations, tables, and figures.
+%% That way, if you change the order of any elements, LaTeX will
+%% automatically renumber them.
+
+%% This section also includes several of the displayed math environments
+%% mentioned in the Author Guide.
+
+\section{Helicity Amplitudes}
+
+It has been realized that helicity amplitudes provide a convenient means
+for Feynman diagram\footnote{Footnotes can be inserted like this.}
+evaluations. These amplitude-level techniques
+are particularly convenient for calculations involving many Feynman
+diagrams, where the usual trace techniques for the amplitude
+squared becomes unwieldy. Our calculations use the helicity techniques
+developed by other authors \cite[]{hag86}; we briefly summarize below.
+
+\subsection{Formalism} \label{bozomath}
+
+%% The equation environment wil produce a numbered display equation.
+
+A tree-level amplitude in $e^+e^-$ collisions can be expressed in
+terms of fermion strings of the form
+\begin{equation}
+\bar v(p_2,\sigma_2)P_{-\tau}\hat a_1\hat a_2\cdots
+\hat a_nu(p_1,\sigma_1) ,
+\end{equation}
+where $p$ and $\sigma$ label the initial $e^{\pm}$ four-momenta
+and helicities $(\sigma = \pm 1)$, $\hat a_i=a^\mu_i\gamma_\nu$
+and $P_\tau=\frac{1}{2}(1+\tau\gamma_5)$ is a chirality projection
+operator $(\tau = \pm1)$. The $a^\mu_i$ may be formed from particle
+four-momenta, gauge-boson polarization vectors or fermion strings with
+an uncontracted Lorentz index associated with final-state fermions.
+
+%% The \notetoeditor{TEXT} command allows the author to communicate
+%% information to the copy editor. This information will appear as a
+%% footnote on the printed copy for the manuscript style file. Nothing will
+%% appear on the printed copy if the preprint or
+%% preprint2 style files are used.
+
+%% The eqnarray environment produces multi-line display math. The end of
+%% each line is marked with a \\. Lines will be numbered unless the \\
+%% is preceded by a \nonumber command.
+%% Alignment points are marked by ampersands (&). There should be two
+%% ampersands (&) per line.
+
+In the chiral \notetoeditor{Figures 1 and 2 should appear side-by-side in
+print} representation the $\gamma$ matrices are expressed
+in terms of $2\times 2$ Pauli matrices $\sigma$ and the unit matrix 1 as
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\gamma^\mu & = &
+ \left(
+\begin{array}{cc}
+0 & \sigma^\mu_+ \\
+\sigma^\mu_- & 0
+\end{array} \right) ,
+ \gamma^5= \left(
+\begin{array}{cc}
+-1 & 0\\
+0 & 1
+\end{array} \right) , \nonumber \\
+\sigma^\mu_{\pm} & = & ({\bf 1} ,\pm \sigma) , \nonumber
+\end{eqnarray}
+giving
+\begin{equation}
+\hat a= \left(
+\begin{array}{cc}
+0 & (\hat a)_+\\
+(\hat a)_- & 0
+\end{array}\right), (\hat a)_\pm=a_\mu\sigma^\mu_\pm ,
+\end{equation}
+The spinors are expressed in terms of two-component Weyl spinors as
+\begin{equation}
+u=\left(
+\begin{array}{c}
+(u)_-\\
+(u)_+
+\end{array}\right), v={\bf (}\vdag_+{\bf ,} \vdag_-{\bf )} .
+\end{equation}
+
+%% Putting eqnarrays or equations inside the mathletters environment groups
+%% the enclosed equations by letter. For instance, the eqnarray below, instead
+%% of being numbered, say, (4) and (5), would be numbered (4a) and (4b).
+%% LaTeX the paper and look at the output to see the results.
+
+The Weyl spinors are given in terms of helicity eigenstates
+$\chi_\lambda(p)$ with $\lambda=\pm1$ by
+\begin{mathletters}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+u(p,\lambda)_\pm & = & (E\pm\lambda|{\bf p}|)^{1/2}\chi_\lambda(p) , \\
+v(p,\lambda)_\pm & = & \pm\lambda(E\mp\lambda|{\bf p}|)^{1/2}\chi
+_{-\lambda}(p)
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{mathletters}
+
+%% This section contains more display math examples, including unnumbered
+%% equations (displaymath environment). The last paragraph includes some
+%% examples of in-line math featuring a couple of the AASTeX symbol macros.
+
+\section{Floating material and so forth}
+
+%% The displaymath environment will produce the same sort of equation as
+%% the equation environment, except that the equation will not be numbered
+%% by LaTeX.
+
+Consider a task that computes profile parameters for a modified
+Lorentzian of the form
+\begin{equation}
+I = \frac{1}{1 + d_{1}^{P (1 + d_{2} )}}
+\end{equation}
+where
+\begin{displaymath}
+d_{1} = \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{R_{maj}}
+\end{array} \right) ^{2} +
+\left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{y_{1}}{R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} }
+\end{displaymath}
+\begin{displaymath}
+d_{2} = \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{P R_{maj}}
+\end{array} \right) ^{2} +
+\left( \begin{array}{c} \case{y_{1}}{P R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} }
+\end{displaymath}
+\begin{displaymath}
+x_{1} = (x - x_{0}) \cos \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \sin \Theta
+\end{displaymath}
+\begin{displaymath}
+y_{1} = -(x - x_{0}) \sin \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \cos \Theta
+\end{displaymath}
+
+In these expressions $x_{0}$,$y_{0}$ is the star center, and $\Theta$ is the
+angle with the $x$ axis. Results of this task are shown in table~\ref{tbl-1}.
+It is not clear how these sorts of analyses may affect determination of
+ $M_{\sun}$, but the assumption is that the alternate results
+should be less than 90\degr\ out of phase with previous values.
+We have no observations of \ion{Ca}{2}.
+Roughly \slantfrac{4}{5} of the electronically submitted abstracts
+for AAS meetings are error-free.
+
+%% If you wish to include an acknowledgments section in your paper,
+%% separate it off from the body of the text using the \acknowledgments
+%% command.
+
+%% Included in this acknowledgments section are examples of the
+%% AASTeX hypertext markup commands. Use \url without the optional [HREF]
+%% argument when you want to print the url directly in the text. Otherwise,
+%% use either \url or \anchor, with the HREF as the first argument and the
+%% text to be printed in the second.
+
+\acknowledgments
+
+We are grateful to V. Barger, T. Han, and R. J. N. Phillips for
+doing the math in section~\ref{bozomath}.
+More information on the AASTeX macros package is available \\ at
+\url{http://www.aas.org/publications/aastex}.
+For technical support, please write to
+\email{aastex-help@aas.org}.
+
+%% To help institutions obtain information on the effectiveness of their
+%% telescopes, the AAS Journals has created a group of keywords for telescope
+%% facilities. A common set of keywords will make these types of searches
+%% significantly easier and more accurate. In addition, they will also be
+%% useful in linking papers together which utilize the same telescopes
+%% within the framework of the National Virtual Observatory.
+%% See the AASTeX Web site at http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/AAS/AASTeX
+%% for information on obtaining the facility keywords.
+
+%% After the acknowledgments section, use the following syntax and the
+%% \facility{} macro to list the keywords of facilities used in the research
+%% for the paper. Each keyword will be checked against the master list during
+%% copy editing. Individual instruments or configurations can be provided
+%% in parentheses, after the keyword, but they will not be verified.
+
+{\it Facilities:} \facility{Nickel}, \facility{HST (STIS)}, \facility{CXO (ASIS)}.
+
+%% Appendix material should be preceded with a single \appendix command.
+%% There should be a \section command for each appendix. Mark appendix
+%% subsections with the same markup you use in the main body of the paper.
+
+%% Each Appendix (indicated with \section) will be lettered A, B, C, etc.
+%% The equation counter will reset when it encounters the \appendix
+%% command and will number appendix equations (A1), (A2), etc.
+
+\appendix
+
+\section{Appendix material}
+
+Consider once again a task that computes profile parameters for a modified
+Lorentzian of the form
+\begin{equation}
+I = \frac{1}{1 + d_{1}^{P (1 + d_{2} )}}
+\end{equation}
+where
+\begin{mathletters}
+\begin{displaymath}
+d_{1} = \frac{3}{4} \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{R_{maj}}
+\end{array} \right) ^{2} +
+\left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{y_{1}}{R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} }
+\end{displaymath}
+\begin{equation}
+d_{2} = \case{3}{4} \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{P R_{maj}}
+\end{array} \right) ^{2} +
+\left( \begin{array}{c} \case{y_{1}}{P R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} }
+\end{equation}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+x_{1} & = & (x - x_{0}) \cos \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \sin \Theta \\
+y_{1} & = & -(x - x_{0}) \sin \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \cos \Theta
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{mathletters}
+
+For completeness, here is one last equation.
+\begin{equation}
+e = mc^2
+\end{equation}
+
+%% The reference list follows the main body and any appendices.
+%% Use LaTeX's thebibliography environment to mark up your reference list.
+%% Note \begin{thebibliography} is followed by an empty set of
+%% curly braces. If you forget this, LaTeX will generate the error
+%% "Perhaps a missing \item?".
+%%
+%% thebibliography produces citations in the text using \bibitem-\cite
+%% cross-referencing. Each reference is preceded by a
+%% \bibitem command that defines in curly braces the KEY that corresponds
+%% to the KEY in the \cite commands (see the first section above).
+%% Make sure that you provide a unique KEY for every \bibitem or else the
+%% paper will not LaTeX. The square brackets should contain
+%% the citation text that LaTeX will insert in
+%% place of the \cite commands.
+
+%% We have used macros to produce journal name abbreviations.
+%% AASTeX provides a number of these for the more frequently-cited journals.
+%% See the Author Guide for a list of them.
+
+%% Note that the style of the \bibitem labels (in []) is slightly
+%% different from previous examples. The natbib system solves a host
+%% of citation expression problems, but it is necessary to clearly
+%% delimit the year from the author name used in the citation.
+%% See the natbib documentation for more details and options.
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{}
+\bibitem[Auri\`ere(1982)]{aur82} Auri\`ere, M. 1982, \aap,
+ 109, 301
+\bibitem[Canizares et al.(1978)]{can78} Canizares, C. R.,
+ Grindlay, J. E., Hiltner, W. A., Liller, W., \&
+ McClintock, J. E. 1978, \apj, 224, 39
+\bibitem[Djorgovski \& King(1984)]{djo84} Djorgovski, S.,
+ \& King, I. R. 1984, \apjl, 277, L49
+\bibitem[Hagiwara \& Zeppenfeld(1986)]{hag86} Hagiwara, K., \&
+ Zeppenfeld, D. 1986, Nucl.Phys., 274, 1
+\bibitem[Harris \& van den Bergh(1984)]{har84} Harris, W. E.,
+ \& van den Bergh, S. 1984, \aj, 89, 1816
+\bibitem[H\`enon(1961)]{hen61} H\'enon, M. 1961, Ann.d'Ap., 24, 369
+\bibitem[Heiles \& Troland(2003)]{heiles03} Heiles, C. \& Troland, T. H., 2003, \apjs, preprint doi:10.1086/381753
+\bibitem[Kim, Ostricker, \& Stone(2003)]{kim03} Kim, W.-T., Ostriker, E., \& Stone, J. M., 2003, \apj, 599, 1157
+\bibitem[King(1966)]{kin66} King, I. R. 1966, \aj, 71, 276
+\bibitem[King(1975)]{kin75} King, I. R. 1975, Dynamics of
+ Stellar Systems, A. Hayli, Dordrecht: Reidel, 1975, 99
+\bibitem[King et al.(1968)]{kin68} King, I. R., Hedemann, E.,
+ Hodge, S. M., \& White, R. E. 1968, \aj, 73, 456
+\bibitem[Kron et al.(1984)]{kro84} Kron, G. E., Hewitt, A. V.,
+ \& Wasserman, L. H. 1984, \pasp, 96, 198
+\bibitem[Lynden-Bell \& Wood(1968)]{lyn68} Lynden-Bell, D.,
+ \& Wood, R. 1968, \mnras, 138, 495
+\bibitem[Newell \& O'Neil(1978)]{new78} Newell, E. B.,
+ \& O'Neil, E. J. 1978, \apjs, 37, 27
+\bibitem[Ortolani et al.(1985)]{ort85} Ortolani, S., Rosino, L.,
+ \& Sandage, A. 1985, \aj, 90, 473
+\bibitem[Peterson(1976)]{pet76} Peterson, C. J. 1976, \aj, 81, 617
+\bibitem[Rudnick et al.(2003)]{rudnick03} Rudnick, G. et al., 2003, \apj, 599, 847
+\bibitem[Spitzer(1985)]{spi85} Spitzer, L. 1985, Dynamics of
+ Star Clusters, J. Goodman \& P. Hut, Dordrecht: Reidel, 109
+\bibitem[Treu et al.(2003)]{treu03} Treu, T. et al., 2003, \apj, 591, 53
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\clearpage
+
+%% Use the figure environment and \plotone or \plottwo to include
+%% figures and captions in your electronic submission.
+%% To embed the sample graphics in
+%% the file, uncomment the \plotone, \plottwo, and
+%% \includegraphics commands
+%%
+%% If you need a layout that cannot be achieved with \plotone or
+%% \plottwo, you can invoke the graphicx package directly with the
+%% \includegraphics command or use \plotfiddle. For more information,
+%% please see the tutorial on "Using Electronic Art with AASTeX" in the
+%% documentation section at the AASTeX Web site,
+%% http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/AAS/AASTeX.
+%%
+%% The examples below also include sample markup for submission of
+%% supplemental electronic materials. As always, be sure to check
+%% the instructions to authors for the journal you are submitting to
+%% for specific submissions guidelines as they vary from
+%% journal to journal.
+
+%% This example uses \plotone to include an EPS file scaled to
+%% 80% of its natural size with \epsscale. Its caption
+%% has been written to indicate that additional figure parts will be
+%% available in the electronic journal.
+
+\begin{figure}
+\epsscale{.80}
+\plotone{f1.eps}
+\caption{Derived spectra for 3C138 \citep[see][]{heiles03}. Plots for all sources are available
+in the electronic edition of {\it The Astrophysical Journal}.\label{fig1}}
+\end{figure}
+
+\clearpage
+
+%% Here we use \plottwo to present two versions of the same figure,
+%% one in black and white for print the other in RGB color
+%% for online presentation. Note that the caption indicates
+%% that a color version of the figure will be available online.
+%%
+
+\begin{figure}
+\plottwo{f2.eps}{f2_color.eps}
+\caption{A panel taken from Figure 2 of \citet{rudnick03}.
+See the electronic edition of the Journal for a color version
+of this figure.\label{fig2}}
+\end{figure}
+
+%% This figure uses \includegraphics to scale and rotate the still frame
+%% for an mpeg animation.
+
+\begin{figure}
+\includegraphics[angle=90,scale=.50]{f3.eps}
+\caption{Animation still frame taken from \citet{kim03}.
+This figure is also available as an mpeg
+animation in the electronic edition of the
+{\it Astrophysical Journal}.}
+\end{figure}
+
+%% If you are not including electonic art with your submission, you may
+%% mark up your captions using the \figcaption command. See the
+%% User Guide for details.
+%%
+%% No more than seven \figcaption commands are allowed per page,
+%% so if you have more than seven captions, insert a \clearpage
+%% after every seventh one.
+
+%% Tables should be submitted one per page, so put a \clearpage before
+%% each one.
+
+%% Two options are available to the author for producing tables: the
+%% deluxetable environment provided by the AASTeX package or the LaTeX
+%% table environment. Use of deluxetable is preferred.
+%%
+
+%% Three table samples follow, two marked up in the deluxetable environment,
+%% one marked up as a LaTeX table.
+
+%% In this first example, note that the \tabletypesize{}
+%% command has been used to reduce the font size of the table.
+%% We also use the \rotate command to rotate the table to
+%% landscape orientation since it is very wide even at the
+%% reduced font size.
+%%
+%% Note also that the \label command needs to be placed
+%% inside the \tablecaption.
+
+%% This table also includes a table comment indicating that the full
+%% version will be available in machine-readable format in the electronic
+%% edition.
+
+\clearpage
+
+\begin{deluxetable}{ccrrrrrrrrcrl}
+\tabletypesize{\scriptsize}
+\rotate
+\tablecaption{Sample table taken from \citet{treu03}\label{tbl-1}}
+\tablewidth{0pt}
+\tablehead{
+\colhead{POS} & \colhead{chip} & \colhead{ID} & \colhead{X} & \colhead{Y} &
+\colhead{RA} & \colhead{DEC} & \colhead{IAU$\pm$ $\delta$ IAU} &
+\colhead{IAP1$\pm$ $\delta$ IAP1} & \colhead{IAP2 $\pm$ $\delta$ IAP2} &
+\colhead{star} & \colhead{E} & \colhead{Comment}
+}
+\startdata
+0 & 2 & 1 & 1370.99 & 57.35 & 6.651120 & 17.131149 & 21.344$\pm$0.006 & 2
+4.385$\pm$0.016 & 23.528$\pm$0.013 & 0.0 & 9 & - \\
+0 & 2 & 2 & 1476.62 & 8.03 & 6.651480 & 17.129572 & 21.641$\pm$0.005 & 2
+3.141$\pm$0.007 & 22.007$\pm$0.004 & 0.0 & 9 & - \\
+0 & 2 & 3 & 1079.62 & 28.92 & 6.652430 & 17.135000 & 23.953$\pm$0.030 & 2
+4.890$\pm$0.023 & 24.240$\pm$0.023 & 0.0 & - & - \\
+0 & 2 & 4 & 114.58 & 21.22 & 6.655560 & 17.148020 & 23.801$\pm$0.025 & 2
+5.039$\pm$0.026 & 24.112$\pm$0.021 & 0.0 & - & - \\
+0 & 2 & 5 & 46.78 & 19.46 & 6.655800 & 17.148932 & 23.012$\pm$0.012 & 2
+3.924$\pm$0.012 & 23.282$\pm$0.011 & 0.0 & - & - \\
+0 & 2 & 6 & 1441.84 & 16.16 & 6.651480 & 17.130072 & 24.393$\pm$0.045 & 2
+6.099$\pm$0.062 & 25.119$\pm$0.049 & 0.0 & - & - \\
+0 & 2 & 7 & 205.43 & 3.96 & 6.655520 & 17.146742 & 24.424$\pm$0.032 & 2
+5.028$\pm$0.025 & 24.597$\pm$0.027 & 0.0 & - & - \\
+0 & 2 & 8 & 1321.63 & 9.76 & 6.651950 & 17.131672 & 22.189$\pm$0.011 & 2
+4.743$\pm$0.021 & 23.298$\pm$0.011 & 0.0 & 4 & edge \\
+\enddata
+%% Text for table notes should follow after the \enddata but before
+%% the \end{deluxetable}. Make sure there is at least one \tablenotemark
+%% in the table for each \tablenotetext.
+\tablecomments{Table \ref{tbl-1} is published in its entirety in the
+electronic edition of the {\it Astrophysical Journal}. A portion is
+shown here for guidance regarding its form and content.}
+\tablenotetext{a}{Sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-1} that was generated
+with the deluxetable environment}
+\tablenotetext{b}{Another sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-1}}
+\end{deluxetable}
+
+%% If you use the table environment, please indicate horizontal rules using
+%% \tableline, not \hline.
+%% Do not put multiple tabular environments within a single table.
+%% The optional \label should appear inside the \caption command.
+
+\clearpage
+
+\begin{table}
+\begin{center}
+\caption{More terribly relevant tabular information.\label{tbl-2}}
+\begin{tabular}{crrrrrrrrrrr}
+\tableline\tableline
+Star & Height & $d_{x}$ & $d_{y}$ & $n$ & $\chi^2$ & $R_{maj}$ & $R_{min}$ &
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{$P$\tablenotemark{a}} & $P R_{maj}$ & $P R_{min}$ &
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{$\Theta$\tablenotemark{b}} \\
+\tableline
+1 &33472.5 &-0.1 &0.4 &53 &27.4 &2.065 &1.940 &3.900 &68.3 &116.2 &-27.639\\
+2 &27802.4 &-0.3 &-0.2 &60 &3.7 &1.628 &1.510 &2.156 &6.8 &7.5 &-26.764\\
+3 &29210.6 &0.9 &0.3 &60 &3.4 &1.622 &1.551 &2.159 &6.7 &7.3 &-40.272\\
+4 &32733.8 &-1.2\tablenotemark{c} &-0.5 &41 &54.8 &2.282 &2.156 &4.313 &117.4 &78.2 &-35.847\\
+5 & 9607.4 &-0.4 &-0.4 &60 &1.4 &1.669\tablenotemark{c} &1.574 &2.343 &8.0 &8.9 &-33.417\\
+6 &31638.6 &1.6 &0.1 &39 &315.2 & 3.433 &3.075 &7.488 &92.1 &25.3 &-12.052\\
+\tableline
+\end{tabular}
+%% Any table notes must follow the \end{tabular} command.
+\tablenotetext{a}{Sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-2} that was
+generated with the \LaTeX\ table environment}
+\tablenotetext{b}{Yet another sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-2}}
+\tablenotetext{c}{Another sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-2}}
+\tablecomments{We can also attach a long-ish paragraph of explanatory
+material to a table.}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+%% If the table is more than one page long, the width of the table can vary
+%% from page to page when the default \tablewidth is used, as below. The
+%% individual table widths for each page will be written to the log file; a
+%% maximum tablewidth for the table can be computed from these values.
+%% The \tablewidth argument can then be reset and the file reprocessed, so
+%% that the table is of uniform width throughout. Try getting the widths
+%% from the log file and changing the \tablewidth parameter to see how
+%% adjusting this value affects table formatting.
+
+%% The \dataset{} macro has also been applied to a few of the objects to
+%% show how many observations can be tagged in a table.
+
+\clearpage
+
+\begin{deluxetable}{lrrrrcrrrrr}
+\tablewidth{0pt}
+\tablecaption{Literature Data for Program Stars}
+\tablehead{
+\colhead{Star} & \colhead{V} &
+\colhead{b$-$y} & \colhead{m$_1$} &
+\colhead{c$_1$} & \colhead{ref} &
+\colhead{T$_{\rm eff}$} & \colhead{log g} &
+\colhead{v$_{\rm turb}$} & \colhead{[Fe/H]} &
+\colhead{ref}}
+\startdata
+HD 97 & 9.7& 0.51& 0.15& 0.35& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 2 \\
+& & & & & & 5015 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 10 \\
+\dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#O6H04VAXQ]{HD 2665} & 7.7& 0.54& 0.09& 0.34& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.30$ & 2 \\
+& & & & & & 5000 & 2.50 & 2.4 & $-1.99$ & 5 \\
+& & & & & & 5120 & 3.00 & 2.0 & $-1.69$ & 7 \\
+& & & & & & 4980 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.05$ & 10 \\
+HD 4306 & 9.0& 0.52& 0.05& 0.35& 20, 2& \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.70$ & 2 \\
+& & & & & & 5000 & 1.75 & 2.0 & $-2.70$ & 13 \\
+& & & & & & 5000 & 1.50 & 1.8 & $-2.65$ & 14 \\
+& & & & & & 4950 & 2.10 & 2.0 & $-2.92$ & 8 \\
+& & & & & & 5000 & 2.25 & 2.0 & $-2.83$ & 18 \\
+& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.80$ & 21 \\
+& & & & & & 4930 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.45$ & 10 \\
+HD 5426 & 9.6& 0.50& 0.08& 0.34& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.30$ & 2 \\
+\dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#O5F654010]{HD 6755} & 7.7& 0.49& 0.12& 0.28& 20, 2& \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 2 \\
+& & & & & & 5200 & 2.50 & 2.4 & $-1.56$ & 5 \\
+& & & & & & 5260 & 3.00 & 2.7 & $-1.67$ & 7 \\
+& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.58$ & 21 \\
+& & & & & & 5200 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.80$ & 10 \\
+& & & & & & 4600 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.75$ & 10 \\
+\dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#O56D06010]{HD 94028} & 8.2& 0.34& 0.08& 0.25& 20 & 5795 & 4.00 & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 22 \\
+& & & & & & 5860 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 4 \\
+& & & & & & 5910 & 3.80 & \nodata & $-1.76$ & 15 \\
+& & & & & & 5800 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.67$ & 17 \\
+& & & & & & 5902 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 11 \\
+& & & & & & 5900 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.57$ & 3 \\
+& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.32$ & 21 \\
+HD 97916 & 9.2& 0.29& 0.10& 0.41& 20 & 6125 & 4.00 & \nodata & $-1.10$ & 22 \\
+& & & & & & 6160 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.39$ & 3 \\
+& & & & & & 6240 & 3.70 & \nodata & $-1.28$ & 15 \\
+& & & & & & 5950 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 17 \\
+& & & & & & 6204 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.36$ & 11 \\
+\cutinhead{This is a cut-in head}
++26\arcdeg2606& 9.7&0.34&0.05&0.28&20,11& 5980 & \nodata & \nodata &$<-2.20$ & 19 \\
+& & & & & & 5950 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.89$ & 24 \\
++26\arcdeg3578& 9.4&0.31&0.05&0.37&20,11& 5830 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.60$ & 4 \\
+& & & & & & 5800 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.62$ & 17 \\
+& & & & & & 6177 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.51$ & 11 \\
+& & & & & & 6000 & 3.25 & \nodata & $-2.20$ & 22 \\
+& & & & & & 6140 & 3.50 & \nodata & $-2.57$ & 15 \\
++30\arcdeg2611& 9.2&0.82&0.33&0.55& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 2 \\
+& & & & & & 4400 & 1.80 & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 12 \\
+& & & & & & 4400 & 0.90 & 1.7 & $-1.20$ & 14 \\
+& & & & & & 4260 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.55$ & 10 \\
++37\arcdeg1458& 8.9&0.44&0.07&0.22&20,11& 5296 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.39$ & 11 \\
+& & & & & & 5420 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.43$ & 3 \\
++58\arcdeg1218&10.0&0.51&0.03&0.36& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.80$ & 2 \\
+& & & & & & 5000 & 1.10 & 2.2 & $-2.71$ & 14 \\
+& & & & & & 5000 & 2.20 & 1.8 & $-2.46$ & 5 \\
+& & & & & & 4980 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.55$ & 10 \\
++72\arcdeg0094&10.2&0.31&0.09&0.26&12 & 6160 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.80$ & 19 \\
+\sidehead{I'm a side head:}
+G5--36 & 10.8& 0.40& 0.07& 0.28& 20 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.19$ & 21 \\
+G18--54 & 10.7& 0.37& 0.08& 0.28& 20 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.34$ & 21 \\
+G20--08 & 9.9& 0.36& 0.05& 0.25& 20,11& 5849 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.59$ & 11 \\
+& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.03$ & 21 \\
+G20--15 & 10.6& 0.45& 0.03& 0.27& 20,11& 5657 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.00$ & 11 \\
+& & & & & & 6020 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.56$ & 3 \\
+& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.58$ & 21 \\
+G21--22 & 10.7& 0.38& 0.07& 0.27& 20,11& \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.23$ & 21 \\
+G24--03 & 10.5& 0.36& 0.06& 0.27& 20,11& 5866 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.78$ & 11 \\
+& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 21 \\
+G30--52 & 8.6& 0.50& 0.25& 0.27& 11 & 4757 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.12$ & 11 \\
+& & & & & & 4880 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.14$ & 3 \\
+G33--09 & 10.6& 0.41& 0.10& 0.28& 20 & 5575 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.48$ & 11 \\
+G66--22 & 10.5& 0.46& 0.16& 0.28& 11 & 5060 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.77$ & 3 \\
+& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.04$ & 21 \\
+G90--03 & 10.4& 0.37& 0.04& 0.29& 20 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.01$ & 21 \\
+LP 608--62\tablenotemark{a} & 10.5& 0.30& 0.07& 0.35& 11 & 6250 & \nodata &
+\nodata & $-2.70$ & 4 \\
+\enddata
+\tablenotetext{a}{Star LP 608--62 is also known as BD+1\arcdeg 2341p. We will
+make this footnote extra long so that it extends over two lines.}
+%% You can append references to a table using the \tablerefs command.
+\tablerefs{
+(1) Barbuy, Spite, \& Spite 1985; (2) Bond 1980; (3) Carbon et al. 1987;
+(4) Hobbs \& Duncan 1987; (5) Gilroy et al. 1988: (6) Gratton \& Ortolani 1986;
+(7) Gratton \& Sneden 1987; (8) Gratton \& Sneden (1988); (9) Gratton \& Sneden 1991;
+(10) Kraft et al. 1982; (11) LCL, or Laird, 1990; (12) Leep \& Wallerstein 1981;
+(13) Luck \& Bond 1981; (14) Luck \& Bond 1985; (15) Magain 1987;
+(16) Magain 1989; (17) Peterson 1981; (18) Peterson, Kurucz, \& Carney 1990;
+(19) RMB; (20) Schuster \& Nissen 1988; (21) Schuster \& Nissen 1989b;
+(22) Spite et al. 1984; (23) Spite \& Spite 1986; (24) Hobbs \& Thorburn 1991;
+(25) Hobbs et al. 1991; (26) Olsen 1983.}
+\end{deluxetable}
+
+%% Tables may also be prepared as separate files. See the accompanying
+%% sample file table.tex for an example of an external table file.
+%% To include an external file in your main document, use the \input
+%% command. Uncomment the line below to include table.tex in this
+%% sample file. (Note that you will need to comment out the \documentclass,
+%% \begin{document}, and \end{document} commands from table.tex if you want
+%% to include it in this document.)
+
+%% \input{table}
+
+%% The following command ends your manuscript. LaTeX will ignore any text
+%% that appears after it.
+
+\end{document}
+
+%%
+%% End of file `sample.tex'.
+%</sample>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here begins the module `table`.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*table>
+%%
+%% Begining of file `table.tex'
+
+%% This complex but short example prepared in the deluxetable environment
+%% demonstrates some of the techniques
+%% that can be used to generate complex column headings and to align
+%% variable-width columns. See the manuscript sample file, sample.tex,
+%% for more table examples.
+
+%% Note this file has its own \documentclass, \begin{document}, and
+%% \end{document} commands. If you want to insert this table in another
+%% LaTeX document using the \input command, comment out these lines.
+
+\documentclass{aastex}
+\begin{document}
+
+%% Note that the table will print double-spaced since we are using the
+%% manuscript style. Change the style to preprint or preprint2 to see
+%% how LaTeX formats the table in those styles.
+
+%% In this example the LaTeX \multicolumn command is used to span a heading
+%% over several columns. When \multicolumn is used along with the
+%% \cutinhead or \sidehead commands, the \tablecolumns command must
+%% be used to specify the number of columns in the table -
+%% otherwise \cutinhead and \sidehead will not work properly.
+
+%% \cline has been used to produce straddle rules below the spanning heads,
+%% \cutinhead to produce a centered head in the body of the table, and
+%% \sidehead to produce a flush-left head in the body.
+
+%% This table also makes use of the \phn command to better align some of the
+%% columns. Also see \phd, \phs, and \phm{} - other commands useful for
+%% column alignment. All of these commands insert a blank space
+%% whose width is equal to that of a number (\phn),
+%% a decimal point (\phd), a minus sign (\phs), or any
+%% character you wish to use (\phm{text}).
+%% Keep in mind that if you are preparing a table for electronic submission
+%% to one of the journals, you need not worry too much about column
+%% alignment. The editors will fix table alignment as appropriate.
+
+%% If a table is more than one page long, the width of the table can vary
+%% from page to page when the default \tablewidth is used, as below. The
+%% individual table widths for each page will be written to the log file; a
+%% maximum tablewidth for the table can be computed from these values.
+%% The \tablewidth argument can then be reset and the file reprocessed, so
+%% that the table is uniform throughout the pages. Try getting the widths
+%% from the log file and changing the \tablewidth parameter to see how
+%% adjusting this value affects table formatting.
+
+%% The * option to the \\ command has been used in the lines after
+%% the \sidehead to keep them together on the same page. Try taking
+%% the *'s out and LaTeXing the manuscript again to see the difference
+%% in the page breaks. You can group together as many lines as
+%% you like using this command.
+
+
+\begin{deluxetable}{rrrrrrrr}
+\tablecolumns{8}
+\tablewidth{0pc}
+\tablecaption{Percentage of Fake Stars Lost}
+\tablehead{
+\colhead{} & \multicolumn{3}{c}{Non-shell Stars} & \colhead{} &
+\multicolumn{3}{c}{Shell Stars} \\
+\cline{2-4} \cline{6-8} \\
+\colhead{Mag} & \colhead{F336W} & \colhead{F555W} & \colhead{F814W} &
+\colhead{} & \colhead{F336W} & \colhead{F555W} & \colhead{F814W}}
+\startdata
+20.25 & 2.2$\pm$7.4\phn & \nodata & \nodata &
+& 0.9$\pm$6.8 & \nodata & 0.0$\pm$44.7 \\
+20.75 & 2.4$\pm$7.8\phn & \nodata & 2.8$\pm$7.4 &
+& 1.7$\pm$6.6 & \nodata & 1.4$\pm$6.7\phn \\
+21.25 & 0.1$\pm$7.7\phn & \nodata & 1.7$\pm$7.6 &
+& 2.6$\pm$6.5 & \nodata & 0.9$\pm$6.6\phn \\
+21.75 & 2.4$\pm$4.5\phn & 2.2$\pm$7.4 & 0.1$\pm$7.6 &
+& 7.1$\pm$4.5 & 0.9$\pm$6.8 & 3.3$\pm$6.5\phn \\
+22.25 & 3.4$\pm$3.1\phn & 1.8$\pm$7.7 & 2.9$\pm$4.4 &
+& 11.8$\pm$3.6 & 0.4$\pm$6.6 & 5.7$\pm$4.4\phn \\
+22.75 & 4.5$\pm$2.9\phn & 1.8$\pm$7.7 & 4.7$\pm$3.1 &
+& 26.2$\pm$3.6 & 3.4$\pm$6.5 & 10.9$\pm$3.6\phn \\
+23.25 & 7.0$\pm$2.4\phn & 3.4$\pm$4.5 & 3.7$\pm$2.9 &
+& 44.2$\pm$3.3 & 10.7$\pm$4.5 & 20.6$\pm$3.5\phn \\
+\cutinhead{More Data}
+23.75 & 12.4$\pm$2.7\phn & 4.1$\pm$3.1 & 6.7$\pm$2.5 &
+& 59.8$\pm$4.0 & 20.1$\pm$3.6 & 32.6$\pm$3.4\phn \\
+24.25 & 30.2$\pm$3.1\phn & 5.3$\pm$2.9 & 10.0$\pm$2.7 &
+& 74.9$\pm$5.1 & 35.8$\pm$3.6 & 43.1$\pm$4.0\phn \\
+24.75 & 66.8$\pm$5.5\phn & 10.4$\pm$2.4 & 16.5$\pm$3.2 &
+& 83.7$\pm$6.1 & 56.3$\pm$3.3 & 57.0$\pm$5.2\phn \\
+25.25 & 87.5$\pm$35.4 & 20.0$\pm$2.7 & 28.0$\pm$5.6 &
+& \nodata & 71.5$\pm$4.0 & 71.8$\pm$6.2\phn \\
+25.75 & \nodata\phn & 55.3$\pm$3.1 & \nodata &
+& \nodata & 81.2$\pm$5.1 & \nodata\phn \\
+26.25 & \nodata\phn & 85.1$\pm$5.5 & \nodata &
+& \nodata & 85.6$\pm$6.1 & \nodata\phn \\
+\sidehead{More Data}
+27.75 & 12.4$\pm$2.7\phn & 4.1$\pm$3.1 & 6.7$\pm$2.5 &
+& 59.8$\pm$4.0 & 20.1$\pm$3.6 & 32.6$\pm$3.4\phn \\
+28.25 & 30.2$\pm$3.1\phn & 5.3$\pm$2.9 & 10.0$\pm$2.7 &
+& 74.9$\pm$5.1 & 35.8$\pm$3.6 & 43.1$\pm$4.0\phn \\
+29.75 & 66.8$\pm$5.5\phn & 10.4$\pm$2.4 & 16.5$\pm$3.2 &
+& 83.7$\pm$6.1 & 56.3$\pm$3.3 & 57.0$\pm$5.2\phn \\
+30.25 & 87.5$\pm$35.4 & 20.0$\pm$2.7 & 28.0$\pm$5.6 &
+& \nodata & 71.5$\pm$4.0 & 71.8$\pm$6.2\phn \\
+31.75 & \nodata\phn & 55.3$\pm$3.1 & \nodata &
+& \nodata & 81.2$\pm$5.1 & \nodata\phn \\
+32.25 & \nodata\phn & 85.1$\pm$5.5 & \nodata &
+& \nodata & 85.6$\pm$6.1 & \nodata\phn \\
+33.75 & 12.4$\pm$2.7\phn & 4.1$\pm$3.1 & 6.7$\pm$2.5 &
+& 59.8$\pm$4.0 & 20.1$\pm$3.6 & 32.6$\pm$3.4\phn \\
+34.25 & 30.2$\pm$3.1\phn & 5.3$\pm$2.9 & 10.0$\pm$2.7 &
+& 74.9$\pm$5.1 & 35.8$\pm$3.6 & 43.1$\pm$4.0\phn \\
+35.75 & 66.8$\pm$5.5\phn & 10.4$\pm$2.4 & 16.5$\pm$3.2 &
+& 83.7$\pm$6.1 & 56.3$\pm$3.3 & 57.0$\pm$5.2\phn \\
+36.25 & 87.5$\pm$35.4 & 20.0$\pm$2.7 & 28.0$\pm$5.6 &
+& \nodata & 71.5$\pm$4.0 & 71.8$\pm$6.2\phn \\
+37.75 & \nodata\phn & 55.3$\pm$3.1 & \nodata &
+& \nodata & 81.2$\pm$5.1 & \nodata\phn \\
+38.25 & \nodata\phn & 85.1$\pm$5.5 & \nodata &
+& \nodata & 85.6$\pm$6.1 & \nodata\phn \\
+\enddata
+\end{deluxetable}
+
+ \end{document}
+
+%%
+%% End of file `table.tex'.
+
+
+%</table>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% docstrip will complete its |\generate| command at the following line:
+\endinput
+
+Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 12:29
+(aasclass
+LaTeX2e <1998/06/01>
+(aasclass.dtx
+File: aasclass.dtx 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+
+LaTeX Warning: File `ltxdoc.cfg' already exists on the system.
+ Not generating it from this source.
+
+(ltxdoc.cls
+Document Class: ltxdoc 1996/01/11 v2.0r Standard LaTeX documentation class
+*************************************
+* Local config file ltxdoc.cfg used
+*************************************
+(ltxdoc.cfg) (article.cls
+Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
+(size10.clo
+File: size10.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
+)
+\c@part=\count79
+\c@section=\count80
+\c@subsection=\count81
+\c@subsubsection=\count82
+\c@paragraph=\count83
+\c@subparagraph=\count84
+\c@figure=\count85
+\c@table=\count86
+\abovecaptionskip=\skip41
+\belowcaptionskip=\skip42
+\bibindent=\dimen102
+) (doc.sty
+Package: doc 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)
+\c@StandardModuleDepth=\count87
+\guard@level=\count88
+\MacrocodeTopsep=\skip43
+\MacroIndent=\dimen103
+\macro@cnt=\count89
+\MacroTopsep=\skip44
+\index@excludelist=\toks14
+(multicol.sty
+Package: multicol 1998/01/19 v1.5q multicolumn formatting (FMi)
+\c@tracingmulticols=\count90
+\mult@box=\box26
+\multicol@leftmargin=\dimen104
+\c@unbalance=\count91
+\c@collectmore=\count92
+\doublecol@number=\count93
+\multicoltolerance=\count94
+\multicolpretolerance=\count95
+\full@width=\dimen105
+\page@free=\dimen106
+\premulticols=\dimen107
+\postmulticols=\dimen108
+\multicolsep=\skip45
+\multicolbaselineskip=\skip46
+\partial@page=\box27
+\last@line=\box28
+\mult@rightbox=\box29
+\mult@grightbox=\box30
+\mult@gfirstbox=\box31
+\mult@firstbox=\box32
+\@tempa=\box33
+\@tempa=\box34
+\@tempa=\box35
+\@tempa=\box36
+\@tempa=\box37
+\@tempa=\box38
+\@tempa=\box39
+\@tempa=\box40
+\@tempa=\box41
+\@tempa=\box42
+\@tempa=\box43
+\@tempa=\box44
+\@tempa=\box45
+\@tempa=\box46
+\@tempa=\box47
+\@tempa=\box48
+\@tempa=\box49
+\c@columnbadness=\count96
+\c@finalcolumnbadness=\count97
+\last@try=\dimen109
+\multicolovershoot=\dimen110
+\multicolundershoot=\dimen111
+\mult@nat@firstbox=\box50
+)
+\IndexMin=\dimen112
+\c@IndexColumns=\count98
+\GlossaryMin=\dimen113
+\c@GlossaryColumns=\count99
+\check@sum=\count100
+\bslash@cnt=\count101
+\wrong@table=\toks15
+\c@CodelineNo=\count102
+))
+\@indexfile=\write3
+Writing index file aasclass.idx
+(shortvrb.sty
+Package: shortvrb 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)
+)
+Package shortvrb Info: Made | a short reference for \verb on input line 321.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \cs on input line 358.
+
+LaTeX Warning: Writing file `:aasclass.ins'.
+
+
+
+LaTeX Warning: Writing file `:Read.Me'.
+
+
+(aasclass.aux)
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 585.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 585.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 585.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 585.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 585.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 585.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585.
+Package shortvrb Info: | already a short reference for \verb on input line 585.
+(aasclass.dtx
+***************************
+* Character table correct *
+***************************
+(Read.Me
+LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
+(Font) <17.28> on input line 16.
+LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
+(Font) <12> on input line 16.
+LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
+(Font) <8> on input line 16.
+LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
+(Font) <6> on input line 16.
+LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
+(Font) <5> on input line 16.
+
+Overfull \hbox (8.91502pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 24--27
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The dis-tri-bu-tion point for AAST[]X is \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 ftp:
+//ftp.aas.org/pubs/aastex50.zip\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,|
+ []
+
+LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
+(Font) <7> on input line 29.
+(aasclass.toc [1
+
+] [2])
+\tf@toc=\write4
+[3]
+Overfull \hbox (15.35983pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 65--68
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Now type-set \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 aasclass.ins\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , th
+ereby gen-er-at-ing \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 aastex.cls \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 and \OT1/cmtt/m/
+n/10 aasguide.tex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
+ []
+
+)
+LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/cmtt/bx/n' in size <10> not available
+(Font) Font shape `OT1/cmtt/m/n' tried instead on input line 79.
+[4]
+Overfull \hbox (0.5877pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 140--140
+ [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 %<style> \@obsoletefile{aasclass.cls}{aasclass.sty}\LoadCl
+ass{aasclass}% |
+ []
+
+[5]
+LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/cmtt/bx/n' in size <12> not available
+(Font) Font shape `OT1/cmtt/m/n' tried instead on input line 171.
+[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
+Overfull \hbox (10.0376pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 579--579
+ [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 % For version number and date, search on "\fileversion" i
+n the .dtx file, |
+ []
+
+[11] [12]
+Overfull \hbox (5.11002pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 610--613
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The macro []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \aas@ptsize \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 works
+ very much like the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \@ptsize \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 macro of \OT1/cm
+tt/m/n/10 classes.dtx\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,|
+ []
+
+[13] [14]
+Overfull \hbox (47.83716pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784
+ [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\exp
+andafter\@secondoftwo\fi |
+ []
+
+[15]
+Overfull \hbox (5.31265pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784
+ [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \expandafter\PassOptionsToClass\expandafter{\expandafter1
+\aas@ptsizept}% |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (47.83716pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784
+ [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\exp
+andafter\@secondoftwo\fi |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (5.31265pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784
+ [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \expandafter\PassOptionsToClass\expandafter{\expandafter1
+\aas@ptsizept}% |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (36.30128pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 792--794
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 AAST[]X is a vari-ant of the stan-dard L[]T[]X ar-ti-cle class:
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/unpacked\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (14.63516pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 798--800
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 We al-ways load the stan-dard L[]T[]X sym-bol pack-age: []\OT1
+/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/base\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (129.57907pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 804--806
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 We al-ways load the stan-dard L[]T[]X ex-tended graph-ics pack
+-age: []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/packages/graphics\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .
+|
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (50.91344pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 810--812
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The AMS []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 amsmath \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 pack-age re
+-places []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 amssym\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 : []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://mac
+ros/latex/packages/amslatex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (67.91158pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 816--818
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The con-tributed L[]T[]X []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 natbib \OT1/cmr/m/
+n/10 pack-age: []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib\O
+T1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (48.02657pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 822--825
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 code may serve as a model for load-ing other classes: []\OT1/cmt
+t/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/packages/tools\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
+ []
+
+LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
+(Font) <14.4> on input line 830.
+[16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30]
+[31] [32] [33] [34]
+Overfull \hbox (19.66588pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2107--2110
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The for-mat-ting of the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \slugcomment \OT1/cmr
+/m/n/10 in-for-ma-tion is con-trolled by the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \@makeslugcmmnt|
+
+ []
+
+[35] [36] [37]
+Overfull \hbox (27.72055pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2338--2338
+[] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \authoraddr{<author's postal address>}% Deprecated (V5.0)
+ in favor of \affil[] |
+ []
+
+[38] [39] [40] [41] [42] [43] [44] [45] [46] [47] [48] [49]
+Overfull \hbox (12.01851pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3200--3202
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \@makecaption \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 de-ter-mines for-mat-ting for
+ fig-ure and ta-ble cap-tions. For manuscripts,|
+ []
+
+[50] [51] [52] [53] [54] [55] [56] [57] [58] [59]
+Overfull \hbox (19.48749pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3895--3895
+ [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \newcommand\tablebreak{\substitute@command\tablebreak\\}%{\
+cr\ptable@@split}% |
+ []
+
+[60] [61] [62] [63] [64] [65] [66] [67]
+Overfull \hbox (10.0376pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 4479--4479
+ [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 %\def\ascnode{\astro{N}}% ascending node (dragon's head), (
+only in cmastro) |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (19.48749pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 4479--4479
+ [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 %\def\descnode{\astro{D}}% descending node (dragon's tail),
+ (only in cmastro) |
+ []
+
+[68] [69] [70] [71] [72] [73] [74]
+LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for OMS+cmr on input line 4980.
+
+(omscmr.fd
+File: omscmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions
+)
+LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OMS/cmr/m/n' in size <10> not available
+(Font) Font shape `OMS/cmsy/m/n' tried instead on input line 4980.
+[75] [76]
+Overfull \hbox (10.59657pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5145--5147
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 What should hap-pen to a com-pat-i-bil-ity mode doc-u-ment? Wo
+uldn't|
+ []
+
+[77]
+Overfull \hbox (24.22153pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5220--5221
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Deprecate []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \nl\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/
+m/n/10 \nextline\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablevspace\OT1/cmr/m/n/10
+ , and []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablebreak\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .|
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (83.01173pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5223--5229
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Functionality cov-ered by []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 hyperref \OT1/cmr
+/m/n/10 pack-age. Syn-tax: []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \anchor{[]}{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .|
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (67.96008pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5223--5229
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Ref: \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 url.sty \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 in []\OT1/cmtt/m/n
+/10 /contrib/other/misc\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 hyperref.sty \OT1/cmr/
+m/n/10 in []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 /contrib/supported/hyperref\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .|
+ []
+
+[78]
+Overfull \hbox (11.78822pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5275--5279
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \journal{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \articleID{[]}
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \volno{[]}{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
+ []
+
+[79]
+*******************
+* Checksum passed *
+*******************
+) (aasclass.ind
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 6--7
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1971, 2000, 2055
+ []
+
+LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
+(Font) <9> on input line 14.
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 15--16
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1000, 1002--
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 15--16
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1006, 1008, 1019
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 26--28
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1342, 1347, 1671
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 36--37
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 36--37
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 58--60
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 58--60
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 61--62
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1417, 1498, 1540
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 63--65
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1073, 1088,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 63--65
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1102, 1112, 1549
+ []
+
+[80]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 81--82
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1107, 1118, $[]$
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (14.06262pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 84--85
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@latex@warning@no@line |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 90--91
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@make@caption@text@aj |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (14.06262pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 91--92
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@make@caption@text@apj |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 92--93
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@make@caption@text@pptt |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 95--96
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (32.9624pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 96--97
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont@aj |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (37.68735pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 97--98
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont@apj |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (42.4123pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 98--99
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt |
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 102--103
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1037, 1970, 2050
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 126--128
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1600, 1603,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 126--128
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1606, 1612,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 126--128
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1615, 1618, 1624
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 148--150
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1191, 1216,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 148--150
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 2028, 2033, 2037
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 156--157
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1332, 1468, 2017
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 167--169
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 434, 453--455,
+ []
+
+[81]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 173--175
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1163, 1166, 1175
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 178--180
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1166, 1499, 1703
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 187--189
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 187--189
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 212--213
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \abovedisplayshortskip |
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 224--225
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1348, 1564, 1672
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 247--249
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1002--1006, 1084
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 250--251
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \appendix@figtab@defs |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (28.23746pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 251--252
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \appendix@figtab@defs@pptt |
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 252--253
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1328, 1641, 1647
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 258--259
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1170, 1210, 1211
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1869--1871,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1874--1880,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1882--1884,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1886--1891,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1893--1897, $[]$
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 276--278
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1135, 1324, 1398
+ []
+
+[82]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 293--295
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1995, 2043, 2045
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 302--303
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \belowdisplayshortskip |
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1038, 1043,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1051, 1055,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1066, 1072,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1083, 1422,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1431, 1434,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1439, 1442,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1448, 1451,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 332--335
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1457, 1460, 1511
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 335--336
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1688, 1693, 1701
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1869--1871,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1874--1880,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1884, 1886--
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1891, 1893--1897
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (32.9624pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 348--350
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \clear@thebibliography@page |
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 348--350
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1275, 2012, 2058
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 350--351
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1563, 2057, 2058
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 355--357
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1056, 1073,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 355--357
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1088, 1102, 1112
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 361--362
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1695, 1696, 1698
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 387--388
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \DeclareRobustCommand |
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1917, 1924,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1925, 1929--
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1931, 1933,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1938,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 391--393
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1940, 1941, 1943
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1917, 1924,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1925, 1929--
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1931, 1933,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1938,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 393--395
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1940, 1941, 1943
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 395--397
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1925, 1930,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 395--397
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1932, 1933,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 395--397
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1939,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 395--397
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1940, 1942, 1943
+ []
+
+[83]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 417--418
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1483, 1562, 2023
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1047, 1051,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1058, 1066,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1076, 1083,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1426, 1431,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1434, 1439,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1442, 1448,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1451, 1457,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 419--422
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1460, 1477, 1561
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 437--438
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \eqnarray@fleqn@fixed |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 475--476
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \fnum@ptablecont@pptt |
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 476--477
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1503, 1565, $[]$
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 485--486
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1317, 1322, 2059
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 491--492
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1847, 1849--1853
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1377, 1381,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1389, 1474,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1517, 1526,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1527, 1575,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1576, 1599,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 516--518
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1605, 1611, 1617
+ []
+
+[84]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 541--542
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1696, 1698, 1705
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (23.51251pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 544--545
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \interfootnotelinepenalty |
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 552--554
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1094, 1106,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 552--554
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1117, 1192,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 552--554
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1437, 1446, 2038
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 585--587
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1044, 1056,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 585--587
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1115, 1457, 1460
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 617--618
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1014, $[]$, 1973
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 626--627
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1972, 2001, 2056
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 637--638
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1150, 1152, 1157
+ []
+
+[85]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 646--647
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1822--1825, 1831
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1818--1827,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1829, 1831,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1832, 1837,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1840, 1846,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1848, 1855--1859
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 663--664
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1614, 1623, 1862
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1520, 1547,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1575, 1598,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1601, 1604,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1607, 1610,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1613, 1616,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 676--678
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1619, 1622, 1625
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1056, 1073,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1181, 1187,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1192, 1210,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1218, 2030,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 685--688
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 2034, 2038, 2059
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 714--716
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1629, 1645,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 714--716
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1651, 1656, 1660
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 717--718
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1279, 1634, 1990
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 748--749
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1149, 1336, 1337
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 751--752
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1821, 1827,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 751--752
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1829, 1837, 1842
+ []
+
+[86]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 762--763
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1515, 1523,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 762--763
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1524, 1557, 1558
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 765--766
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1370, 1470, 1567
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 767--768
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1386, 1400,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 767--768
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1516, 1517, 1571
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 769--770
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1548, 1549, 1568
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 770--772
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1371, 1469,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 770--772
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1472, 1567,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 770--772
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1602, 1614, 1623
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 772--774
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1410, 1493,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 772--774
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1549, 1586, 1592
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 774--776
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1471, 1492,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 774--776
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1560, 1579, 1585
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
+[]$\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 , 1396,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1402, 1417,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1418, 1487,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1493, 1498,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1499, 1524,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1558, 1580,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1586, 1592,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1629, 1645,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 779--782
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1651, 1656, 1660
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1714, 1716,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1718, 1720,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1722, 1724,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1726, 1728,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1730, 1732,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1734, 1736,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1738, 1740,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1742, 1744,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1746, 1748,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1750, 1752,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1754, 1756,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1758, 1760,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1762, 1764,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1766, 1768,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1770, 1772,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1774, 1776,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1778, 1780,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1782, 1784,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1786, 1788,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1790, 1792,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1794, 1796,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 802--808
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1798, 1800, 1802
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 809--810
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1982, 2015, 2063
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 810--811
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \references@refpar@mss |
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 810--811
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1292, 1982, 2063
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (14.06262pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 811--812
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \references@refpar@pptt |
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 812--813
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1280, 1282, 1301
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 821--822
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1967, 1986, 2041
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 840--842
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1442, 1448,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 840--842
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1451, 1457,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 840--842
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1460, 1656, 1660
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 847--848
+[]$\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 , 1215, 2007
+ []
+
+[87]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 873--875
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1105, 1113, 1860
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 880--881
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1336, 1337, 1475
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 895--896
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1249, 1276, 2008
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 897--899
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1529, 1595,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 897--899
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1596, 1847, 1958
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 929--930
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1328, 1331--
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 929--930
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1333, 1641, 1647
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 937--939
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1420, 1969, 2049
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 943--945
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1233, 1235,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 943--945
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1239, 1243, 1244
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 945--947
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1223, 1346,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 945--947
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1347, $[]$, 1677
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 950--951
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1671, $[]$, 1679
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 951--953
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1189, 1208,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 951--953
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1211, 1223, 1225
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1225, 1341,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1342, 1428,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1429, 1437,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1445, 1446,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1454, 1455,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1487, 1492,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1579, 1585,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 955--958
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1591, $[]$, 1678
+ []
+
+[88]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 969--970
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1066, 1071, 1083
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 987--988
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \typeout@deluxetable@mss |
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 988--989
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \typeout@deluxetable@ppt |
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 1022--1024
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 1022--1024
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943
+ []
+
+) [89] (aasclass.aux) )
+Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
+ 687 strings out of 3926
+ 7187 string characters out of 65536
+ 95346 words of memory out of 192512
+ 3530 multiletter control sequences out of 10000
+ 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001
+ 31i,7n,21p,286b,1420s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s
+
+Output written on aasclass (89 pages, 323624 bytes).
+elapsed seconds = 124.88
+
+Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=plain 96.6.7) 20 JAN 1999 21:48
+(aasclass (docstrip.tex
+\blockLevel=\count26
+\emptyLines=\count27
+\processedLines=\count28
+\commentsRemoved=\count29
+\commentsPassed=\count30
+\codeLinesPassed=\count31
+\TotalprocessedLines=\count32
+\TotalcommentsRemoved=\count33
+\TotalcommentsPassed=\count34
+\TotalcodeLinesPassed=\count35
+\NumberOfFiles=\count36
+\inFile=\read0
+\inputcheck=\read1
+\@tempcnta=\count37
+\off@0=\count38
+\off@1=\count39
+\off@2=\count40
+\off@3=\count41
+\off@4=\count42
+\off@5=\count43
+\off@6=\count44
+\off@7=\count45
+\off@8=\count46
+\off@9=\count47
+\off@10=\count48
+\off@11=\count49
+\off@12=\count50
+\off@13=\count51
+\off@14=\count52
+\off@15=\count53
+\@temptokena=\toks12
+\@maxfiles=\count54
+\@maxoutfiles=\count55
+Utility: `docstrip' 2.5b <1998/04/28>
+English documentation <1998/04/03>
+
+**********************************************************
+* This program converts documented macro-files into fast *
+* loadable files by stripping off (nearly) all comments! *
+**********************************************************
+
+********************************************************
+* No Configuration file found, using default settings. *
+********************************************************
+
+)
+
+Generating file(s) aastex.cls aasclass.tex aasguide.tex aassymbols.tex sample.tex table.tex
+
+Processing file aasclass.dtx (class) -> aastex.cls
+ (doc) -> aasclass.tex
+ (guide) -> aasguide.tex
+ (symbols) -> aassymbols.tex
+ (sample) -> sample.tex
+ (table) -> table.tex
+File aasclass.dtx ended by \endinput.
+Lines processed: 9686
+Comments removed: 3461
+Comments passed: 42
+Codelines passed: 6142
+
+***********************************************************
+*
+* To finish the installation, please move the following
+* files into a directory searched by TeX:
+*
+* aastex.cls
+*
+* To produce the user documentation, run aasguide.tex through LaTeX.
+*
+* To produce the AMS and AAS symbols crib sheet, run aassymbols.tex through LaTEX.
+*
+* To typeset the aastex sample documents, run sample.tex, sample2.tex, and samp
+tbls.tex through LaTeX.
+*
+* To produce the programmer documentation, run aasclass.dtx through LaTeX.
+*
+* Happy TeXing
+***********************************************************
+No pages of output.
+elapsed seconds = 46.72
+
+Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 23 JAN 1999 02:30
+(aasguide
+LaTeX2e <1998/06/01>
+(aasguide.tex
+File: aasguide.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+(aastex.cls
+Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber
+ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 74.
+(article.cls
+Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
+(size10.clo
+File: size10.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
+)
+\c@part=\count79
+\c@section=\count80
+\c@subsection=\count81
+\c@subsubsection=\count82
+\c@paragraph=\count83
+\c@subparagraph=\count84
+\c@figure=\count85
+\c@table=\count86
+\abovecaptionskip=\skip41
+\belowcaptionskip=\skip42
+\bibindent=\dimen102
+) (latexsym.sty
+Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
+\symlasy=\mathgroup4
+LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold'
+(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85.
+) (graphicx.sty
+Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+(keyval.sty
+Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
+\KV@toks@=\toks14
+) (graphics.sty
+Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+(trig.sty
+Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
+) (graphics.cfg)
+Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85.
+(textures.def
+File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later
+ (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
+))
+\Gin@req@height=\dimen103
+\Gin@req@width=\dimen104
+) (amssymb.sty
+Package: amssymb 1996/11/03 v2.2b
+(amsfonts.sty
+Package: amsfonts 1997/09/17 v2.2e
+\@emptytoks=\toks15
+\symAMSa=\mathgroup5
+\symAMSb=\mathgroup6
+LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting math alphabet `\mathfrak' in version `bold'
+(Font) U/euf/m/n --> U/euf/b/n on input line 133.
+)) (natbib.sty
+Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
+\bibhang=\skip43
+\bibsep=\skip44
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467.
+\c@NAT@ctr=\count87
+) (verbatim.sty
+Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
+\every@verbatim=\toks16
+\verbatim@line=\toks17
+\verbatim@in@stream=\read1
+)
+\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen105
+\abstract@box=\box26
+\c@editornote=\count88
+\c@cureqno=\count89
+\pt@box=\box27
+\pt@width=\dimen106
+\pt@line=\count90
+\pt@column=\count91
+\pt@nlines=\count92
+\pt@ncol=\count93
+\pt@page=\count94
+\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen107
+\c@plate=\count95
+)
+\@indexfile=\write3
+Writing index file aasguide.idx
+(shortvrb.sty
+Package: shortvrb 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)
+)
+Package shortvrb Info: Made | a short reference for \verb on input line 102.
+(aasguide.aux)
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 170.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 170.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 170.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 170.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 170.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 170.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170.
+AAS 2-column preprint substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>.
+LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 172.
+(ulasy.fd
+File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
+)
+LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `U/lasy/b/n' in size <7> not available
+(Font) Font shape `U/lasy/m/n' tried instead on input line 172.
+LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+msa on input line 172.
+(umsa.fd
+File: umsa.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions
+)
+LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+msb on input line 172.
+(umsb.fd
+File: umsb.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions
+) (aasguide.toc
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1675) in paragraph at lines 33--33
+ [][] []\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Abbreviations for Jour-nal
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (0.41202pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 42--42
+ [][] []\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Using the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \twocolumn \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Co
+m-
+ []
+
+[1
+
+
+])
+\tf@toc=\write4
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 3179) in paragraph at lines 204--209
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Information about ac-quir-ing the AAST[]X
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1796) in paragraph at lines 204--209
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 pack-age will be mailed to you elec-tron-i-cally
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1297) in paragraph at lines 204--209
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 if you send an empty e-mail mes-sage (some
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (57.47958pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 229--235
+[][]
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (1.29999pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 237--243
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The AAS pro-vides user sup-port for the AAST[]X
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (17.18939pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 237--243
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 tron-i-cally by send-ing e-mail to \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 aastex-help@
+aas.org\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .[][]
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 3536) in paragraph at lines 255--255
+[]\OT1/cmr/bx/n/10 Command De-scrip-tions for Jour-nal
+ []
+
+[2]
+Overfull \hbox (11.4403pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 306--309
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The re-main-der of this sec-tion refers to manuscripts
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (34.9874pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 318--318
+ [] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \lower 0.5ex\hbox{${}\buildrel\lt\over\sim{}$}%[]
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (6.35497pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 338--361
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lower[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \rlap[]\OT1/cmr/
+m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \kern[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lineski
+p[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \baselineskip[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,
+ []
+
+[3]
+Overfull \hbox (25.97986pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 399--406
+[][]
+ []
+
+
+LaTeX Warning: Characters dropped after `\end{verbatim}' on input line 487.
+
+[4]
+Overfull \hbox (18.55078pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 557--563
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 It is up to the au-thor to make sure that []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \al
+taffilmark[]
+ []
+
+[5]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1019) in paragraph at lines 644--664
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 the proper el-e-ments for as-sist-ing the ed-i-tors.
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1127) in paragraph at lines 644--664
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 en-vi-ron-ment (see Sec-tions 3.15[] and 5[]); in a
+ []
+
+[6]
+Overfull \hbox (2.85645pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 824--828
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Authors should be aware that in the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 manuscrip
+t[]
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (7.1341pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 831--838
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 This sec-tion de-scribes the use of the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 delux
+etable
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 839--847
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 deluxetable[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 en-vi-ron-m
+ent is de-lim-ited
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (16.66133pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 882--891
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (11pt), the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \footnotesize[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (
+10pt) or the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \scriptsize[]
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1394) in paragraph at lines 897--909
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The width of a delux-etable is de-fined by
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 3612) in paragraph at lines 910--921
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 num-ber-ing within the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 deluxetable \OT1/cmr/m/n
+/10 en-vi-ron-
+ []
+
+[7]
+Overfull \hbox (3.66202pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 949--970
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Column head-ings are spec-i-fied with []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tabl
+ehead[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (1.81458pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 971--982
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 pro-duced by []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablehead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 or
+other L[]T[]Xcommands
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (64.80882pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1040--1049
+[][]
+ []
+
+[8]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 2165) in paragraph at lines 1158--1160
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Tabular in-for-ma-tion is type-set within the
+ []
+
+[9]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1005) in paragraph at lines 1202--1213
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 to []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablenum[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 is used as the
+ ta-ble iden-ti-fier.
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1418) in paragraph at lines 1269--1272
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Two op-tions are avail-able for sym-bol-i-cally
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1072) in paragraph at lines 1269--1272
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 dard L[]T[]X method and the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 natbib \OT1/cmr/m
+/n/10 pack-age
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 2753) in paragraph at lines 1336--1348
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Clusters of galax-ies dis-play X-ray
+ []
+
+[10]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 2376) in paragraph at lines 1428--1436
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 mul-ti-ple ci-ta-tion keys, e.g., []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \citep[]{sa
+ra86,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1314) in paragraph at lines 1428--1436
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 odea97,[]maoz95} \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 will pro-duce ``(Sarazin 198
+6;
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (17.03613pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1439--1443
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \citet[]*[[]][[]]{[]}
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (17.03613pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1439--1443
+\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \citep[]*[[]][[]]{[]}
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1565) in paragraph at lines 1467--1480
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 mech-a-nism as-so-ciates ci-ta-tions and ref-er-ences
+ []
+
+[11]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1019) in paragraph at lines 1516--1525
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The AAST[]X class uses the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 natbib \OT1/cmr/
+m/n/10 pack-
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (30.9122pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1570--1613
+ []
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (1.94704pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1626--1626
+ []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \figcaption[[]]{[]\label{[]}}[]
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 3128) in paragraph at lines 1643--1649
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 manuscript is be-ing sub-mit-ted elec-tron-i-cally.
+ []
+
+[12] [13]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1394) in paragraph at lines 1750--1790
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 bols avail-able in AAST[]X. If you wish to
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1728) in paragraph at lines 1750--1790
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 use any of these sym-bols, you must ob-tain
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 4144) in paragraph at lines 1750--1790
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 avail-able from CTAN: ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-
+ []
+
+[14]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1314) in paragraph at lines 1890--1904
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 tures, OzT[]X, and CMacT[]X for Mac-in-tosh,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1742) in paragraph at lines 1890--1904
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Win-dows, and, on UNIX com-put-ers, \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 dvips\OT1/c
+mr/m/n/10 .
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (22.93831pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1890--1904
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 T[]XLive CD, see []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 http://www.tug.org/texlive.h
+tml\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (8.66833pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1916--1916
+ [] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 {[]}{[]}{[]}{[]}{[]}[]
+ []
+
+[15]
+Overfull \hbox (11.05083pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1942--1948
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 For the ad-ven-ture-some, there is also []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \pl
+otfiddle[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 2006--2014
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 A []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 flushrt.sty \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 file op-tion
+is avail-able for
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1609) in paragraph at lines 2045--2047
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \singlespace[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 sets the ver-ti-cal spac-ing t
+o a
+ []
+
+[16]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1838) in paragraph at lines 2095--2099
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The pre-ced-ing de-tailed ex-pla-na-tion of the
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (0.93925pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2105--2114
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 A more com-pre-hen-sive ex-am-ple re-quir-ing nearly
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1325) in paragraph at lines 2105--2114
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 has three ta-bles: two marked up us-ing the
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1014) in paragraph at lines 2115--2120
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ta-bles are con-tained in the files []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 table1.te
+x\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1490) in paragraph at lines 2115--2120
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 table2.tex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 table3.tex\OT1
+/cmr/m/n/10 , and []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 complext.tex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .
+ []
+
+[17]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1558) in paragraph at lines 2171--2173
+\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 Com-mand Sum-mary \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (Prov-i-dence, RI: T[]X
+ []
+
+LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for OMS+cmr on input line 2215.
+
+(omscmr.fd
+File: omscmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions
+)
+LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OMS/cmr/m/n' in size <10> not available
+(Font) Font shape `OMS/cmsy/m/n' tried instead on input line 2215.
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1087) in paragraph at lines 2219--2224
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 takes care of hy-phen-ation au-to-mat-i-cally.
+ []
+
+! Extra }, or forgotten \endgroup.
+l.2242 ...\verb`\}`---end group}
+ .
+?
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1394) in paragraph at lines 2259--2268
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 the equa-tion be-tween []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \[[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 a
+nd []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \][] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com-mands,
+ []
+
+[18]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1990) in paragraph at lines 2301--2312
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 deluxetable[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 en-vi-ron-m
+ent is in-tended
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (27.21739pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2313--2317
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Notes in ta-bles should be marked by []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \table
+notemark[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ;
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (19.93968pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2313--2317
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 cor-re-spond-ing text should ap-pear in a []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \ta
+blenotetext[]
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (20.81256pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2334--2334
+ []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \tablecaption{This is a caption.\label{tab1}}[]
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 2361--2369
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 type-set-ting []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://[]macros/[]latex/[]packa
+ges/
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (2.5793pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2388--2393
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 manuscripts that will be sub-mit-ted electronically---
+ []
+
+[19]
+LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for OML+cmr on input line 2410.
+
+(omlcmr.fd
+File: omlcmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions
+)
+LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OML/cmr/m/n' in size <10> not available
+(Font) Font shape `OML/cmm/m/it' tried instead on input line 2410.
+
+Overfull \hbox (15.18954pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2409--2416
+ []
+ []
+
+! Missing { inserted.
+<inserted text>
+ {
+l.2441 ...erb`\}`---end group} &
+ &
+?
+
+Overfull \hbox (85.96729pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2432--2444
+ []
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (5.38377pt too wide) detected at line 2629
+[]
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (54.88292pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2672--2737
+ []
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1210) in paragraph at lines 2794--2798
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 mented in Sec-tion E.3[]), ex-cept that you do
+ []
+
+[20]
+Overfull \hbox (3.27318pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2808--2809
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 style op-tion, if used, with the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 preprint2
+ []
+
+[21] [22]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 2680) in paragraph at lines 2826--2828
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Replace any []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com
+-mand with
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (7.85611pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2835--2836
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \markcite[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (Headroom
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (2.7778pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2843--2844
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \reference[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (51.45876pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2847--2848
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \bibitem[][[]]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1783) in paragraph at lines 2865--2868
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 means that V5.0 can-not be run un-der
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 2351) in paragraph at lines 2909--2912
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 land-scape ori-en-ta-tion by us-ing the
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 5563) in paragraph at lines 2913--2918
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \\[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , the com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \table
+vspace[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,
+ []
+
+[23]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 2924--2926
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Hypertext-oriented com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \anchor[]\OT1/
+cmr/m/n/10 ,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 3482) in paragraph at lines 2929--2931
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The data com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shorttitle[] \OT1/cmr/m
+/n/10 and
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 6032) in paragraph at lines 2929--2931
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shortauthors[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 re-place []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \
+lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 and
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 3849) in paragraph at lines 2939--2944
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablevspace[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\
+OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablebreak[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 3482) in paragraph at lines 2945--2948
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The data com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shorttitle[] \OT1/cmr/m
+/n/10 and
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 6032) in paragraph at lines 2945--2948
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shortauthors[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 re-place []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \
+lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 and
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 2962--2964
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The com-mand []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \markcite[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 is
+ dep-re-cated.
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 2966--2968
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The com-mand []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \SGMLcite[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 is
+ dep-re-cated.
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1275) in paragraph at lines 2975--2976
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Replace your []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \documentstyle[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/
+10 state-ment
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (3.27318pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2984--2986
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 style op-tion, if used, with the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 preprint2
+ []
+
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 2680) in paragraph at lines 3004--3006
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Replace any []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com
+-mand with
+ []
+
+[24]
+Overfull \hbox (7.85611pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3027--3028
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \markcite[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (Headroom
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (2.7778pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3035--3036
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \reference[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (51.45876pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3039--3040
+[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \bibitem[][[]]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference
+ []
+
+(aasguide.ind [25]
+! Undefined control sequence.
+l.95 ...X\ Archive Network, \see
+ CTAN{2}
+?
+ [26
+
+] [27] [28] [29] [30]) (aasguide.aux)
+
+ *File List*
+ aastex.cls 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+ article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
+ size10.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
+latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
+graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+ keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
+graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+ trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
+graphics.cfg
+textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A
+rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
+ amssymb.sty 1996/11/03 v2.2b
+amsfonts.sty 1997/09/17 v2.2e
+ natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
+verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
+shortvrb.sty 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)
+ ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
+ umsa.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions
+ umsb.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions
+ omscmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions
+ omlcmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions
+aasguide.ind
+ ***********
+
+ )
+Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
+ 1876 strings out of 3926
+ 18884 string characters out of 65536
+ 95730 words of memory out of 200704
+ 4653 multiletter control sequences out of 10000
+ 15 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001
+ 33i,15n,26p,322b,419s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s
+
+Output written on aasguide (30 pages, 146198 bytes).
+elapsed seconds = 62.18
+
+Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 23:13
+(sample1
+LaTeX2e <1998/06/01>
+(sample.tex
+File: sample.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+(aastex.cls
+Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber
+ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 68.
+(article.cls
+Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
+(size12.clo
+File: size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
+)
+\c@part=\count79
+\c@section=\count80
+\c@subsection=\count81
+\c@subsubsection=\count82
+\c@paragraph=\count83
+\c@subparagraph=\count84
+\c@figure=\count85
+\c@table=\count86
+\abovecaptionskip=\skip41
+\belowcaptionskip=\skip42
+\bibindent=\dimen102
+) (latexsym.sty
+Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
+\symlasy=\mathgroup4
+LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold'
+(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85.
+) (graphicx.sty
+Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+(keyval.sty
+Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
+\KV@toks@=\toks14
+) (graphics.sty
+Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+(trig.sty
+Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
+) (graphics.cfg)
+Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85.
+(textures.def
+File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later
+ (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
+))
+\Gin@req@height=\dimen103
+\Gin@req@width=\dimen104
+) (amsmath.sty
+Package: amsmath 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features
+\@mathmargin=\skip43
+(amstext.sty
+Package: amstext 1996/10/28 v1.2b
+(amsgen.sty
+File: amsgen 1996/10/29 v1.2b
+\@emptytoks=\toks15
+\ex@=\dimen105
+)) (amsbsy.sty
+Package: amsbsy 1996/10/28 v1.2b
+\pmbraise@=\dimen106
+) (amsopn.sty
+Package: amsopn 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names
+)
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 188.
+\uproot@=\count87
+\leftroot@=\count88
+\classnum@=\count89
+\DOTSCASE@=\count90
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 335.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 418.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 422.
+\Mathstrutbox@=\box26
+\strutbox@=\box27
+\big@size=\dimen107
+LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 500.
+LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 501.
+\skewcharcount@=\count91
+\familycount@=\count92
+\pointcount@=\count93
+\accentdimen@=\dimen108
+\accentmu@=\count94
+\minaw@=\dimen109
+\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count95
+\dotsspace@=\muskip10
+\c@parentequation=\count96
+\dspbrk@lvl=\count97
+\tag@help=\toks16
+\row@=\count98
+\column@=\count99
+\maxfields@=\count100
+\andhelp@=\toks17
+\eqnshift@=\dimen110
+\alignsep@=\dimen111
+\tagshift@=\dimen112
+\tagwidth@=\dimen113
+\totwidth@=\dimen114
+\lineht@=\dimen115
+\@envbody=\toks18
+\multlinegap=\skip44
+\multlinetaggap=\skip45
+) (natbib.sty
+Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
+\bibhang=\skip46
+\bibsep=\skip47
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467.
+\c@NAT@ctr=\count101
+) (verbatim.sty
+Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
+\every@verbatim=\toks19
+\verbatim@line=\toks20
+\verbatim@in@stream=\read1
+)
+\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen116
+\abstract@box=\box28
+\c@editornote=\count102
+\c@cureqno=\count103
+\pt@box=\box29
+\pt@width=\dimen117
+\pt@line=\count104
+\pt@column=\count105
+\pt@nlines=\count106
+\pt@ncol=\count107
+\pt@page=\count108
+\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen118
+\c@plate=\count109
+) (sample1.aux)
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 65.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 65.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 65.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 65.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 65.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 65.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65.
+AAS manuscript substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>.
+
+Class aastex Warning: Command \authoremail is deprecated in aastex V 5.0. Using
+\email instead (please fix your document). on input line 70.
+
+[1
+
+]
+LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 97.
+(ulasy.fd
+File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
+) [2
+
+] [3] [4
+
+] (sample1.aux)
+
+ *File List*
+ aastex.cls 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+ article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
+ size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
+latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
+graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+ keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
+graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+ trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
+graphics.cfg
+textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A
+rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
+ amsmath.sty 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features
+ amstext.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b
+ amsgen.sty
+ amsbsy.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b
+ amsopn.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names
+ natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
+verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
+ ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
+ ***********
+
+ )
+Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
+ 1909 strings out of 3926
+ 19413 string characters out of 65536
+ 72809 words of memory out of 169984
+ 4744 multiletter control sequences out of 10000
+ 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001
+ 35i,8n,23p,263b,265s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s
+
+Output written on sample1 (4 pages, 3183 bytes).
+elapsed seconds = 13.10
+
+Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 23:15
+(sample2
+LaTeX2e <1998/06/01>
+(sample2.tex
+File: sample2.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+(aastex.cls
+Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber
+ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 68.
+(article.cls
+Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
+(size12.clo
+File: size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
+)
+\c@part=\count79
+\c@section=\count80
+\c@subsection=\count81
+\c@subsubsection=\count82
+\c@paragraph=\count83
+\c@subparagraph=\count84
+\c@figure=\count85
+\c@table=\count86
+\abovecaptionskip=\skip41
+\belowcaptionskip=\skip42
+\bibindent=\dimen102
+) (latexsym.sty
+Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
+\symlasy=\mathgroup4
+LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold'
+(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85.
+) (graphicx.sty
+Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+(keyval.sty
+Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
+\KV@toks@=\toks14
+) (graphics.sty
+Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+(trig.sty
+Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
+) (graphics.cfg)
+Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85.
+(textures.def
+File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later
+ (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
+))
+\Gin@req@height=\dimen103
+\Gin@req@width=\dimen104
+) (amsmath.sty
+Package: amsmath 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features
+\@mathmargin=\skip43
+(amstext.sty
+Package: amstext 1996/10/28 v1.2b
+(amsgen.sty
+File: amsgen 1996/10/29 v1.2b
+\@emptytoks=\toks15
+\ex@=\dimen105
+)) (amsbsy.sty
+Package: amsbsy 1996/10/28 v1.2b
+\pmbraise@=\dimen106
+) (amsopn.sty
+Package: amsopn 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names
+)
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 188.
+\uproot@=\count87
+\leftroot@=\count88
+\classnum@=\count89
+\DOTSCASE@=\count90
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 335.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 418.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 422.
+\Mathstrutbox@=\box26
+\strutbox@=\box27
+\big@size=\dimen107
+LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 500.
+LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 501.
+\skewcharcount@=\count91
+\familycount@=\count92
+\pointcount@=\count93
+\accentdimen@=\dimen108
+\accentmu@=\count94
+\minaw@=\dimen109
+\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count95
+\dotsspace@=\muskip10
+\c@parentequation=\count96
+\dspbrk@lvl=\count97
+\tag@help=\toks16
+\row@=\count98
+\column@=\count99
+\maxfields@=\count100
+\andhelp@=\toks17
+\eqnshift@=\dimen110
+\alignsep@=\dimen111
+\tagshift@=\dimen112
+\tagwidth@=\dimen113
+\totwidth@=\dimen114
+\lineht@=\dimen115
+\@envbody=\toks18
+\multlinegap=\skip44
+\multlinetaggap=\skip45
+) (natbib.sty
+Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
+\bibhang=\skip46
+\bibsep=\skip47
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467.
+\c@NAT@ctr=\count101
+) (verbatim.sty
+Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
+\every@verbatim=\toks19
+\verbatim@line=\toks20
+\verbatim@in@stream=\read1
+)
+\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen116
+\abstract@box=\box28
+\c@editornote=\count102
+\c@cureqno=\count103
+\pt@box=\box29
+\pt@width=\dimen117
+\pt@line=\count104
+\pt@column=\count105
+\pt@nlines=\count106
+\pt@ncol=\count107
+\pt@page=\count108
+\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen118
+\c@plate=\count109
+) (sample2.aux)
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 145.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 145.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 145.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 145.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 145.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 145.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145.
+AAS manuscript substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>.
+LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 150.
+(ulasy.fd
+File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
+) [1
+
+] [2
+
+] [3] [4] [5] [6]
+Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 436--445
+ [][]
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457
+ []$[]$
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457
+ []$[]$
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457
+ []$[]$
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457
+ []$[]$
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457
+ []$[]$
+ []
+
+Table 1 has been set to width 498.77063pt
+[7]
+Page 1 of table 2 has been set to width 424.88113pt with 23 lines per page
+[8] [9]
+Page 2 of table 2 has been set to width 438.58932pt with 23 lines per page
+[10]
+Page 3 of table 2 has been set to width 427.9186pt with 23 lines per page
+[11]
+Page 4 of table 2 has been set to width 426.20332pt with 23 lines per page
+[12]
+Page 5 of table 2 has been set to width 421.53383pt with 23 lines per page
+[13]
+Table 2 has been set to width 438.2089pt
+[14] [15
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+] [16
+
+] (sample2.aux)
+
+ *File List*
+ aastex.cls 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+ article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
+ size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
+latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
+graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+ keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
+graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+ trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
+graphics.cfg
+textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A
+rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
+ amsmath.sty 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features
+ amstext.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b
+ amsgen.sty
+ amsbsy.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b
+ amsopn.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names
+ natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
+verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
+ ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
+ ***********
+
+ )
+Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
+ 1937 strings out of 3926
+ 19626 string characters out of 65536
+ 84103 words of memory out of 169984
+ 4769 multiletter control sequences out of 10000
+ 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001
+ 35i,18n,24p,422b,491s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s
+
+Output written on sample2 (16 pages, 30435 bytes).
+elapsed seconds = 17.47
+
+Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 23:17
+(samptbls
+LaTeX2e <1998/06/01>
+(samptbls.tex
+File: samptbls.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+(aastex.cls
+Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber
+ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 68.
+(article.cls
+Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
+(size12.clo
+File: size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
+)
+\c@part=\count79
+\c@section=\count80
+\c@subsection=\count81
+\c@subsubsection=\count82
+\c@paragraph=\count83
+\c@subparagraph=\count84
+\c@figure=\count85
+\c@table=\count86
+\abovecaptionskip=\skip41
+\belowcaptionskip=\skip42
+\bibindent=\dimen102
+) (latexsym.sty
+Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
+\symlasy=\mathgroup4
+LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold'
+(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85.
+) (graphicx.sty
+Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+(keyval.sty
+Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
+\KV@toks@=\toks14
+) (graphics.sty
+Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+(trig.sty
+Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
+) (graphics.cfg)
+Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85.
+(textures.def
+File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later
+ (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
+))
+\Gin@req@height=\dimen103
+\Gin@req@width=\dimen104
+) (amsmath.sty
+Package: amsmath 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features
+\@mathmargin=\skip43
+(amstext.sty
+Package: amstext 1996/10/28 v1.2b
+(amsgen.sty
+File: amsgen 1996/10/29 v1.2b
+\@emptytoks=\toks15
+\ex@=\dimen105
+)) (amsbsy.sty
+Package: amsbsy 1996/10/28 v1.2b
+\pmbraise@=\dimen106
+) (amsopn.sty
+Package: amsopn 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names
+)
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 188.
+\uproot@=\count87
+\leftroot@=\count88
+\classnum@=\count89
+\DOTSCASE@=\count90
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 335.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 418.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 422.
+\Mathstrutbox@=\box26
+\strutbox@=\box27
+\big@size=\dimen107
+LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 500.
+LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 501.
+\skewcharcount@=\count91
+\familycount@=\count92
+\pointcount@=\count93
+\accentdimen@=\dimen108
+\accentmu@=\count94
+\minaw@=\dimen109
+\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count95
+\dotsspace@=\muskip10
+\c@parentequation=\count96
+\dspbrk@lvl=\count97
+\tag@help=\toks16
+\row@=\count98
+\column@=\count99
+\maxfields@=\count100
+\andhelp@=\toks17
+\eqnshift@=\dimen110
+\alignsep@=\dimen111
+\tagshift@=\dimen112
+\tagwidth@=\dimen113
+\totwidth@=\dimen114
+\lineht@=\dimen115
+\@envbody=\toks18
+\multlinegap=\skip44
+\multlinetaggap=\skip45
+) (natbib.sty
+Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
+\bibhang=\skip46
+\bibsep=\skip47
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467.
+\c@NAT@ctr=\count101
+) (verbatim.sty
+Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
+\every@verbatim=\toks19
+\verbatim@line=\toks20
+\verbatim@in@stream=\read1
+)
+\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen116
+\abstract@box=\box28
+\c@editornote=\count102
+\c@cureqno=\count103
+\pt@box=\box29
+\pt@width=\dimen117
+\pt@line=\count104
+\pt@column=\count105
+\pt@nlines=\count106
+\pt@ncol=\count107
+\pt@page=\count108
+\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen118
+\c@plate=\count109
+) (samptbls.aux (table1.aux) (table2.aux) (table3.aux) (complext.aux))
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 70.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 70.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 70.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 70.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 70.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 70.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70.
+AAS manuscript substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>.
+(table1.tex
+File: table1.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 73.
+(ulasy.fd
+File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
+)
+Overfull \hbox (28.88113pt too wide) in alignment at lines 73--94
+[][][][][][][][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 1 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[1]
+Overfull \hbox (42.58932pt too wide) in alignment at lines 94--114
+[][][][][][][][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 2 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[2]
+
+Class aastex Warning: Command \tablebreak is deprecated in aastex V 5.0. Using \
+\ instead (please fix your document). on input line 133.
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (28.54768pt too wide) in alignment at lines 114--134
+[][][][][][][][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 3 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[3]
+Overfull \hbox (22.67274pt too wide) in alignment at lines 134--154
+[][][][][][][][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 4 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[4]
+Overfull \hbox (32.13792pt too wide) in alignment at lines 154--174
+[][][][][][][][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 5 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[5]
+Overfull \hbox (22.67274pt too wide) in alignment at lines 174--194
+[][][][][][][][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 6 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[6]
+Overfull \hbox (22.67274pt too wide) in alignment at lines 194--214
+[][][][][][][][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 7 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[7]
+Overfull \hbox (47.96555pt too wide) in alignment at lines 214--234
+[][][][][][][][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 8 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[8]
+Overfull \hbox (26.39375pt too wide) in alignment at lines 234--254
+[][][][][][][][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 9 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[9]
+
+Class aastex Warning: Command \tablebreak is deprecated in aastex V 5.0. Using \
+\ instead (please fix your document). on input line 255.
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (30.20332pt too wide) in alignment at lines 254--274
+[][][][][][][][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 10 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[10]
+Overfull \hbox (35.85893pt too wide) in alignment at lines 274--294
+[][][][][][][][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 11 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[11]
+Overfull \hbox (30.20332pt too wide) in alignment at lines 294--314
+[][][][][][][][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 12 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[12]
+Overfull \hbox (51.67407pt too wide) in alignment at lines 314--345
+[][][][][][][][][][][]
+ []
+
+Table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt
+) [13] (table2.tex
+File: table2.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+Page 1 of table 2 has been set to width 358.29579pt with 23 lines per page
+[14]
+Page 2 of table 2 has been set to width 358.29579pt with 23 lines per page
+[15]
+Page 3 of table 2 has been set to width 366.29016pt with 23 lines per page
+[16]
+Page 4 of table 2 has been set to width 350.48625pt with 23 lines per page
+[17]
+Table 2 has been set to width 355.84999pt
+) [18] (table3.tex
+File: table3.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 71--92
+[][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 1 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[19]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 92--112
+[][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 2 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[20]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 112--132
+[][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 3 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[21]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 132--152
+[][][][][]
+ []
+
+Page 4 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page
+[22]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 152--166
+[][][][][]
+ []
+
+Table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt
+) [23] (complext.tex
+File: complext.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+Table 4 has been set to width 405.92818pt
+) [24] (samptbls.aux (table1.aux) (table2.aux) (table3.aux) (complext.aux))
+
+ *File List*
+ aastex.cls 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+ article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
+ size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
+latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
+graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+ keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
+graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+ trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
+graphics.cfg
+textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A
+rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
+ amsmath.sty 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features
+ amstext.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b
+ amsgen.sty
+ amsbsy.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b
+ amsopn.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names
+ natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
+verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
+ table1.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+ ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
+ table2.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+ table3.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+complext.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
+ ***********
+
+ )
+Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
+ 1977 strings out of 3926
+ 19844 string characters out of 65536
+ 80327 words of memory out of 169984
+ 4746 multiletter control sequences out of 10000
+ 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001
+ 35i,12n,24p,264b,455s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s
+
+Output written on samptbls (24 pages, 52470 bytes).
+elapsed seconds = 27.12
+\par
+}